Vigor2765 Series 35b Security Router User's Guide - Geizhals ...

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide ii

Vigor2765 Series 35b Security Router

User’s Guide

Version: 1.0

Firmware Version: V4.0.3

(For future update, please visit DrayTek web site)

Date: July 16, 2019

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide iii

Copyrights

© All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders.

Trademarks

The following trademarks are used in this document:

Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.

Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.

Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

Safety Instructions

Read the installation guide thoroughly before you set up the router.

The router is a complicated electronic unit that may be repaired only be authorized and qualified personnel. Do not try to open or repair the router yourself.

Do not place the router in a damp or humid place, e.g. a bathroom.

The router should be used in a sheltered area, within a temperature range of +5 to +40 Celsius.

Do not expose the router to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The housing and electronic components may be damaged by direct sunlight or heat sources.

Do not deploy the cable for LAN connection outdoor to prevent electronic shock hazards.

Keep the package out of reach of children.

When you want to dispose of the router, please follow local regulations on conservation of the environment.

Warranty

We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the router will be free from any defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Be a Registered Owner

Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via http://www.DrayTek.com.

Firmware & Tools Updates

Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents.

http://www.DrayTek.com

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide iv

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide v

TTaabbllee ooff CCoonntteennttss

Part I Installation................................................................................................................1

I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 2

I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 3

I-2 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................................... 5

I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router ......................................................................................................... 5

I-2-2 Wall-Mounted Installation .................................................................................................... 6

I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router ................................................................................. 7

I-3 Accessing Web Page .................................................................................................................. 14

I-4 Changing Password.................................................................................................................... 16

I-5 Dashboard................................................................................................................................... 18

I-5-1 Virtual Panel ...................................................................................................................... 18

I-5-2 Name with a Link ............................................................................................................... 19

I-5-3 Quick Access for Common Used Menu ............................................................................ 20

I-5-4 GUI Map ............................................................................................................................ 21

I-5-5 Web Console ..................................................................................................................... 22

I-5-6 Config Backup ................................................................................................................... 23

I-5-7 Manual Download.............................................................................................................. 24

I-5-8 Logout................................................................................................................................ 24

I-5-9 Online Status ..................................................................................................................... 25 I-5-9-1 Physical Connection ......................................................................25 I-5-9-2 Virtual WAN ...............................................................................27

I-6 Quick Start Wizard ...................................................................................................................... 28

I-6-1 For WAN1 (ADSL) ............................................................................................................. 29

I-6-2 For WAN2 (Ethernet)......................................................................................................... 33

I-6-3 For WAN3 (USB) ............................................................................................................... 43

I-7 Service Activation Wizard ........................................................................................................... 45

I-8 Registering Vigor Router............................................................................................................. 47

Part II Connectivity ..........................................................................................................49

II-1 WAN........................................................................................................................................... 50

Web User Interface .................................................................................................................... 52

II-1-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 52 II-1-1-1 WAN1 (ADSL/VDSL) ......................................................................53 II-1-1-2 WAN2 (Ethernet) .........................................................................54 II-1-1-3 WAN3 (USB) ...............................................................................55

II-1-2 Internet Access................................................................................................................. 56 II-1-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE/PPPoA in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL)..................58 II-1-2-2 Details Page for MPoA/Static or Dynamic IP in WAN1 (Physical Mode: ADSL) .61 II-1-2-3 Details Page for PPPoE in Etherenet WAN ...........................................65 II-1-2-4 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in Etherenet WAN..........................68 II-1-2-5 Details Page for PPTP/L2TP in Etherenet WAN .....................................71 II-1-2-6 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) in USB WAN ....................73 II-1-2-7 Details Page for 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) in USB WAN ..................75

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide vi

II-1-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3.............................77 II-1-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in WAN1/WAN2 .........................................78 II-1-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3..............................80 II-1-2-11 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 ............................81 II-1-2-12 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in WAN1/WAN2...........................83 II-1-2-13 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in in WAN1/WAN2 ............................84 II-1-2-14 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in WAN1 / WAN2 ....................86 II-1-2-15 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in WAN1 / WAN2.......................................88

II-1-3 Multi-PVC/VLAN............................................................................................................... 90

II-1-4 WAN Budget..................................................................................................................... 96 II-1-4-1 General Setup ............................................................................96 II-1-4-2 Status ......................................................................................99

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 100 A-1 How to assign an IPv6 address to LAN clients?......................................... 100 A-2 How to configure IPv6 on WAN interface? .............................................. 103

II-2 LAN .......................................................................................................................................... 108

Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 110

II-2-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 110 II-2-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup ...................... 112 II-2-1-2 Details Page for LAN2 ................................................................. 114 II-2-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet .................................................. 115 II-2-1-4 Details Page for LAN1~ LAN2 – IPv6 Setup ......................................... 117 II-2-1-5 DHCP Server Option ................................................................... 120

II-2-2 VLAN .............................................................................................................................. 122

II-2-3 Bind IP to MAC............................................................................................................... 125

II-2-4 LAN Port Mirror............................................................................................................... 127

II-2-5 Wired 802.1x .................................................................................................................. 127

II-3 NAT .......................................................................................................................................... 129


II-3-1 Port Redirection.............................................................................................................. 130

II-3-2 DMZ Host ....................................................................................................................... 134

II-3-3 Open Ports ..................................................................................................................... 137

II-3-4 Port Triggering................................................................................................................ 139

II-3-5 ALG................................................................................................................................. 141

II-4 Applications .............................................................................................................................. 142


II-4-1 Dynamic DNS................................................................................................................. 144

II-4-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding .......................................................................................... 148

II-4-3 DNS Security .................................................................................................................. 151 II-4-3-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 151 II-4-3-2 Domain Diagnose ....................................................................... 152

II-4-4 Schedule......................................................................................................................... 153

II-4-5 RADIUS .......................................................................................................................... 155

II-4-6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................. 157

II-4-7 IGMP............................................................................................................................... 158 II-4-7-1 General Setting ........................................................................ 158

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide vii

II-4-7-2 Working Group ......................................................................... 159

II-4-8 Wake on LAN ................................................................................................................. 159

II-4-9 SMS / Mail Alert Service................................................................................................. 160 II-4-9-1 SMS Alert ................................................................................ 160 II-4-9-2 Mail Alert ............................................................................... 161

II-4-10 Bonjour ......................................................................................................................... 163

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 166 A-1 How to Configure Customized DDNS?.................................................... 166

II-5 Routing..................................................................................................................................... 170


II-5-1 Static Route .................................................................................................................... 171 II-5-1-1 Static Route for IPv4 .................................................................. 171 II-5-1-2 Static Route for IPv6 .................................................................. 175

II-5-2 Route Policy ................................................................................................................... 176 II-5-2-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 176 II-5-2-2 Diagnose ................................................................................. 182

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 184 A-1 How to set up Address Mapping with Route Policy? .................................. 184 A-2 How to use destination domain name in a route policy?............................. 186

Part III Wireless LAN......................................................................................................189

III-1 Wireless LAN .......................................................................................................................... 190


III-1-1 Wireless Wizard............................................................................................................. 193

III-1-2 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 196

III-1-3 Security.......................................................................................................................... 198

III-1-4 Access Control .............................................................................................................. 200

III-1-5 WPS............................................................................................................................... 201

III-1-6 WDS (for WLAN 5 GHz)................................................................................................ 204

III-1-7 Advanced Setting .......................................................................................................... 207

III-1-8 Station Control............................................................................................................... 210

III-1-9 Bandwidth Management................................................................................................ 211

III-1-10 AP Discovery ............................................................................................................... 212

III-1-11 Airtime Fairness........................................................................................................... 213

III-1-12 Band Steering.............................................................................................................. 215

III-1-13 Roaming ...................................................................................................................... 219

III-1-14 Station List................................................................................................................... 220

Part IV VPN.....................................................................................................................221

IV-1 VPN and Remote Access ....................................................................................................... 222


IV-1-1 VPN Client Wizard ........................................................................................................ 223

IV-1-2 VPN Server Wizard....................................................................................................... 230

IV-1-3 Remote Access Control ................................................................................................ 234

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide viii

IV-1-4 PPP General Setup....................................................................................................... 235

IV-1-5 IPsec General Setup..................................................................................................... 237

IV-1-6 IPsec Peer Identity ........................................................................................................ 239

IV-1-7 OpenVPN ...................................................................................................................... 241 IV-1-7-1 General Setup ......................................................................... 241 IV-1-7-2 Client Config........................................................................... 242

IV-1-8 Remote Dial-in User...................................................................................................... 243

IV-1-9 LAN to LAN ................................................................................................................... 248

IV-1-10 Connection Management............................................................................................ 255

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 256 A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Vigor Routers via IPsec Main Mode ... 256

IV-2 SSL VPN................................................................................................................................. 261


IV-2-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 262

IV-2-2 User Account................................................................................................................. 263

IV-2-3 SSL Portal Online User................................................................................................. 267

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 268 A-1 Vigor Router to Vigor Router – SSL VPN................................................. 268 VPN Client (Dial-out Site) Setup .............................................................. 269 Establishing the VPN Tunnel................................................................... 271

IV-3 Certificate Management.......................................................................................................... 272


IV-3-1 Local Certificate ............................................................................................................ 273

IV-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate................................................................................................... 277

IV-3-3 Certificate Backup......................................................................................................... 279

IV-3-4 Self-Signed Certificate .................................................................................................. 280

Part V Security ...............................................................................................................281

V-1 Firewall..................................................................................................................................... 282


V-1-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 284

V-1-2 Filter Setup..................................................................................................................... 289

V-1-3 DoS Defense.................................................................................................................. 298 V-1-3-1 DoS Defense............................................................................. 298 V-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense....................................................................... 301

V-1-4 Diagnose ........................................................................................................................ 302

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 305 A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet ........................ 305 A-2 How to backup and restore firewall rule and object settings? ..................... 309

V-2 CSM (Central Security Management).......................................................................................311


V-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile ............................................................................................... 312

V-2-2 APPE Signature Upgrade .............................................................................................. 314

V-2-3 URL Content Filter Profile .............................................................................................. 315

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide ix

V-2-4 Web Content Filter Profile.............................................................................................. 320

V-2-5 DNS Filter Profile ........................................................................................................... 324

V-2-6 APPE Support List ......................................................................................................... 326

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 327 A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor ................................................. 327 A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL Content Filter .................................................................................... 332 A-3 How to use APP Enforcement to block application like Facebook, YouTube or TeamViewer? ..................................................................................... 337

Part VI Management ......................................................................................................341

VI-1 System Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 342


VI-1-1 System Status ............................................................................................................... 344

VI-1-2 TR-069 .......................................................................................................................... 346

VI-1-3 Administrator Password ................................................................................................ 349

VI-1-4 User Password.............................................................................................................. 353

VI-1-5 Login Page Greeting ..................................................................................................... 356

VI-1-6 Configuration Backup.................................................................................................... 358

VI-1-7 SysLog/Mail Alert .......................................................................................................... 361

VI-1-8 Time and Date............................................................................................................... 364

VI-1-9 SNMP............................................................................................................................ 365

VI-1-10 Management ............................................................................................................... 367

VI-1-11 Panel Control .............................................................................................................. 372

VI-1-12 Self-Signed Certificate ................................................................................................ 376

VI-1-13 Reboot System............................................................................................................ 378

VI-1-14 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................... 379

VI-1-15 Firmware Backup ........................................................................................................ 380

VI-1-16 Modem Code Upgrade................................................................................................ 381

VI-1-17 Activation..................................................................................................................... 381

VI-1-18 Dashboard Control ...................................................................................................... 383

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 384 A-1 How to prevent CPE's settings from being changed by the end-users? ............ 384

VI-2 Bandwidth Management......................................................................................................... 387


VI-2-1 Sessions Limit ............................................................................................................... 389

VI-2-2 Bandwidth Limit............................................................................................................. 391

VI-2-3 Quality of Service .......................................................................................................... 393

VI-2-4 APP QoS....................................................................................................................... 399

VI-3 Hotspot Web Portal................................................................................................................. 401


VI-3-1 Profile Setup.................................................................................................................. 401 VI-3-1-1 Login Method .......................................................................... 402

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide x

VI-3-1-2 Steps for Configuring a Web Portal Profile....................................... 402

VI-3-2 Quota Management ...................................................................................................... 418

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 421 A-1 How to allow users login to Vigor’s Hotspot with their social media accounts (e.g., Facebook & Google) ............................................................................. 421 A-2 How to allow hotspot clients to get login PIN code via SMS?........................ 429

VI-4 Central Management (AP)...................................................................................................... 437


VI-4-1 Status ............................................................................................................................ 438

VI-4-2 WLAN Profile................................................................................................................. 440

VI-4-3 AP Maintenance............................................................................................................ 445

VI-4-4 Traffic Graph ................................................................................................................. 446

VI-4-5 Load Balance ................................................................................................................ 447

VI-5 Central Management (External Devices) ............................................................................... 449

Part VII Others................................................................................................................451

VII-1 Objects Settings..................................................................................................................... 452


VII-1-1 IP Object ...................................................................................................................... 453

VII-1-2 IP Group....................................................................................................................... 457

VII-1-3 IPv6 Object................................................................................................................... 458

VII-1-4 IPv6 Group ................................................................................................................... 461

VII-1-5 Service Type Object..................................................................................................... 462

VII-1-6 Service Type Group ..................................................................................................... 464

VII-1-7 Keyword Object............................................................................................................ 466

VII-1-8 Keyword Group ............................................................................................................ 468

VII-1-9 File Extension Object ................................................................................................... 469

VII-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object ........................................................................................... 471

VII-1-11 Notification Object ...................................................................................................... 476

VII-1-12 String Object .............................................................................................................. 477

VII-1-13 Country Object ........................................................................................................... 479

VII-1-14 Objects Backup/Restore ............................................................................................ 481

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 482 A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN Disconnection .................................................................................... 482

VII-2 USB Application..................................................................................................................... 486


VII-2-1 USB General Settings.................................................................................................. 487

VII-2-2 USB User Management ............................................................................................... 488

VII-2-3 File Explorer ................................................................................................................. 491

VII-2-4 USB Device Status....................................................................................................... 492

VII-2-5 Temperature Sensor .................................................................................................... 493

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide xi

VII-2-6 Modem Support List ..................................................................................................... 494

VII-2-7 SMB Client Support List ............................................................................................... 495

Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 496 A-1 How can I get the files from USB storage device connecting to Vigor router? ... 496

Part VIII Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................499

VIII-1 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................... 500


VIII-1-1 Dial-out Triggering....................................................................................................... 501

VIII-1-2 Routing Table.............................................................................................................. 502

VIII-1-3 ARP Cache Table ....................................................................................................... 503

VIII-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table ................................................................................................. 504

VIII-1-5 DHCP Table ................................................................................................................ 505

VIII-1-6 NAT Sessions Table ................................................................................................... 506

VIII-1-7 DNS Cache Table ....................................................................................................... 507

VIII-1-8 Ping Diagnosis ............................................................................................................ 508

VIII-1-9 Data Flow Monitor ....................................................................................................... 510

VIII-1-10 Traffic Graph ............................................................................................................. 512

VIII-1-11 Trace Route .............................................................................................................. 513

VIII-1-12 Syslog Explorer ......................................................................................................... 514

VIII-1-13 IPv6 TSPC Status ..................................................................................................... 516

VIII-1-14 DSL Status ................................................................................................................ 517

VIII-1-15 DoS Flood Table ....................................................................................................... 518

VIII-1-16 Route Policy Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 519

VIII-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not ..................................................................... 521

VIII-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not................... 522

VIII-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer .............................................................................. 525

VIII-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not ......................................................................... 527

VIII-6 Problems for 3G/4G Network Connection ............................................................................ 528

VIII-7 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary .................................................................. 529

VIII-8 Contacting DrayTek .............................................................................................................. 530

Part IX DrayTek Tools ....................................................................................................531

IX-1 SmartVPN Client..................................................................................................................... 532

IX-1-1 DrayTek Android-based SmartVPN APP for the establishment of SSL VPN connection................................................................................................................................................. 532

IX-1-2 How to Use SmartVPN Android APP to Establish SSL VPN Tunnel?.......................... 533

Part X Telnet Commands...............................................................................................537

Accessing Telnet of Vigor2765....................................................................................................... 538

Vigor2765 Series User’s Guide 1

PPaarrtt II IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to install the device in hardware and software.


II--11 IInnttrroodduuccttiioonn

TThhiiss iiss aa ggeenneerriicc IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall vveerrssiioonn ooff tthhee uusseerr gguuiiddee.. SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonn,, ccoommppaattiibbiilliittyy aanndd ffeeaattuurreess vvaarryy bbyy rreeggiioonn.. FFoorr ssppeecciiffiicc uusseerr gguuiiddeess ssuuiittaabbllee ffoorr yyoouurr rreeggiioonn oorr pprroodduucctt,, pplleeaassee ccoonnttaacctt llooccaall ddiissttrriibbuuttoorr..

Vigor2765 series is a VDSL2 35b router. It integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users control works well with large bandwidth.

By adopting hardware-based VPN platform and hardware encryption of AES/DES/3DES, the router increases the performance of VPN greatly and offers several protocols (such as IPSec/PPTP/L2TP) with up to 2 VPN tunnels.

The object-based design used in SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) firewall allows users to set firewall policy easily. CSM (Content Security Management) provides users control and management in IM (Instant Messenger) and P2P (Peer to Peer) more efficiency than before. By the way, DoS/DDoS prevention and URL/Web content filter strengthen the security outside and control inside.

Object-based firewall is flexible and allows your network be safe. In addition, Vigor2765 Series supports USB interface for connecting USB printer to share printer, USB storage device for sharing files, or for 3G/4G WAN.


II--11--11 IInnddiiccaattoorrss aanndd CCoonnnneeccttoorrss

Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first.

LED Status Explanation Blinking The router is powered on and running normally.

(Activity) Off The router is powered off.

On The DSL port is connected. Blinking (Slowly)

The router is ready. (DSL)

Blinking (Quickly)

The router is trying to connect to Internet.

On (Green) The wireless access point is ready. Blinking (Green)

The data is transmitting via wireless connection based on the rate of 2.4GHz.

Blinking (Orange)

Blinks with one second cycle for two minutes. The WPS function is active.

(Wireless LAN On/Off/WPS)

Off The wireless access point is turned off. On (Green) The wireless access point is ready. Blinking (Green)

The data is transmitting via wireless connection based on the rate of 5GHz.

(Wireless LAN On/Off/WPS) Blinking

(Orange) Blinks with one second cycle for two minutes. The WPS function is active.

On The LAN port is connected. Blinking The data is transmitting.

~ (LAN1/2/3/4)

Off The LAN port is disconnected.

On A USB device is connected and active. (USB) Blinking The data is transmitting.


VViiggoorr22776655

VViiggoorr22776655aacc

Interface Description Factory Reset Restore the default settings. Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is

blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button. Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.

WLAN ON/OFF/WPS

WLAN On - Press the button and release it within 2 seconds. When the wireless function is ready, the green LED will be on.

WLAN Off - Press the button and release it within 2 seconds to turn off the WLAN function. When the wireless function is not ready, the LED will be off.

WPS - When WPS function is enabled by web user interface, press this button for more than 2 seconds to wait for client’s device making network connection through WPS.

USB1~USB2 Connector for a USB device (for 3G/4G USB Modem or printer).

P1~P4 Connectors for local networked devices.

DSL Connector for accessing the Internet.

I / O Power Switch.

PWR Connector for a power adapter.


II--22 HHaarrddwwaarree IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

II--22--11 IInnssttaalllliinngg VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr

Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly.

1. Connect the DSL interface to the land line jack with a DSL line cable.

2. Connect one port of 4-port switch to your computer with a RJ-45 cable. This device allows you to connect 4 PCs directly.

3. Connect detachable antennas to the router.

4. Connect one end of the power cord to the power port of this device. Connect the other end to the wall outlet of electricity.

5. Power on the router.

6. Check the ACT and DSL, LAN LEDs to assure network connection.

(For the detailed information of LED status, please refer to section I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors.)


II--22--22 WWaallll--MMoouunntteedd IInnssttaallllaattiioonn

Vigor2765 has keyhole type mounting slots on the underside.

1. A template is provided on the Vigor2765 packaging box to enable you to space the screws correctly on the wall.

2. Place the template on the wall and drill the holes according to the recommended instruction.

3. Fit screws into the wall using the appropriate type of wall plug.

Note

The recommended drill diameter shall be 6.5mm (1/4”).

4. When you finished about procedure, the router has been mounted on the wall firmly.


II--22--33 IInnssttaalllliinngg UUSSBB PPrriinntteerr ttoo VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr

You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows 7. For other Windows system, please visit www.DrayTek.com.

Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers (or wireless clients).

1. Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port.

2. Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Devices and Printers.

3. Click Add a printer.


4. A dialog will appear. Click Add a local printer and click Next.

5. In this dialog, choose Create a new port. In the field of Type of port, use the drop down list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Then, click Next.


6. In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router’s LAN IP) in the field of Hostname or IP Address and type 192.168.1.1 as the Port name. Then, click Next.

7. Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.


8. Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the selection, click Next.

9. Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.


10. Choose Do not share this printer and click Next.

11. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.


12. The new printer has been added and displayed under Printers and Faxes. Click the new printer icon and click Printer server properties.

13. Edit the property of the new printer you have added by clicking Configure Port.


14. Select "LPR" on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name.


II--33 AAcccceessssiinngg WWeebb PPaaggee

1. Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly.

You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later section - Trouble Shooting of the guide.

2. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window will be open to ask for username and password.

3. Please type “admin/admin” as the Username/Password and click Login.

Info

If you fail to access to the web configuration, please go to “Trouble Shooting” for detecting and solving your problem.


4. Now, the Main Screen will appear.

Info

The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the router you have.

5. The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.


II--44 CChhaannggiinngg PPaasssswwoorrdd

Please change the password for the original security of the router.

1. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will open to ask for username and password.

2. Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user interface with admin mode.

3. Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password.

4. Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password. Type New Password and Confirm Password. Then click OK to continue.

Info

The maximum length of the password you can set is 23 characters.

5. Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the Web user interface for this router.


Info

Even the password is changed, the Username for logging onto the web user interface is still “admin”.


II--55 DDaasshhbbooaarrdd

Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access, IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access.

Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page.

A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen. Refer to the following figure:

II--55--11 VViirrttuuaall PPaanneell

On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router) displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you move and click the mouse cursor on LEDs (except ACT), USB ports, LAN, or WAN, related web setting page will be open for you to configure if required.


For detailed information about the LED display, refer to I-1-1 LED Indicators and Connectors.

II--55--22 NNaammee wwiitthh aa LLiinnkk

A name with a link (e.g., Router Name, Current Time, WAN1~4 and etc.) below means you can click it to open the configuration page for modification.


II--55--33 QQuuiicckk AAcccceessss ffoorr CCoommmmoonn UUsseedd MMeennuu

All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be accessed in a quick way just for convenience.

Look at the right side of the Dashboard. You will find a group of common used functions grouped under Quick Access.

The function links of System Status, Dynamic DDNS, TR-069, User Management, IM/P2P Block, Schedule, Syslog/Mail Alert, RADIUS, Firewall Object Setting and Data Flow Monitor are displayed here. Move your mouse cursor on any one of the links and click on it. The corresponding setting page will be open immediately.

In addition, quick access for VPN security settings such as Remote Dial-in User and LAN to LAN are located on the bottom of this page. Scroll down the page to find them and use them if required.

Note that there is a plus ( ) icon located on the left side of VPN/LAN. Click it to review the VPN connection(s) used presently.


Host connected physically to the router via LAN port(s) will be displayed with green circles in the field of Connected.

All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port. The purpose is to perform the traffic monitor of the host(s).

II--55--44 GGUUII MMaapp

All the functions the router supports are listed with table clearly in this page. Users can click the function link to access into the setting page of the function for detailed configuration. Click the icon on the top of the main screen to display all the functions.


II--55--55 WWeebb CCoonnssoollee

It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user interface.

Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.


II--55--66 CCoonnffiigg BBaacckkuupp

There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup.

Simply click the icon on the top of the main screen to store the setting.


II--55--77 MMaannuuaall DDoowwnnllooaadd

Click this icon to open online user’s guide of Vigor router. This document offers detailed information for the settings on web user interface.

II--55--88 LLooggoouutt

Click this icon to exit the web user interface.


II--55--99 OOnnlliinnee SSttaattuuss

II--55--99--11 PPhhyyssiiccaall CCoonnnneeccttiioonn Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN connection status, ADSL information, and so on.

Physical Connection for IPv4 Protocol


Physical Connection for IPv6 Protocol

Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below:

Item Description

LAN Status Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for WAN interface.

Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address for WAN interface.

IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.

TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface.

RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface.

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 /WAN4 Status

Enable – Yes in red means such interface is available but not enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled.

Line – Displays the physical connection (VDSL, ADSL, Ethernet, or USB) of this interface.

Name – Display the name of the router.

Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., PPPoE).

Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.

IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.

GW IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.

TX Packets - Displays the total transmitted packets at the WAN interface.

TX Rate - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the WAN interface.

RX Packets - Displays the total number of received packets at the WAN interface.

RX Rate - Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN


Item Description

interface.

Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below:

Item Description

LAN Status IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface..

TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface.

RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN interface.

TX Bytes - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the LAN interface.

RX Bytes - Displays the speed of received octets at the LAN interface.

WAN IPv6 Status Enable – No in red means such interface is available but not enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled. No in red means such interface is not available.

Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., TSPC).

Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.

IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.

Gateway IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.

Info

The words in green mean that the WAN connection of that interface is ready for accessing Internet; the words in red mean that the WAN connection of that interface is not ready for accessing Internet.

II--55--99--22 VViirrttuuaall WWAANN Such page displays the virtual WAN connection information.

Virtual WAN are used by TR-069 management, VoIP service and so on.

The field of Application will list the purpose of such WAN connection.


II--66 QQuuiicckk SSttaarrtt WWiizzaarrdd

Quick Start Wizard can help you to deploy and use the router easily and quickly. Click Wizards>>Quick Start Wizard. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login password. After typing the password, please click Next.

On the next page as shown below, please select the WAN interface (WAN 1 to WAN3) that you use. If DSL interface is used, please choose WAN1; if Ethernet interface is used, please choose WAN2; if 3G/4G USB modem is used, please choose WAN3. For WAN2, choose Auto negotiation as the physical type for your router.

WAN1~ WAN3 will bring up different configuration page. Refer to the following sections for detailed information.


II--66--11 FFoorr WWAANN11 ((AADDSSLL))

WAN1 is specified for ADSL or VDSL2 connection.

Available settings are explained as follows:

Item Description

Display Name Type a name to identify such WAN.

VLAN Tag insertion (VDSL2)/(ADSL)

The settings configured in this field are available for WAN1 and WAN2.

Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.

The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on the WAN while sending them out.

Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the packets sending by WAN1.

Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.

Tag value – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is from 0 to 4095.

Priority – Type the packet priority number for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.

Please select the appropriate Internet access type according to the information from your ISP. Click Next.

PPPPPPooEE//PPPPPPooAA

PPPoE stands for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. It relies on two widely accepted standards: PPP and Ethernet. It connects users through an Ethernet to the Internet with a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem. All the users over the Ethernet can share a common connection.

PPPoE is used for most of DSL modem users. All local users can share one PPPoE connection for accessing the Internet. Your service provider will provide you information about user name, password, and authentication mode.

1. Choose WAN1 as WAN Interface and click the Next button; you will get the following page. Choose PPPoE XXXX or PPPoA XXXXX as the protocol.



Item Description

Protocol / Encapsulation

Choose PPPoE/PPPoA for WAN1 interface.

VPI Enter the value provided by ISP.

Auto detect – Click this button to have the VPI and VCI to be detected by the system automatically

VCI Type in the value provided by ISP.

Fixed IP Click Yes to enable Fixed IP feature.

IP Address Enter the IP address if Fixed IP is enabled.

Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for the IP address.

Primary DNS Enter the primary IP address for the router.

Secondary DNS Enter secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

Back Click it to return to previous setting page.

Next Click it to get into the next setting page.

Cancel Click it to give up the quick start wizard.

2. After finished the above settings, simply click Next.



Item Description

Service Name (Optional)

Enter the description of the specific network service.

User Name Enter the valid user name (maximum 63 characters) provided by the ISP in this field.

Password Enter a valid password provided by the ISP.

Confirm Password Retype the password.




3. Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

4. Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown.


5. Now, you can enjoy surfing on the Internet.

MMPPooAA

1. Choose WAN1 as WAN Interface and click the Next button; you will get the following page.


Item Description

Protocol There are two modes offered for you to choose for WAN1 interface. Choose MPoA as the protocol.

For ADSL Only Such field is provided for ADSL only. You have to choose encapsulation and type the values for VPI and VCI. Or, click Auto detect to find out the best values.

Fixed IP Click Yes to enable Fixed IP feature.

IP Address Enter the IP address if Fixed IP is enabled.

Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.

Default Gateway Enter the IP address as the default gateway.


Secondary DNS Enter the secondary IP address for necessity in the future.





2. Please type in the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.



II--66--22 FFoorr WWAANN22 ((EEtthheerrnneett))

WAN2 is dedicated to physical mode in Ethernet. Please select the appropriate Internet access type according to the information from your ISP. For example, you should select PPPoE mode if the ISP provides you PPPoE interface.



Item Description

Display Name Type a name for the router.

VLAN Tag insertion Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.




Tag value – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is form 0 to 4095.


PPPPPPooEE

PPPoE stands for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. It relies on two widely accepted standards: PPP and Ethernet. It connects users through an Ethernet to the Internet with a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem. All the users over the Ethernet can share a common connection.

PPPoE is used for most of DSL modem users. All local users can share one PPPoE connection for accessing the Internet. Your service provider will provide you information about user name, password, and authentication mode.

1. Choose WAN2 as the WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.


2. Click PPPoE as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue.


Item Description

Service Name (Optional)

Enter the description of the specific network service.

Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.

Note: The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.

Note: The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.






3. Please manually enter the Username/Password provided by your ISP. Click Next for viewing summary of such connection.




PPPPTTPP//LL22TTPP


2. Click PPTP/L2TP as the Internet Access Type. Then click Next to continue.


Item Description

Username Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.

The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.




WAN IP Configuration Obtain an IP address automatically – the router will get an IP address automatically from DHCP server.

Specify an IP address – you have to type relational settings manually.

IP Address - Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask –Type the subnet mask.

Gateway – Type the IP address of the gateway.

Primary DNS –Type in the primary IP address for the router.

Second DNS –Type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

PPTP Server / L2TP Server

Enter the IP address of the server.




3. Please type in the IP address/mask/gateway information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for viewing summary of such connection.




SSttaattiicc IIPP


2. Click Static IP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue.


Item Description

WAN IP Enter the IP address.

Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.

Gateway Enter the IP address of gateway.


Secondary DNS Enter the secondary IP address for necessity in the future.





3. Please type in the IP address information originally provided by your ISP. Then click Next for next step.




DDHHCCPP

1. Choose WAN2 as WAN Interface and click the Next button. The following page will be open for you to specify Internet Access Type.

2. Click DHCP as the Internet Access type. Simply click Next to continue.


Item Description

Host Name Type the name of the host.

Note: The maximum length of the host name you can set is 39 characters.

MAC Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to enter the MAC address.





3. After finished the settings above, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.




II--66--33 FFoorr WWAANN33 ((UUSSBB))

WAN3/WAN4 is dedicated to physical mode in USB.

1. Choose WAN3 as WAN Interface.

2. Then, click Next for getting the following page.


Item Description

Internet Access Choose one of the selections as the protocol of accessing the internet.

3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode)

SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet. The maximum length of the pin code you can set is 15 characters.

Modem Initial String – Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP. The maximum length of the string you can set is 47 characters.


APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.

3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode)

SIM Pin code –Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet.

Network Mode – Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically.

APN Name – APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs.

3. Then, click Next for viewing summary of such connection.




II--77 SSeerrvviiccee AAccttiivvaattiioonn WWiizzaarrdd

Service Activation Wizard can guide you to activate WCF service (Web Content Filter) with a quick and easy way. For the Service Activation Wizard is only available for admin operation, therefore, please type “admin/admin” on Username/Password while Logging into the web user interface.

Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com. For using Web Content Filter Profile, please refer to later section Web Content Filter Profile for detailed information.

Now, follow the steps listed below to activate WCF feature for your router.

Info

Such function is available only for Admin Mode.

1. Open Wizards>>Service Activation Wizard.

2. In the following page, you can activate the web content filter services, APP Enforcement service and Dynamic DNS Service at the same time or individually. When you finish the selection, check the box of “I have read…” and click Next.

http://myvigor.draytek.com/�


Info

BPjM is web content filter (WCF) for German Speaking users. It is ideal for your family to provide more Internet security for youngsters.

DT-APPE, developed by DrayTek, offers a mechanism to upgrade APPE signature automatically.

DT-DDNS, developed by DrayTek, offers one year free charge service of dynamic DNS service for internal use.

3. Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Activate.

Info

The service will be activated and applied as the default rule configured in Firewall>>General Setup.

4. Now, the web page will display the service that you have activated according to your selection(s). The valid time for the free trial of these services is one month.


II--88 RReeggiisstteerriinngg VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr

You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration.

1 Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as User Name / Password.

2 Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.

3 A Login page will be shown on the screen. Please type the account and password that you created previously. And click Login.


Info

If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account.

4 The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. Type a nickname for the router, then click Add.

5 When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the database.

6 After clicking OK, you will see the following page. Your router has been registered to myvigor website successfully.


PPaarrtt IIII CCoonnnneeccttiivviittyy

It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in WAN.

It means local area network. Private IP will be used in LAN.

Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.

When the data flow passing through, the Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local area network.

DNS, LAN DNS, UPnP, IGMP, WOL, RADIUS, …

Static Route, Route Policy


IIII--11 WWAANN

It allows users to access Internet.

BBaassiiccss ooff IInntteerrnneett PPrroottooccooll ((IIPP)) NNeettwwoorrkk

IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre (NIC). Having a unique IP address is mandatory for those devices participated in the public network but not in the private TCP/IP local area networks (LANs), such as host PCs under the management of a router since they do not need to be accessed by the public. Hence, the NIC has reserved certain addresses that will never be registered publicly. These are known as private IP addresses, and are listed in the following ranges:

From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255 From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255 From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

WWhhaatt aarree PPuubblliicc IIPP AAddddrreessss aanndd PPrriivvaattee IIPP AAddddrreessss

As the router plays a role to manage and further protect its LAN, it interconnects groups of host PCs. Each of them has a private IP address assigned by the built-in DHCP server of the Vigor router. The router itself will also use the default private IP address: 192.168.1.1 to communicate with the local hosts. Meanwhile, Vigor router will communicate with other network devices through a public IP address. When the data flow passing through, the Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local area network. Thus, all the host PCs can share a common Internet connection.

GGeett YYoouurr PPuubblliicc IIPP AAddddrreessss ffrroomm IISSPP

In ADSL deployment, the PPP (Point to Point)-style authentication and authorization is required for bridging customer premises equipment (CPE). Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) connects a network of hosts via an access device to a remote access concentrator or aggregation concentrator. This implementation provides users with significant ease of use. Meanwhile it provides access control, billing, and type of service according to user requirement.

When a router begins to connect to your ISP, a serial of discovery process will occur to ask for a connection. Then a session will be created. Your user ID and password is authenticated via PAP or CHAP with RADIUS authentication system. And your IP address, DNS server, and other related information will usually be assigned by your ISP.

NNeettwwoorrkk CCoonnnneeccttiioonn bbyy 33GG//44GG UUSSBB MMooddeemm

For 3G/4G mobile communication through Access Point is popular more and more, Vigor2765 adds the function of 3G/4G network connection for such purpose. By connecting 3G/4G USB Modem to the USB port of Vigor2765, it can support LTE/HSDPA/UMTS/EDGE/GPRS/GSM and the future 3G/4G standard (HSUPA, etc). Vigor2765n with 3G/4G USB Modem allows you to receive 3G/4G signals at any place such as your car or certain location holding outdoor activity and share the bandwidth for using by more people. Users can use LAN ports on the router to access Internet. Also, they can access Internet via 802.11(a/b/g/n/ac) wireless standard, and enjoy the powerful firewall, bandwidth management, and VPN features of Vigor2765ac series.


After connecting into the router, 3G/4G USB Modem will be regarded as the WAN3/WAN4 port. However, the original WAN1 and WAN2 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the router. Besides, 3G/4G USB Modem in WAN3/WAN4 also can be used as backup device. Therefore, when WAN1 and WAN2 are not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting automatically. The supported 3G/4G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please visit www.draytek.com for more detailed information.


WWeebb UUsseerr IInntteerrffaaccee

IIII--11--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection modes for WAN1, WAN2 and WAN3 in details.

This router supports multiple-WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine the bandwidth of the multiple WANs to speed up the transmission through the network. Each WAN port can connect to different ISPs, Even if the ISPs use different technology to provide telecommunication service (such as DSL, Cable modem, etc.). If any connection problem occurred on one of the ISP connections, all the traffic will be guided and switched to the normal communication port for proper operation. Please configure WAN1, WAN2, WAN3 and WAN4 settings.

This webpage allows you to set general setup for WAN1, WAN2, and WAN3 respectively. In default, WAN2 is disabled. If you want to enable it, simply click the WAN2 link and select Yes in the field of Enable.


Item Description

Index Click the WAN interface link under Index to access into the WAN configuration page.

Enable V means such WAN interface is enabled and ready to be used.

Physical Mode / Type Display the physical mode and physical type of such WAN interface.

Active Mode Display whether such WAN interface is Active device or backup device.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.


IIII--11--11--11 WWAANN11 ((AADDSSLL//VVDDSSLL)) Vigor router will detect the physical line is connected by ADSL automatically. Therefore, this page allows you to configure settings for ADSL at one time. That is, it is not necessary for you to configure different profile settings for ADSL respectively.


Item Description

Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.

Display Name Type the description for such interface.

Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such interface.

DSL Mode Specify the physical mode (VDSL2 or ADSL) for such router manually.

DSL Modem Code Choose the correct DSL modem code for ensuring the network connection.

If you have no idea about the selection, simply choose Default or contact the dealer for assistance.

VLAN Tag insertion

(ADSL/VDSL)

Such feature is offered to the user with the environment supporting IEEE_802.1ad. In which, service is used for outer tag; customer is used for inner tag.

Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.







IIII--11--11--22 WWAANN22 ((EEtthheerrnneett)) Ethernet is the Physical Mode for WAN2.


Item Description


Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface.

Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.

Physical Type You can change the physical type for WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 or choose Auto negotiation for determined by the system.

Active Mode Always On - Choose it to make the WAN connection being activated always.

Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection.

WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN will be activated as the main network connection.

VLAN Tag insertion Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.








IIII--11--11--33 WWAANN33 ((UUSSBB)) To use 3G/4G network connection through 3G/4G USB Modem, please configure WAN3 interface.


Item Description


Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface.

Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.

Active Mode Always On - Choose it to make the WAN connection being activated always.

Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a backup connection.

WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN will be activated as the main network connection.



IIII--11--22 IInntteerrnneett AAcccceessss

For the router supports multi-WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings (for WAN1/WAN2/WAN3) for Internet Access. Due to different Physical Mode for WAN interface, the Access Mode for these connections also varies. Refer to the following figures.

And,

And,


Item Description

Index Display the WAN interface.

Display Name It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 that entered in general setup.

Physical Mode It shows the physical connection for WAN1~2 (Ethernet) /WAN3 (3G/4G USB Modem) according to the real network connection.

Access Mode Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The details page of that mode will be popped up. If not, click Details Page for accessing the page to configure the settings.

Details Page This button will open different web page (based on IPv4) according to the access mode that you choose in WAN interface.


Note that Details Page will be changed slightly based on physical mode.

IPv6 This button will open different web page (based on Physical Mode) to setup IPv6 Internet Access Mode for WAN interface.

If IPv6 service is active on this WAN interface, the color of “IPv6” will become green.

DHCP Client Option This button allows you to configure DHCP client options.

DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and data information when such function is enabled and configured.

Enable – Check the box to enable the function of DHCP Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number with data. For example,

Option number:100

Data: abcd

When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.

Interface – Specify the WAN interface(s) that will be overwritten by such function. WAN5 ~ WAN7 can be located under WAN>>Multi-PVC/VLAN.

Option Number – Type a number for such function.

DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex) for the data to be stored.

Data – Type the content of the data to be processed by the function of DHCP option.

Info

If you choose to configure option 61 here, the detailed settings in WAN>>Internet Access will be overwritten.


IIII--11--22--11 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr PPPPPPooEE//PPPPPPooAA iinn WWAANN11 ((PPhhyyssiiccaall MMooddee:: AADDSSLL))


Item Description

Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

ADSL Modem Settings Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These settings configured here are specified for ADSL only.

Multi-PVC channel - The selections displayed here are determined by the page of WAN >> Multi-PVC/VLAN. Select M-PVCs Channel means no selection will be chosen.

VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

Encapsulating Type - Drop down the list to choose the type provided by ISP.

Protocol - Drop down the list to choose the one (PPPoE or PPPoA) provided by ISP.

If you have already used Quick Start Wizard to set the protocol, then it is not necessary for you to change any settings in this group.

Modulation –Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one that fits the requirement of your router.


ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.

More Options - It shows optional settings for configuration.

Service Name - Enter the description of the specific network service.

Separate Account for ADSL – In default, WAN1 supports VDSL2/ADSL and uses the same PPPoE account and password for connection. If required, you can configure another account and password for ADSL connection by checking this box. If it is checked, the system will ask you to type another group of account and password additionally.

WAN Connection Detection

Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as

detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP address in this field for pinging.

Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN gateway IP address for pinging. With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if the WAN connection is on or off.

TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation. Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to

execute the PING operation.

Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN disconnection is judged.

MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.

Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit path.

Click Detect to open the following dialog.

Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific

transmit path.

MTU size start from – Determine the starting point


value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.

MTU reduce size by – It determines the decreasing size of MTU value. For example, the number specified in this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”. After clicking the “detect” button, the system will calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500, 1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.

Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value

Accept – After clicking it, the detected value will be displayed in the field of MTU.

PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

IP Assignment (IPCP)- Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function.

Fixed IP – Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using.

Dial-Out Schedule Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

PPPoE Pass-through The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local clients to your ISP via the Vigor router. When PPPoA protocol is selected, the PPPoE package transmitted by PC will be transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server. Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction.

For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access into Internet.

For Wireless LAN – It is available for n model. If you check


this box, PCs on the same wireless network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access into Internet.

To have PPPoA Pass-through, please choose PPPoA protocol and check the box(es) here. The router will behave like a modem which only serves the PPPoE client on the LAN. That’s, the router will offer PPPoA dial-up connection.

MAC Address Default MAC Address – Type in MAC address for the router. You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address for your necessity.

Use the following MAC Address – Type in the MAC address for the router manually.

IIII--11--22--22 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr MMPPooAA//SSttaattiicc oorr DDyynnaammiicc IIPP iinn WWAANN11 ((PPhhyyssiiccaall MMooddee::

AADDSSLL)) MPoA is a specification that enables ATM services to be integrated with existing LANs, which use either Ethernet, token-ring or TCP/IP protocols. The goal of MPoA is to allow different LANs to send packets to each other via an ATM backbone.

To use MPoA / Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select MPoA / Static or Dynamic IP from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will appear.



Item Description


ADSL Modem Settings Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These settings configured here are specified for ADSL only.

Multi-PVC channel – The selections displayed here are determined by the page of Internet Access >>Multi PVCs. Select M-PVCs Channel means no selection will be chosen.

Encapsulation – Drop down the list to choose the type provided by ISP.

VPI – Type in the value provided by ISP.

VCI – Type in the value provided by ISP.

Modulation –Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one that fits the requirement of your router.

IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually.

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.


Router Name – Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Domain Name – Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

DHCP Client Identifier for some ISP - Check the box to specify username and password as the DHCP client identifier for some ISP.

Username: Type a name as username. The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password: Type a password. The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data.

IP Address – Type in the private IP address.

Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.

Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.


DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.



Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect or Always On for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as











transmit path.

MTU size start from – Determine the starting point value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.




RIP Routing Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP（RFC1058）specifying how routers exchange routing tables information. Click Enable RIP for activating this function.

Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem.

Enable Full Bridge Mode – If the function is enabled, the router will work as a bridge modem which is able to forward incoming packets with VLAN tags.

Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN subnet and such WAN interface.

MAC Address Default MAC Address – Type in MAC address for the router. You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address for your necessity.

Use the following MAC Address – Type in the MAC address for the router manually.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.


IIII--11--22--33 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr PPPPPPooEE iinn EEtthheerreenneett WWAANN To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will be shown.


Item Description


ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.



Service Name (Optional) - Enter the description of the specific network service.



Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the


following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as










transmit path.





PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action.

IP Assignment (IPCP) - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function.

Fixed IP – Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP


address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

Dial-Out Schedule Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

TTL Change the TTL value – Enable or disable the TTL (Time to Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.

Enable - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it passess through Vigor router. It will cause the client, accessing Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by certain ISP when TTL value becomes “0”.

Disable – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when a packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet will not be blocked by ISP.

Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC Address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address – Type the MAC address for the router manually.



IIII--11--22--44 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr SSttaattiicc oorr DDyynnaammiicc IIPP iinn EEtthheerreenneett WWAANN For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address to the WAN interface.

To use Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the Static or Dynamic IP tab. The following web page will be shown.


Item Description

Enable / Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually.

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use Dynamic IP mode.


Router Name: Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Domain Name: Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

DHCP Client Identifier for some ISP

Enable: Check the box to specify username and


password as the DHCP client identifier for some ISP.

Username: Type a name as username. The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password: Type a password. The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data if you want to use Static IP mode.

IP Address: Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask.

Gateway IP Address: Type the gateway IP address.


DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.



Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect or Always On for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as



TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.


Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to execute the PING operation.






transmit path.





Keep WAN Connection Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP environments because some ISPs will drop connections if there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.

PING to the IP - If you enable the PING function, please specify the IP address for the system to PING it for keeping alive.

PING Interval - Enter the interval for the system to execute the PING operation.

TTL Change the TTL value – Enable or disable the TTL (Time to Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.

Enable - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it passess through Vigor router. It will cause the client, accessing Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by certain ISP when TTL value becomes “0”.

Disable – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when a packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet will not be blocked by ISP.

RIP Routing Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP（RFC1058）


specifying how routers exchange routing tables information. Click Enable RIP for activating this function.

MAC Address: Default MAC Address: Click this radio button to use default MAC address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field.


IIII--11--22--55 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr PPPPTTPP//LL22TTPP iinn EEtthheerreenneett WWAANN To use PPTP/L2TP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the PPTP/L2TP tab. The following web page will be shown.


Item Description

PPTP/L2TP Enable PPTP- Click this radio button to enable a PPTP client to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.

Enable L2TP - Click this radio button to enable a L2TP client to establish a tunnel to a DSL modem on the WAN interface.

Disable – Click this radio button to close the connection through PPTP or L2TP.

Server Address - Specify the IP address of the PPTP/L2TP server if you enable PPTP/L2TP client mode.

Specify Gateway IP Address – Specify the gateway IP address for DHCP server.

ISP Access Setup Username -Type in the username provided by ISP in this field. The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.

Password -Type in the password provided by ISP in this field. The maximum length of the password you can set is 62


characters.

Schedule Profile- You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.





transmit path.





PPP Setup PPP Authentication - Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

Idle Timeout - Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action.

IP Address Assignment Method(IPCP)


Fixed IP - Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function. Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box.

Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.

WAN IP Network Settings Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data.


IP Address – Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask – Type the subnet mask.


IIII--11--22--66 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr 33GG//44GG UUSSBB MMooddeemm ((PPPPPP mmooddee)) iinn UUSSBB WWAANN To use 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) for WAN5. The following web page will be shown.


Item Description

Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router.

3G /4G USB Modem (PPP mode)

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.


SIM PIN code Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet.

The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 15 characters.

Modem Initial String Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.

The maximum length of the string you can set is 47 characters.

APN Name APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.

The maximum length of the name you can set is 43 characters.

Modem Initial String2 The initial string 1 is shared with APN.

In some cases, user may need another initial AT command to restrict 3G band or do any special settings.


Modem Dial String Such value is used to dial through USB mode. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.


Service Name Enter the description of the specific network service.

PPP Username Type the PPP username (optional). The maximum length of the name you can set is 63 characters.

PPP Password Type the PPP password (optional). The maximum length of the password you can set is 62 characters.

PPP Authentication Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

Schedule Profile You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page



Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to type required settings for the following items. Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as







IIII--11--22--77 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr 33GG//44GG UUSSBB MMooddeemm ((DDHHCCPP mmooddee)) iinn UUSSBB WWAANN To use 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) as the accessing protocol of the internet, please choose Internet Access from WAN menu. Then, select 3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode) for WAN3. The following web page will be shown.


Item Description

Modem Support List It lists all of the modems supported by such router.

3G/4G USB Modem (DHCP mode)

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

SIM PIN code Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access


Internet.

The maximum length of the PIN code you can set is 19 characters.

Network Mode Force Vigor router to connect Internet with the mode specified here. If you choose 4G/3G/2G as network mode, the router will choose a suitable one according to the actual wireless signal automatically.

APN Name APN means Access Point Name which is provided and required by some ISPs. Type the name and click Apply.










Schedule Profile You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page





transmit path.

MTU size start from – Determine the starting point


value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.




Authentication Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP authentication.

Username – Type the username for authentication (optional).

Password – Type the password for authentication (optional).


IIII--11--22--88 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– OOfffflliinnee iinn WWAANN11//WWAANN22//WWAANN33 When Offline is selected, the IPv6 connection will be disabled.


IIII--11--22--99 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– PPPPPP iinn WWAANN11//WWAANN22 During the procedure of IPv4 PPPoE connection, we can get the IPv6 Link Local Address between the gateway and Vigor router through IPv6CP. Later, use DHCPv6 or accept RA to acquire the IPv6 prefix address (such as: 2001:B010:7300:200::/64) offered by the ISP. In addition, PCs under LAN also can have the public IPv6 address for Internet access by means of the generated prefix.

No need to type any other information for PPP mode.


Item Description


Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.

Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type TTL value.

RIPng Protocol RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.

Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on PPP mode.


Info

At present, the IPv6 prefix can be acquired via the PPPoE mode connection which is available for the areas such as Taiwan (hinet), the Netherlands, Australia and UK.


IIII--11--22--1100 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– TTSSPPCC iinn WWAANN11//WWAANN22//WWAANN33 Tunnel setup protocol client (TSPC) is an application which could help you to connect to IPv6 network easily.

Please make sure your IPv4 WAN connection is OK and apply one free account from hexago (http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account ) before you try to use TSPC for network connection. TSPC would connect to tunnel broker and requests a tunnel according to the specifications inside the configuration file. It gets a public IPv6 IP address and an IPv6 prefix from the tunnel broker and then monitors the state of the tunnel in background.

After getting the IPv6 prefix and starting router advertisement daemon (RADVD), the PC behind this router can directly connect to IPv6 the Internet.


Item Description

Username Type the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password for http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account.


Password Type the password assigned with the user name.


Tunnel Broker Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an optional port number.





TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as

http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account�

http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account�


detection mode, you have to type TTL value.


IIII--11--22--1111 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– AAIICCCCUU iinn WWAANN11//WWAANN22//WWAANN33


Item Description

Always On Check this box to keep the network connection always.

Username Type the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to apply another username and password.


Password Type the password assigned with the user name.


Tunnel Broker It means a server of AICCU. The server can provide IPv6 tunnels to sites or end users over IPv4.

Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an optional port number.

Tunnel ID One user account may have several tunnels. And, each tunnel shall have one specified tunnel ID (e.g., T115394). Type the ID offered by Tunnel Broker.

Subnet Prefix Type the subnet prefix address obtained from service provider.

The maximum length of the prefix you can set is 128 characters.

http://www.sixxs.net/�




Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.





IIII--11--22--1122 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– DDHHCCPPvv66 CClliieenntt iinn WWAANN11//WWAANN22 DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.


Item Description

IAID Type a number as IAID.


Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. With NS Detect mode, the system will check if network connection is established or not, like IPv4 ARP Detect. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.





Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.

Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN


subnet and such WAN interface.


IIII--11--22--1133 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– SSttaattiicc IIPPvv66 iinn iinn WWAANN11//WWAANN22 This type allows you to setup static IPv6 address for WAN interface.


Item Description

Static IPv6 Address Configuration

IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 Static IP Address.

Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.

Add – Click it to add a new entry.

Update – Click it to modify an existed entry.

Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.

Current IPv6 Address Table

Display current interface IPv6 address.

Static IPv6 Gateway Configuration

IPv6 Gateway Address - Type your IPv6 gateway address here.




Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect or NS Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection will be executed. The network connection will be on always.





Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.

Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN subnet and such WAN interface.



IIII--11--22--1144 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– 66iinn44 SSttaattiicc TTuunnnneell iinn WWAANN11 // WWAANN22 This type allows you to setup 6in4 Static Tunnel for WAN interface.

Such mode allows the router to access IPv6 network through IPv4 network.

However, 6in4 offers a prefix outside of 2002::0/16. So, you can use a fixed endpoint rather than anycast endpoint. The mode has more reliability.


Item Description

Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address

Type the static IPv4 address for the remote server.

6in4 IPv6 Address Type the static IPv6 address for IPv4 tunnel with the value for prefix length.

LAN Routed Prefix Type the static IPv6 address for LAN routing with the value for prefix length.

Tunnel TTL Type the number for the data lifetime in tunnel.







Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6in4 Static Tunnel mode.


IIII--11--22--1155 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPPvv66 –– 66rrdd iinn WWAANN11 // WWAANN22 This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface.


Item Description

6rd Mode Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd service provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP".

Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually.

IPv4 Border Relay Type the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given 6rd domain.

IPv4 Mask Length Type a number of high-order bits that are identical across all CE IPv4 addresses within a given 6rd domain.

It may be any value between 0 and 32.

6rd Prefix Type the 6rd IPv6 address.

6rd Prefix Length Type the IPv6 prefix length for the 6rd IPv6 prefix in number of bits.







Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6rd mode.


IIII--11--33 MMuullttii--PPVVCC//VVLLAANN

Multi-PVC/VLAN lets you configure multiple permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and ATM QoS for channels using ADSL.

Channel 1 to 4 have the following fixed assignments and cannot be altered.

Channel 1: ADSL on WAN1.

Channel 2: Ethernet on WAN2.

Channel 3: USB1 (WAN3).

Channels 4 through 10 can be bridged to one or more of the 3 LAN ports P2 through P4. In addition, Channels 4 through 6 can be configured as virtual WANs (WAN4 through WAN6).

GGeenneerraall


Item Description

Channel Display the number of each channel.

Channels 4 ~ 10 are configurable.

Enable Display whether the settings in this channel are enabled (Yes) or not (No).


To configure a PVC channel, click its channel number.

WAN links for Channel 4, 5 and 6 are provided for router-borne application such as TR-069. The settings must be applied and obtained from your ISP. For your special request, please contact with your ISP and then click WAN link of Channel 5, 6 or 7 to configure your router.


Item Description

Multi-VLAN Channel 4/5/6 Enable – Click it to enable the configuration of this channel.

Disable –Click it to disable the configuration of this channel.

WAN Type The connections and interfaces created in every channel may select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the Multi-PVC application, only the Ethernet WAN type is available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN interface the channel shall use here.

General Settings VPI - Type in the value provided by your ISP.

VCI - Type in the value provided by your ISP.

Protocol - Select a proper protocol for this channel.

Encapsulation - Choose a proper type for this channel. The types will be different according to the protocol setting that


you choose.

Add VLAN Header – Check the box to enable the following two options.

VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag value.

Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.

ATM OoS Such function is available only when ADSL is selected as WAN Type.

QoS Type - Select a proper QoS type for the channel.

Type the values for PCR, SCR and MBS respectively.

Open Port-based Bridge Connection for this Channel

The settings here will create a bridge between the LAN ports selected and the WAN. The WAN interface of the bridge connection will be built upon the WAN type selected using the VLAN tag configured.

Physical Members – Group the physical ports by checking the corresponding check box(es) for applying the port-based bridge connection.

Open WAN Interface for this Channel

Check the box to enable relating function.

WAN Application –

Management – It can be specified for general management (Web configuration/telnet/TR069). If you choose Management, the configuration for this VLAN will be effective for Web configuration/telnet/TR069.

IPTV - The IPTV configuration will allow the WAN interface to send IGMP packets to IPTV servers.

VoIP- The VoIP configuration will allow the WAN interface created here to send SIP registration packets and other VoIP management packets.


Such function is available only when ADSL is selected as WAN Type.

It allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.








PPPoE/PPPoA Client ISP Access Setup

Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP.

ISP Name – PPP Service Name. Enter if your ISP requires this setting; otherwise leave blank.

Username – Name provided by the ISP for PPPoE/PPPoA authentication. Maximum length is 62 characters.

Password – Password provided by the ISP for PPPoE/PPPoA authentication. Maximum length is 62 characters.

PPP Authentication –The protocol used for PPP authentication.

PAP only- Only PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) is used.

PAP or CHAP- Both PAP and CHAP (Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) can be used for PPP authentication. Router negotiates with the PPTP or L2TP server to determine which protocol to use.

Always On – If selected, the router will maintain the PPPoE/PPPoA connection.

Idle Timeout – Maximum length of time, in seconds, of idling allowed (no traffic) before the connection is dropped.

ISP Address from ISP - Specifies how the WAN IP address of the channel configured.

Fixed IP

Yes - IP address entered in the Fixed IP Address field will be used as the IP address of the virtual WAN.

No - Virtual WAN IP address will be assigned by the ISP’s PPPoE/PPPoA server.

MPoA Obtain an IP address automatically – Select this option if the router is to receive IP configuration information from a DHCP server.

Router Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 12, which is used by some ISPs.

Domain Name – Sets the value of DHCP Option 15, which is used by some ISPs.

Specify an IP address – Select this option to manually enter the IP address.

IP Address – Type in the IP address.

Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.

Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.

DNS Server IP Address - Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings and return to previous page.


Click any index (7~10) to get the following web page:


Item Description

Enable Channel 7~10 Enable – Click it to enable the configuration of this channel.

Disable –Click it to disable the configuration of this channel.

WAN Type The connections and interfaces created in every channel may select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the Multi-VLAN application, only the Ethernet WAN type is available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN interface the channel shall use here.

General Settings VPI - Type in the value provided by your ISP.

VCI - Type in the value provided by your ISP.

Protocol - Select a proper protocol for this channel.

Encapsulation - Choose a proper type for this channel. The types will be different according to the protocol setting that you choose.

Add VLAN Header – Check the box to enable the following two options.

VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not configure the same VLAN tag value.

Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.

Bridge mode Enable – Click it to enable Bridge mode for such channel.

Physical Members – Group the physical ports by checking the corresponding check box(es) for applying the bridge connection.


AAddvvaanncceedd

Such configuration is applied to upstream packets. Such information will be provided by ISP. Please contact with your ISP for detailed information.


Item Description

QoS Type Select a proper QoS type for the channel according to the information that your ISP provides.

PCR It represents Peak Cell Rate. The default setting is “0”.

SCR It represents Sustainable Cell Rate. The value of SCR must be smaller than PCR.

MBS It represents Maximum Burst Size. The range of the value is 10 to 50.

PVC to PVC Binding It allows the enabled PVC channel to use the same ADSL connection settings of another PVC channel. Please choose the PVC channel via the drop down list.



IIII--11--44 WWAANN BBuuddggeett

This function is used to determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP. Please note that the Quota Limit and Billing cycle day of month settings will need to be configured correctly first in order for some period calculations to be performed correctly.

IIII--11--44--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

Click WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 link to open the following web page.


Item Description

Enable Check the box to enable such function.

Quota Limit Type the data traffic quota allowed for such WAN interface. There are two unit (MB and GB) offered for you to specify.

When quota exceeded Check the box(es) as the condition(s) for the system to perform when the traffic has exceeded the budget limit.

Shutdown WAN interface – All the outgoing traffic through


such WAN interface will be terminated.

Using Notification Object – The system will send out a notification based on the content of the notification object.

Set Mail Alert – The system will send out a warning message to the administrator when the quota is running out. However, the connection charges will be calculated continuously.

Set SMS message - The system will send out SMS message to the administrator when the quota is running out.

Monthly Some ISP might apply for the network limitation based on the traffic limit per month. This setting is to offer a mechanism of resetting the traffic record every month.

Data quota resets on day … – You can determine the starting day in one month.

Custom This setting allows the user to define the billing cycle according to his request. The WAN budget will be reset with an interval of billing cycle.

Monthly is default setting. If long period or a short period is required, use Custom. The period of cycle duration is between 1 day and 60 days. You can determine the cycle duration by specifying the days and the hours. In addition, you can specify which day of today is in a cycle.

Use Cycle in hours –

Cycle duration: Specify the days and hours to reset the

traffic record. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7 days; 20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time is up, the router will reset the traffic record automatically.

Today is day – Specify the day in the cycle as the starting point which Vigor router will reset the traffic record. For example, “3” means the third day of the cycle duration.

Use Cycle in days -

Cycle duration: Specify the days to reset the traffic

record. For example, 7 means the whole cycle is 7 days;


20 means the whole cycle is 20 days. When the time is up, the router will reset the traffic record automatically.

Today is day – Specify the day and time for data quota rest in the cycle as the starting point which Vigor router will reset the traffic record. For example, “3” means the third day of the cycle duration.



IIII--11--44--22 SSttaattuuss The status page displays the status WAN budget, including the duration and the usage.

If the WAN budget is exhausted, a lock will be displayed on the page if Shutdown WAN interface is selected. Which means no data transmission will be carried out. Moreover, the system will send out a warning message to the administrator if Send Mail Alert to Administrator is selected. Or, the system will send out SMS message to the administrator if Send SMS messages to Administrator is selected.


AApppplliiccaattiioonn NNootteess

AA--11 HHooww ttoo aassssiiggnn aann IIPPvv66 aaddddrreessss ttoo LLAANN cclliieennttss?? This document introduces how to set up Vigor Router for the LAN clients to obtain an IPv6 address from it.

1. Make sure there is a WAN interface that has IPv6 access available. (See How to configure IPv6 on WAN interface?)

2. Go to LAN >> General Setup, and click on "IPv6" for the LAN subnet to enter IPv6 setting page.


3. In IPv6 Setup page, set WAN Primary Interface to the WAN interface that has IPv6 service available, enable DHCPv6 Server, and click OK to apply.

4. With the above configuration, LAN clients will be able to obtain an IPv6 address and an IPv6 Gateway from Vigor Router. For Windows PC, we may check this by command "ipconfig".

PC will be able to ping and get response from an IPv6 host, e.g. "ipv6.google.com".


AA--22 HHooww ttoo ccoonnffiigguurree IIPPvv66 oonn WWAANN iinntteerrffaaccee?? This document is going to demonstrate how to implement an IPv6 address on Vigor Router's WAN.

1. Before configuring IPv6 on WAN, please make sure the router is connected to the IPv4 Internet.

2. Go to WAN >> Internet Access, click on IPv6 of the WAN interface that you would like to configure an IPv6 address.

3. Select a Connection Type from the drop-down list, enter the required parameters. Then click OK and reboot the router to apply the settings.


4. After accomplishing the configurations, Network Administrator may check the status from the IPv6 tab on Online Status >> Physical Connection page.

5. Furthermore, Network Administrator may test the connectivity of IPv6 from the router by going to Diagnostics >> Ping Diagnosis and selecting "IPv6".

Below we will provide some examples of configuring IPv6 with different connection types.


PPPPPP ((PPooiinntt--ttoo--PPooiinntt PPrroottooccooll))

This applies if the IPv4 access mode is PPPoE, and the IPv4 ISP also provides an IPv6 address. To use IPv6 PPP, you just need to choose the Connection Type to "PPP", no other setting is required.

TTSSPPCC ((TTuunnnneell SSeettuupp PPrroottooccooll CClliieenntt))

In this mode, the IPv6 connectivity is provided by a tunnel broker on the IPv4 Internet through a tunnel set up by Tunnel Setup Protocol (TSP). To use TSPC, you'll need to sign up for a tunnel broker service and get a username and password first, then, configure the router as follows:

1. Set Connection Type to TSPC.

2. Enter the Username and Password registered at the TSP server.

3. Enter the IP or Domain Name of the TSPC server for Tunnel Broker.


SSttaattiicc IIPPvv66

If your ISP provides a static IPv6 address for you, you may configure that IPv6 address for WAN by doing the following steps:

1. Set Connection Type to Static IPv6.

2. Enter the IPv6 address and Prefix Length which provided by the ISP, and click Add.

3. You should see the IPv6 address in Current IPv6 Address Table. Then, specify the IP address of IPv6 Gateway.


66iinn44 SSttaattiicc TTuunnnneell

In this mode, the IPv6 connectivity is provided by a tunnel broker on the IPv4 Internet through a tunnel configured manually. To use 6in4 Static Tunnel, you need sign up for a tunnel broker service and get an IPv6 address and routed IPv6 prefixes first. Then, configure the router as follows:

1. Set Connection Type to 6in4 Static Tunnel.

2. Enter the tunnel server's IPv4 address in Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address.

3. Enter the router's IPv6 address in 6in4 IPv6 Address.

4. Enter the routed IPv6 prefix in LAN Routed Prefix.


IIII--22 LLAANN

Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.

The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address. What NAT does is to translate the packets from public IP address to private IP address to forward the right packets to the right host and vice versa. Besides, Vigor router has a built-in DHCP server that assigns private IP address to each local host. See the following diagram for a briefly understanding.

In some special case, you may have a public IP subnet from your ISP such as 220.135.240.0/24. This means that you can set up a public subnet or call second subnet that each host is equipped with a public IP address. As a part of the public subnet, the Vigor router will serve for IP routing to help hosts in the public subnet to communicate with other public hosts or servers outside. Therefore, the router should be set as the gateway for public hosts.


WWhhaatt iiss RRoouuttiinngg IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn PPrroottooccooll ((RRIIPP))

Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP address and the routers will automatically inform for each other.

WWhhaatt iiss SSttaattiicc RRoouuttee

When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for connection is the Static routes function rather than other method. You may simply set rules to forward data from one specified subnet to another specified subnet without the presence of RIP.

WWhhaatt aarree VViirrttuuaall LLAANNss aanndd RRaattee CCoonnttrrooll

You can group local hosts by physical ports and create up to 8 virtual LANs. To manage the communication between different groups, please set up rules in Virtual LAN (VLAN) function and the rate of each.



IIII--22--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

This page provides you the general settings for LAN. Click LAN to open the LAN settings page and choose General Setup.

There are several subnets provided by the router which allow users to divide groups into different subnets (LAN1 – LAN2). In addition, different subnets can link for each other by configuring Inter-LAN Routing. At present, LAN1 setting is fixed with NAT mode only. LAN2 can be operated under NAT or Route mode. IP Routed Subnet can be operated under Route mode.


Item Description

General Setup Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively.

Index - Display all of the LAN items.

Enable- Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default. LAN2 and IP Routed Subnet can be observed by checking the box of Status.

DHCP- LAN1 is configured with DHCP in default. If required, please check the DHCP box for each LAN.

IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item. Such information is set in default and you can not modify it.


Details Page - Click it to access into the setting page. Each LAN will have different LAN configuration page. Each LAN must be configured in different subnet.

IPv6 – Click it to access into the settings page of IPv6.

DHCP Server Option DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and data information when such function is enabled.

Enable/Disable – Enable/Disable the function of DHCP Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number with data. For example,

Option number:100

Data: abcd

When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.

Interface – Choose the interface for such option.

Next Server IP Address/SIAddr – Type the IP address for the next server. Vigor router’s DHCP server can redirect clients to a secondary server specified in such field.

Option Number – Type a number for such function.

DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex or address list) for the data to be stored.

Data – Type the content of the data to be processed by the function of DHCP option.

Force router to use DNS server IP address …..

Force Vigor router to use DNS servers configured in LAN1/LAN2 instead of DNS servers given by the Internet Access server (PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP or DHCP server).

Inter-LAN Routing Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and LAN).

When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.


IIII--22--11--11 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr LLAANN11 –– EEtthheerrnneett TTCCPP//IIPP aanndd DDHHCCPP SSeettuupp There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4) and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for detailed information.


Item Description

Network Configuration For NAT Usage,

IP Address - Type in private IP address for connecting to a local private network (Default: 192.168.1.1).

Subnet Mask - Type in an address code that determines the size of the network. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24)

RIP Protocol Control,

Disable - deactivate the RIP protocol. It will lead to a stoppage of the exchange of routing information between routers. (Default)

Enable – activate the RIP protocol.

DHCP Server Configuration

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatches related IP settings to any local user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.

Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Enable Relay Agent –Specify which subnet that DHCP server is located the relay agent should redirect the DHCP request to.

DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.


Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Start IP Address - Enter a value of the IP address pool for the DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. If the 1st IP address of your router is 192.168.1.1, the starting IP address must be 192.168.1.2 or greater, but smaller than 192.168.1.254.

IP Pool Counts - Enter the maximum number of PCs that you want the DHCP server to assign IP addresses to. The default is 50 and the maximum is 253.

Gateway IP Address - Enter a value of the gateway IP address for the DHCP server. The value is usually as same as the 1st IP address of the router, which means the router is the default gateway.

Lease Time - Enter the time to determine how long the IP address assigned by DHCP server can be used.

Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - Whenever a DHCP client requests an IP address from the LAN DHCP server, the server will give out an IP to this client for a certain amount of time (e.g., 1 day). However, even if this client only uses the IP for say 5 minutes, the server still "reserves" 1 day for that client. Because a DHCP server only has a limited number of IPs to lease to its DHCP clients, soon enough all the IPs will be used out and then no one will be able to get any IPs from this server anymore. Therefore, this feature is used to get the IP back from inactive clients (i.e. doesn't use the IP but the server still reserves the IP for him).

DNS Server IP Address DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host must have a unique IP address, also they may have a human-friendly, easy to remember name such as www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly name into its equivalent IP address.

Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address here because your ISP should provide you with usually more than one DNS Server. If your ISP does not provide it, the router will automatically apply default DNS Server IP address: 194.109.6.66 to this field.

Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server IP address here because your ISP often provides you more than one DNS Server. If your ISP does not provide it, the router will automatically apply default secondary DNS Server IP address: 194.98.0.1 to this field.

The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online Status:

If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.

If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.


Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable) connection.


IIII--22--11--22 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr LLAANN22


Item Description

Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration.

For NAT Usage - Click this radio button to invoke NAT function.

For Routing Usage - Click this radio button to invoke this function.




DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Enable Relay Agent - If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.

DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable Relay


Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.



Gateway IP Address - Enter a value of the gateway IP address for the DHCP server. The value is usually as same as the 1st IP address of the router, which means the router is the default gateway.


Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - Whenever a DHCP client requests an IP address from the LAN DHCP server, the server will give out an IP to this client for a certain amount of time (e.g., 1 day). However, even if this client only uses the IP for say 5 minutes, the server still "reserves" 1 day for that client. Because a DHCP server only has a limited number of IPs to lease to its DHCP clients, soon enough all the IPs will be used out and then no one will be able to get any IPs from this server anymore. Therefore, this feature is used to get the IP back from inactive clients (i.e. doesn't use the IP but the server still reserves the IP for him.


IIII--22--11--33 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr IIPP RRoouutteedd SSuubbnneett



Item Description

Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration; click Disable to disable such configuration.

For Routing Usage,



RIP Protocol Control,

Disable - deactivate the RIP protocol. It will lead to a stoppage of the exchange of routing information between routers. (Default)

Enable – activate the RIP protocol.


DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.




Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for the clients coming from P1. Please check the box of P1.

Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address.

MAC Address - Enter the MAC Address of the host one by one and click Add to create a list of hosts which can be assigned, deleted or edited from above pool. Set a list of MAC Address for 2nd DHCP server will help router to assign the correct IP address of the correct subnet to the correct host. So those hosts in 2nd subnet won’t get an IP address belonging to 1st subnet.

Add – Type the MAC address in the boxes and click this button to add.

Delete – Click it to delete the selected MAC address.

Edit – Click it to edit the selected MAC address.

Cancel – Click it to cancel the job of adding, deleting and editing.



IIII--22--11--44 DDeettaaiillss PPaaggee ffoorr LLAANN11~~ LLAANN22 –– IIPPvv66 SSeettuupp There are two configuration pages for each LAN port, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4) and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for detailed information. Below shows the settings page for IPv6.

It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and the other is DHCPv6 Server (Stateful).


Item Description

Enable IPv6 Check the box to enable the configuration of LAN 1 IPv6 Setup.

WAN Primary Interface Use the drop down list to specify a WAN interface for IPv6.


Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address –Type static IPv6 address for LAN.

Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.

Add – Click it to add a new entry.

Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.

Unique Local Address (ULA) configuration

Unique Local Addresses (ULAs) are private IPv6 addresses assigned to LAN clients.

Off - ULA is disabled.

Manually ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs generated based on the prefix manually entered.

Auto ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs using an automatically-determined prefix.

Current IPv6 Address Table

Display current used IPv6 addresses.

DNS Server IPv6 Address Deploy when WAN is up – The RA (router advertisement) packets will be sent to LAN PC with DNS server information only when network connection by any one of WAN interfaces is up.

Enable – The RA (router advertisement) packets will be sent to LAN PC with DNS server information no matter WAN connection is up or not.

Primary DNS Sever – Type the IPv6 address for Primary DNS server.

Secondary DNS Server –Type another IPv6 address for DNS server if required.

Disable – DNS server will not be used.

Management Host under LAN can be assigned IP address from Vigor router via the following method.

Off – No IP address is assigned.

SLAAC(stateless) – The IP address (with Prefix) of the host shall be formed according to RA transmitted by Vigor router.

DHCPv6(stateful) - The IP address of the host shall be assigned after communicating with DHCPv6 server for answering the request of client.

Other Option (O-bit) – Check this box to enable the O-bit for obtaining additional information (e.g., DNS) from DHCPv6.

DHCPv6 Server Configuration

Disable Server – Click it to disable DHCPv6 server.

Enable Server –Click it to enable DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6 Server could assign IPv6 address to PC according to the Start/End IPv6 address configuration.

IPv6 Address Random Allocation - Check it to assign the DHCPv6 IP address randomly to prevent the attacks from the IPv6 reconnaissance techniques.

Auto IPv6 range – IPv6 address(es) will be assigned by DHCPv6 server automatically.

Start IPv6 Address / End IPv6 Address –Type the start and end address for IPv6 server.


Advance setting More options are offered under the Advance setting. Click Edit to open the pop-up window.

Router Advertisement Configuration – Click Enable to enable router advertisement server. The router advertisement daemon sends Router Advertisement messages, specified by RFC 2461, to a local Ethernet LAN periodically and when requested by a node sending a Router Solicitation message. These messages are required for IPv6 stateless auto-configuration.

Disable – Click it to disable router advertisement server.

Hop Limt – The value is required for the device behind the router when IPv6 is in use.

Min/Max Interval Time (sec) – It defines the interval (between minimum time and maximum time) for sending RA (Router Advertisement) packets.

Default Lifetime (sec) –Within such period of time, Vigor2765 can be treated as the default gateway.

Default Preference – It determines the priority of the host behind the router when RA (Router Advertisement) packets are transmitted.

MTU – It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. If Auto is selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN.


RIPng Protocol –RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.

Extension WAN – In addition to the default WAN used for IPv6 traffic specified in the WAN Primary Interface in the LAN IPv6 Setup page, additional WANs can be selected to carry IPv6 traffic by enabling them in the Extension WAN section.

Available WAN – Additional WANs available but not currently selected to carry IPv6 traffic.

Selected WAN – Additional WANs selected to carry IPv6 traffic.

After making changes on the Advance setting page, click the OK button to retain the changes and return to the LAN IPv6 Setup page. Be sure to click OK on the LAN IPv6 Setup page or else changes made on the Advance setting page will not be saved.

IIII--22--11--55 DDHHCCPP SSeerrvveerr OOppttiioonn DHCP Server Option can be configured by clicking the DHCP Server Option button on the LAN >>General Setup screen.


Item Description

Customized List Shows all the DHCP options that have been configured in the system.

Enable If selected, DHCP option entry is enabled.

If unselected, DHCP option entry is disabled.

Interface LAN interface(s) to which this entry is applicable.


Next Server IP Address/SIAddr

Overrides the DHCP Next Server IP address (DHCP Option 66) supplied by the DHCP server.

Option Number DHCP option number (e.g., 100).

DataType Type of data in the Data field:

ASCII Character - A text string. Example: /path.

Hexadecimal Digit - A hexadecimal string. Valid characters are from 0 to 9 and from a to f. Example: 2f70617468.

Address List - One or more IPv4 addresses, delimited by commas.

Data Data of this DHCP option.

To add a DHCP option entry from scratch, clear the data entry fields (Enable, Interface, Option Number, DataType and Data) by clicking Reset. After filling in the values, click Add to create the new entry.

To add a DHCP option entry modeled after an existing entry, click the model entry in Customized List. The data entry fields will be populated with values from the model entry. After making all necessary changes for the new entry, click Add to create it.

To modify an existing DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized List. The data entry fields will be populated with the current values from the entry. After making all necessary changes, click Update to save the changes.

To delete a DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized List, and then click Delete.


IIII--22--22 VVLLAANN

Vigor router provides extremely high speed connectivity for the highest speed local data transfer of any server or local PCs. On the Wireless-equipped models (e.g., Vigor2765ac), each of the wireless SSIDs can also be grouped within one of the VLANs.

TTaaggggeedd VVLLAANN

The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN. You can set the priorities for LAN-side QoS. You can assign each of VLANs to each of the different IP subnets that the router may also be operating, to provide even more isolation. The said functionality is tag-based multi-subnet.

PPoorrtt--BBaasseedd VVLLAANN

Relative to tag-based VLAN which groups clients with an identifier, port-based VLAN uses physical ports (P1 ~ P4) to separate the clients into different VLAN group.

Virtual LAN function provides you a very convenient way to manage hosts by grouping them based on the physical port. The multi-subnet can let a small businesses have much better isolation for multi-occupancy applications. Go to LAN page and select VLAN. The following page will appear. Click Enable to invoke VLAN function.

Below is an example page in Vigor2765ac:

Info

Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port.


Item Description

Enable Click it to enable VLAN configuration.

LAN P1 – P3 – Check the LAN port(s) to group them under the selected VLAN.


Wireless LAN SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the selected VLAN.

Wireless LAN 5G SSID1 – SSID4 – Check the SSID boxes to group them under the selected VLAN.

It is available for “ac” model.

Subnet Choose one of them to make the selected VLAN mapping to the specified subnet only. For example, LAN1 is specified for VLAN0. It means that PCs grouped under VLAN0 can get the IP address(es) that specified by the subnet.

VLAN Tag Enable – Check the box to enable the function of VLAN with tag.

The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on the LAN while sending them out.

Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the packets sending by LAN.

VID – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is form 0 to 4095.


Info

Leave one VLAN untagged at least to prevent from not connecting to Vigor router due to unexpected error.

IInntteerr--LLAANN RRoouuttiinngg

The Vigor router supports up to 15 VLANs. Each VLAN can be set up to use one or more of the Ethernet ports and wireless LAN Service Set Identifiers (SSIDs). Within the grid of VLANs (horizontal rows) and LAN interfaces (vertical columns),

all hosts within the same VLAN (horizontal row) are visible to one another

all hosts connected to the same LAN or WLAN interface (vertical column) are visible to one another if - they belong to the same VLAN, or - they belong to different VLANs, and inter-LAN routing (LAN>>General Setup) between them is enabled (see below).

Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be interconnected or isolated. It is only available when the VLAN functionality is enabled. In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix, a selected checkbox means that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each other.


Vigor2765 Series features a hugely flexible VLAN system. In its simplest form, each of the Gigabit LAN ports can be isolated from each other, for example to feed different companies or departments but keeping their local traffic completely separated.

CCoonnffiigguurriinngg ppoorrtt--bbaasseedd VVLLAANN ffoorr wwiirreelleessss aanndd nnoonn--wwiirreelleessss cclliieennttss

1. All the wire network clients are categorized to group VLAN0 in subnet 192.168.1.0/24 (LAN1).

2. All the wireless network clients are categorized to group VLAN1 in subnet 192.168.2.0/24 (LAN2).

3. Open LAN>>VLAN Configuration. Check the boxes according to the statement in step 1 and Step 2.

4. Click OK.

5. Open LAN>>General Setup. If you want to let the clients in both groups communicate with each other, simply activate Inter-LAN Routing by checking the box between LAN1 and LAN2.

Vigor router supports up to two private IP subnets on LAN. Each can be independent (isolated) or common (able to communicate with each other). This is ideal for departmental or multi-occupancy applications.

Info

As for the VLAN applications, refer to “Appendix I: VLAN Application on Vigor Router” for more detailed information.


IIII--22--33 BBiinndd IIPP ttoo MMAACC

This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in network. When this function is enabled, all the assigned IP and MAC address binding together cannot be changed. If you modified the binding IP or MAC address, it might cause you not access into the Internet.

Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page.


Item Description

Enable Click this radio button to invoke this function. However, IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List also can connect to Internet.

Disable Click this radio button to disable this function. All the settings on this page will be invalid.


Strict Bind Click this radio button to block the connection of the IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List.

Apply Strict Bind to Subnet – Choose the subnet(s) for applying the rules of Bind IP to MAC.

ARP Table This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field. Each pair of IP and MAC address listed in ARP table can be selected and added to IP Bind List by clicking Add below.

Select All Click this link to select all the items in the ARP table.

Sort Reorder the table based on the IP address.

Refresh Refresh the ARP table listed below to obtain the newest ARP table information.

Add or Update IP Address – Type the IP address that will be used for the specified MAC address. Mac Address – Type the MAC address that is used to bind with the assigned IP address.

Comment – Type a brief description for the entry.

Add It allows you to add the one you choose from the ARP table or the IP/MAC address typed in Add and Edit to the table of IP Bind List.

Update It allows you to edit and modify the selected IP address and MAC address that you create before.

Delete You can remove any item listed in IP Bind List. Simply click and select the one, and click Delete. The selected item will be removed from the IP Bind List.

IP Bind List It displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.

Backup Store the configuration for Bind IP to MAC as a file.

Restore Restore the previously stored configuration file and apply to such page.

Info

Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user interface of the router might not be accessed.

When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.


IIII--22--44 LLAANN PPoorrtt MMiirrrroorr

LAN port mirror can be applied for the users in LAN. Generally speaking, this function copies traffic from one or more specific ports to a target port. This mechanism helps manager track the network errors or abnormal packets transmission without interrupting the flow of data access the network. By the way, user can apply this function to monitor all traffics which user needs to check.

There are some advantages supported in this feature. First, it is more economical without other detecting equipments to be set up. Second, it may be able to view traffic on one or more ports within a VLAN at the same time. Third, it can transfer all data traffics to be mirrored to one analyzer connecting to the mirroring port. Last, it is more convenient and easy to configure in user’s interface.


Item Description

Port Mirror Check Enable to activate this function. Or, check Disable to close this function.

Mirror Port Select a port to view traffic sent from mirrored ports.

Mirrored Tx Port Select which ports are necessary to be mirrored for transmitting the packets.

Mirrored Rx Port Select which ports are necessary to be mirrored for receiving the packets.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.

IIII--22--55 WWiirreedd 880022..11xx

IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE Standard for port-based Network Access Control (PNAC). It is part of the IEEE 802.1 group of networking protocols. It provides an authentication mechanism for the device that is attached to a LAN or WLAN.

Wired 802.1x provides authentication for one network device on each LAN port. The RADIUS Server settings must be configured before enabling 802.1x because the EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) Authenticator relies on the RADIUS Server in its authentication process. Each LAN port with Wired 802.1x configured will only forward 802.1x packets and block all other packets until the authentication has successfully completed.



Item Description

Enable Check the box to enable LAN 802.1x function.

802.1x ports After enabling the function, simply specify the LAN port(s) to apply such function.



IIII--33 NNAATT

Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one. Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.

When the outgoing packets destined to some public server on the Internet reach the NAT router, the router will change its source address into the public IP address of the router, select the available public port, and then forward it. At the same time, the router shall list an entry in a table to memorize this address/port-mapping relationship. When the public server response, the incoming traffic, of course, is destined to the router’s public IP address and the router will do the inversion based on its table. Therefore, the internal host can communicate with external host smoothly.

The benefit of the NAT includes:

Save cost on applying public IP address and apply efficient usage of IP address. NAT allows the internal IP addresses of local hosts to be translated into one public IP address, thus you can have only one IP address on behalf of the entire internal hosts.

Enhance security of the internal network by obscuring the IP address. There are many attacks aiming victims based on the IP address. Since the attacker cannot be aware of any private IP addresses, the NAT function can protect the internal network.

Info

On NAT page, you will see the private IP address defined in RFC-1918. Usually we use the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for the router. As stated before, the NAT facility can map one or more IP addresses and/or service ports into different specified services. In other words, the NAT function can be achieved by using port mapping methods.



IIII--33--11 PPoorrtt RReeddiirreeccttiioonn

Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN), such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users. Since the server is actually located inside the LAN, the network well protected by NAT of the router, and identified by its private IP address/port, the goal of Port Redirection function is to forward all access request with public IP address from external users to the mapping private IP address/port of the server.

The port redirection can only apply to incoming traffic.

To use this function, please go to NAT page and choose Port Redirection web page. The Port Redirection Table provides 40 port-mapping entries for the internal hosts.


Each item is explained as follows:

Item Description

Index Display the number of the profile.

Enable Check the box to enable the port redirection profile.

Service Name Display the description of the specific network service.

WAN Interface Display the WAN IP address used by the profile.

Protocol Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).

Public Port Display the port number which will be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.

Source IP Display the IP object of the source IP.

Private IP Display the IP address of the internal host providing the service.

Press any number under Index to access into next page for configuring port redirection.


Item Description

Enable Check this box to enable such port redirection setting.

Mode Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range. In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port) and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP automatically.

Service Name Enter the description of the specific network service.

Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).

WAN Interface Select the WAN interface used for port redirection. There are eight WAN IP alias that can be selected and used for port redirection. The default setting is All which means all the incoming data from any port will be redirected to specified range of IP address and port.


Public Port Specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host. If you choose Range as the port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type the required number on the first box (as the starting port) and the second box (as the ending port).

Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object/IP group profile. Or click IP Object link to create a new one for applying.

Private IP Specify the private IP address of the internal host providing the service. If you choose Range as the port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type a complete IP address in the first box (as the starting point). The second one will be assigned automatically later.

Private Port Specify the private port number of the service offered by the internal host.


Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc. Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to reset the router in order to avoid confliction.

For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80. Therefore, you need to change the router’s http port to any one other than the default port 80 to avoid conflict, such as 8080. This can be set in the System Maintenance >>Management Setup. You then will access the admin screen of by suffixing the IP address with 8080, e.g., http://192.168.1.1:8080 instead of port 80.

http://192.168.1.1:8080/�


IIII--33--22 DDMMZZ HHoosstt

As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single host in the LAN. Regular web surfing and other such Internet activities from other clients will continue to work without inappropriate interruption. DMZ Host allows a defined internal user to be totally exposed to the Internet, which usually helps some special applications such as Netmeeting or Internet Games etc.

The security properties of NAT are somewhat bypassed if you set up DMZ host. We suggest you to add additional filter rules or a secondary firewall.

Click DMZ Host to open the following page. You can set different DMZ host for each WAN interface. Click the WAN tab to switch into the configuration page for that WAN.



Item Description

Choose Private IP first.

Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose PC to select one.

Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.

When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK to save the setting.

DMZ Host for WAN2, or WAN3 is slightly different with WAN1. See the following figure.

If you previously have set up WAN Alias for PPPoE or Static or Dynamic IP mode in WAN2 interface, you will find them in Aux. WAN IP for your selection.



Item Description

Enable Check to enable the DMZ Host function.

Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose PC to select one.

Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.

When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK to save the setting.



IIII--33--33 OOppeenn PPoorrttss

Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications.

Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella, WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.

Click Open Ports to open the following page:


Item Description

Index Click the index number to edit or clear the corresponding entry.

Enable Check to enable this entry.

Comment Specify the name for the defined network service.

Source IP Display the name of IP object used by such entry.

Aux. WAN IP Display the IP alias setting used by such index. If no IP alias setting exists, such field will not appear.

Local IP Address Display the private IP address of the local host offering the service.

To add or edit port settings, click one index number on the page. The index entry setup page will pop up. In each index entry, you can specify 10 port ranges for diverse services.



Item Description

Enable Open Ports Check to enable this entry.

Comment Make a name for the defined network application/service.

Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP Object link to create a new one for applying.

WAN IP Specify the WAN IP address that will be used for this entry. This setting is available when WAN IP Alias is configured.

Private IP Enter the private IP address of the local host or click Choose PC to select one.

Choose IP - Click this button and, subsequently, a window having a list of private IP addresses of local hosts will automatically pop up. Select the appropriate IP address of the local host in the list.

Protocol Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP, or ----- (none) for selection.

Start Port Specify the starting port number of the service offered by the local host.

End Port Specify the ending port number of the service offered by the local host.



IIII--33--44 PPoorrtt TTrriiggggeerriinngg

Port Triggering is a variation of open ports function.

The key difference between "open port" and "port triggering" is:

Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "open port" keeps the ports opened forever.

Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "port triggering" will only attempt to open the ports once the triggering conditions are met.

The duration that these ports are opened depends on the type of protocol used. The "default" durations are shown below and these duration values can be modified via telnet commands.

TCP: 86400 sec.

UDP: 180 sec.

IGMP: 10 sec.

TCP WWW: 60 sec.

TCP SYN: 60 sec.


Item Description

Index Click the index number to edit or clear the corresponding entry.


Comment Display the text which memorizes the application of this rule.

Triggering Protocol Display the protocol of the triggering packets.

Source IP Display the name of the IP object.

Triggering Port Display the port of the triggering packets.

Incoming Protocol Display the protocol for the incoming data of such triggering profile.


Incoming Port Display the port for the incoming data of such triggering profile.

Click the index number link to open the configuration page.


Item Description


Service Choose the predefined service to apply for such trigger profile.

Comment Type the text to memorize the application of this rule.

Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP Object link to create a new one for applying.

Triggering Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such triggering profile.

Triggering Port Type the port or port range for such triggering profile.

Incoming Protocol When the triggering packets received, it is expected the incoming packets will use the selected protocol. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the incoming data of such triggering profile.

Incoming Port Type the port or port range for the incoming packets.



IIII--33--55 AALLGG

ALG means Application Layer Gateway. There are two methods provided by Vigor router, RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) ALG and SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) ALG, for processing the packets of voice and video.

RTSP ALG makes RTSP message, RTCP message, and RTP packets of voice and video be transmitted and received correctly via NAT by Vigor router.

However, SIP ALG makes SIP message and RTP packets of voice be transmitted and received correctly via NAT by Vigor router.


Item Description

Enable ALG Check to enable such function.

Listen Port Type a port number for SIP or RTSP protocol.

TCP Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet from TCP transmit and receive via NAT.

UDP Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet from UDP transmit and receive via NAT.


IIII--44 AApppplliiccaattiioonnss

DDyynnaammiicc DDNNSS

The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the specified Dynamic DNS server. Once the router is online, you will be able to use the registered domain name to access the router or internal virtual servers from the Internet. It is particularly helpful if you host a web server, FTP server, or other server behind the router.

Before you use the Dynamic DNS feature, you have to apply for free DDNS service to the DDNS service providers. The router provides up to three accounts from three different DDNS service providers. Basically, Vigor routers are compatible with the DDNS services supplied by most popular DDNS service providers such as www.dyndns.org, www.no-ip.com, www.dtdns.com, www.changeip.com, www.dynamic- nameserver.com. You should visit their websites to register your own domain name for the router.

LLAANN DDNNSS // DDNNSS FFoorrwwaarrddiinngg

The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor2765 Series will respond the specified private IP address.

SScchheedduullee

The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions.

RRAADDIIUUSS

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.

The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables centralized remote access authentication for network management.

UUPPnnPP

The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.


WWaakkee oonn LLAANN

A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.

In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way, WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.



IIII--44--11 DDyynnaammiicc DDNNSS

EEnnaabbllee tthhee FFuunnccttiioonn aanndd AAdddd aa DDyynnaammiicc DDNNSS AAccccoouunntt

1. Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test.

2. Open Applications>>Dynamic DNS.

3. Check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.


Item Description

Enable Dynamic DNS Setup

Check this box to enable DDNS function.

Set to Factory Default

Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.

View Log Display DDNS log status.

Force Update Force the router updates its information to DDNS server.


Auto-Update interval

Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS service.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of DDNS setup to set account(s).

Enable Check the box to enable such account.

Domain Name Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of DDNS setup.

4. Select Index number 1 to add an account for the router. Check Enable Dynamic DNS Account, and choose correct Service Provider: dyndns.org, type the registered hostname: hostname and domain name suffix: dyndns.org in the Domain Name block. The following two blocks should be typed your account Login Name: test and Password: test.


Item Description

Enable Dynamic DNS Account

Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2).

WAN Interface WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the first channel for such account. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 Only - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the only channel for such account.

Service Provider Select the service provider for the DDNS account.

Service Type Select a service type (Dynamic, Custom or Static). If you choose Custom, you can modify the domain that is chosen in the Domain Name field.

Note that such option is not available when Customized is selected as Service Provider.

Domain Name Type in one domain name that you applied previously. Use the drop down list to choose the desired domain.

Note that such option is not available when Customized is selected as Service Provider.


Login Name Type in the login name that you set for applying domain.

Password Type in the password that you set for applying domain.

Wildcard and Backup MX

The Wildcard and Backup MX (Mail Exchange) features are not supported for all Dynamic DNS providers. You could get more detailed information from their websites.

Mail Extender If the mail server is defined with another name, please type the name in this area. Such mail server will be used as backup mail exchange.

Determine Real WAN IP

If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can enable such function to locate the real WAN IP.

When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this function can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and use the detected IP address for DDNS update.

There are two methods offered for you to choose:

WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is private, DDNS update will take place right away.

Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is private, it will be converted to public IP before DDNS update takes place.

5. Click OK button to activate the settings. You will see your setting has been saved.

DDrraayyDDDDNNSS SSeettttiinnggss

DrayDDNS, a new DDNS service developed by DrayTek, can record multiple WAN IP (IPv4) on single domain name. It is convenient for users to use and easily to set up. Each Vigor Router is available to register one domain name.

Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider, the web page will be displayed as follows:


Item Description

Enable Dynamic DNS Account

Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2).

Service Provider Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider.

Wizard – This button is available when DrayTek Global is selected as


Service Provider. To activate the DrayTek’s DDNS service, click it to enable license issued by DrayTek through Wizards>>Service Activation Wizard.

Refer to secion A-1 How to use DrayDDNS? for detailed information.

Status Display if the license is actvtaed or not.

Determine WAN IP If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can enable such function to locate the real WAN IP.

When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this function can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and use the detected IP address for DDNS update.

There are two methods offered for you to choose:

WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is private, DDNS update will take place right away.

Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is private, it will be converted to public IP before DDNS update takes place.

WAN Interfaces WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the channel for such account.

Let’s Encrypt certificate

Create – Click it to generate a certificate issued by Let’s Encrypt for applying to such DDNS account.

Auto Update – Check the box to make the system update the certificate automatically.

DDiissaabbllee tthhee FFuunnccttiioonn aanndd CClleeaarr aallll DDyynnaammiicc DDNNSS AAccccoouunnttss

Uncheck Enable Dynamic DNS Setup, and click Clear All button to disable the function and clear all accounts from the router.

DDeelleettee aa DDyynnaammiicc DDNNSS AAccccoouunntt

Click the Index number you want to delete and then click Clear All button to delete the account.


IIII--44--22 LLAANN DDNNSS // DDNNSS FFoorrwwaarrddiinngg

The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor2765 Series will respond the specified private IP address.

Simply click Application>>LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding to open the following page.


Item Description

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.


Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page.

Enable Check the box to enable the selected profile.

Profile Display the name of the LAN DNS profile.

Domain Name Display the domain name of the LAN DNS profile.

Forwarding Display that such profile is conditional DNS forwarding or not.

DNS Server Display the IP addres of the DNS Server.

To create a LAN DNS profile:

1. Click any index, say Index No. 1.

2. The detailed settings with index 1 are shown below.


Item Description

Enable Check this box to enable such profile.

Profile Enter a name for such profile.

Note: If you type a name here for LAN DNS and click OK to save the configuration, the name also will be applied to conditional DNS forwarding automatically.

Domain Name Enter the domain name for such profile.

CNAME (Alias Domain Name)

CNAME is abbreviation of Canonical name record.

Such option is used to record the domain name or the host alias.

Add – Click it to add a new host with specified reference.

IP Address List The IP address listed here will be used for mapping with the domain name specified above. In general, one domain name


maps with one IP address. If required, you can configure two IP addresses mapping with the same domain name. Add – Click it to open a dialog to type the host’s IP address.

Only responds to the DNS…. – Different LAN PCs can

share the same domain name. However, you have to check this box to make the router identify & respond the IP address for the DNS query coming from different LAN PC.

Delete – Click it to remove an existed IP address on the list.

3. Click OK button to save the settings.

4. If you need to configure LAN DNS settings, click index 1 to edit the LAN DNS profile just created. Or, you can click index 2 to use this profile as conditional DNS forwarding.


Item Description

Enable Check this box to enable such profile.

Profile Type a name for such profile.

Note: If you type a name here for conditional DNS forwarding and click OK to save the configuration, the name also will be applied to LAN DNS automatically.

Domain Name Type the domain name for such profile.

DNS Server IP Address Type the IP address of the DNS server you want to use for DNS forwarding.


6. A new LAN DNS profile has been created.


IIII--44--33 DDNNSS SSeeccuurriittyy

DNS security is able to ensure that the incoming data is not falsified and the source of the data is secure and correct to prevent from DNS attack by someone.


All of WAN interfaces of Vigor router can be configured with DNS Security enabled respectively.


Item Description

Interface There are four WAN interfaces allowed to be set with DNS security enabled.

Enable Check the box to enable the DNS security management.

Primary DNS Display the IP address of primary DNS obtained from DHCP server or specified by Static WAN.

Secondary DNS Display the IP address of secondary DNS obtained from DHCP server or specified by Static WAN.

Bogus DNS Reply Sometime, Vigor router might encounter packets from bogus DNS inquiry. There are two ways to reply such DNS inquiry.

Drop – Discard the packets.

Pass – Accept the packets and let them pass through Vigor router.


IIII--44--33--22 DDoommaaiinn DDiiaaggnnoossee

This page is used to configure settings for manually detecting if the domain is secure not.


Item Description

Domain Type the domain name or IP address (IPv4/IPv6) that you want to query.

Interface Specify the interface required for executing diagnose.

DNS Server Type the IP address of the DNS Server which will diagnose the domain specified above.

Diagnose Click it to perform the diagnosis for the domain.

Result The diagnosed information will be displayed on such field.


IIII--44--44 SScchheedduullee

The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions.

You have to set your time before set schedule. In System Maintenance>> Time and Date menu, press Inquire Time button to set the Vigor router’s clock to current time of your PC. The clock will reset once if you power down or reset the router. There is another way to set up time. You can inquiry an NTP server (a time server) on the Internet to synchronize the router’s clock. This method can only be applied when the WAN connection has been built up.


Item Description

Current System Time Display the time Vigor router used.

System time set Click it to acess into the time setup page (System Maintenance>>Time and Date).

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.


Index Click the index number link to access into the setting page of schedule.

Enable Check the box to enable such schedule profile.

Comment Display the name of the time schedule.

Time Display the valid time period by time bar.

Frequency Display which day(s) will be always on and which day(s) will be always off of the schedule profile by color boxes.

- If it lights in green, it means such schedule is active.

You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and Remote Access >> LAN-to-LAN settings.

To add a schedule:

1. Click any index, say Index No. 1.

2. The detailed settings of the call schedule with index 1 are shown below.


Item Description

Enable Schedule Setup

Check to enable the schedule.

Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd)

Specify the starting date of the schedule.

Start Time (hh:mm) Specify the starting time of the schedule.

Duration Time (hh:mm)

Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.

End Time (hh:mm) It will be calculated automatically when Start Time and Duration Time are configured well.

Action Specify which action Call Schedule should apply during the period of the schedule.


Force On -Force the connection to be always on.

Force Down -Force the connection to be always down.

How Often Specify how often the schedule will be applied.

Once -The schedule will be applied just once

Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should perform the schedule.

Monthly, on date – The router will only execute the action applied such schedule on the date (1 to 28) of a month.

Cycle duration – Type a number as cycle duration. Then, any action applied such schedule will be executed per several days. For example, “3” is selected as cycle duration. That means, the action applied such schedule will be executed every three days since the date defined on the Start Date.


Example

Suppose you want to control the PPPoE Internet access connection to be always on (Force On) from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week. Other time the Internet access connection should be disconnected (Force Down).

Office Hour:

(Force On)

Mon - Sun 9:00 am to 6:00 pm

1. Make sure the PPPoE connection and Time Setup is working properly.

2. Configure the PPPoE always on from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week.

3. Configure the Force Down from 18:00 to next day 9:00 for whole week.

4. Assign these two profiles to the PPPoE Internet access profile. Now, the PPPoE Internet

connection will follow the schedule order to perform Force On or Force Down action

according to the time plan that has been pre-defined in the schedule profiles.

IIII--44--55 RRAADDIIUUSS

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.

The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables centralized remote access authentication for network management.

Vigor router can be operated as a RADIUS client. Therefore, this page is used to configure settings for external RADIUS server. Then LAN user of Vigor router will be authenticated by such server for network application.



Item Description

Enable Check to enable RADIUS client feature.

Comments Enter a brief description for the RADIUS server.

Primary Server / Secondary Server --- When the Primary server is down, Vigor system will try to connect the secondary server.

Primary Server Enter the IP address of RADIUS server

Secret The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36 characters.

Authentication Port The UDP port number that the RADIUS server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.

Retry Set the number of times for Vigor system to connecting to the primary/secondary server. When there is no response from the connecting RADIUS server, the Vigor system will switch into another RADIUS server for authenticating the user.

After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.


IIII--44--66 UUPPnnPP

The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.

Info

UPnP is required for some applications such as PPS, Skype, eMule...and etc. If you are not familiar with UPnP, it is suggested to turn off this function for security.


Item Description

Enable UPnP Service Accordingly, you can enable either the Connection Control Service or Connection Status Service.

Default WAN It is used to specify the WAN interface for applying such function.

The reminder as regards concern about Firewall and UPnP:

Can't work with Firewall Software

Enabling firewall applications on your PC may cause the UPnP function not working properly. This is because these applications will block the accessing ability of some network ports.

Security Considerations

Activating the UPnP function on your network may incur some security threats. You should consider carefully these risks before activating the UPnP function.

Some Microsoft operating systems have found out the UPnP weaknesses and hence you need to ensure that you have applied the latest service packs and patches.

Non-privileged users can control some router functions, including removing and adding port mappings.

The UPnP function dynamically adds port mappings on behalf of some UPnP-aware applications. When the applications terminate abnormally, these mappings may not be removed.


IIII--44--77 IIGGMMPP

IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups.

IIII--44--77--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettttiinngg


Item Description

IGMP Proxy Check this box to enable this function. The application of multicast will be executed through WAN /PVC/VLAN port. In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.

Interface – Specify an interface for packets passing through.

IGMP version – At present, two versions (v2 and v3) are supported by Vigor router. Choose the correct version based on the IPTV service you subscribe.

General Query Interval – Vigor router will periodically check which IP obtaining IPTV service by sending query. It might cause inconvenience for client. Therefore, set a suitable time (unit: second) as the query interval to limit the frequency of query sent by Vigor router.

Add PPP header – Check this box if the interface type for IGMP is PPPoE. It depends on the specifications regulated by each ISP. If you have no idea to enable or disable, simply contact your ISP providers.

Enable IGMP syslog - Check the box to send the record of IGMP server to Syslog.

IGMP Snooping Check this box to enable this function. Multicast traffic will be forwarded to ports that have members of that group. Disabling IGMP snooping will make multicast traffic treated in the same manner as broadcast traffic.


IGMP Fast Leave Check this box to make the router stop forwarding multicast traffic to a LAN port as soon as it receives a leave message from that port. Each LAN port should have one IGMP host connected.


IIII--44--77--22 WWoorrkkiinngg GGrroouupp


Item Description

Refresh Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.

Group ID This field displays the ID port for the multicast group. The available range for IGMP starts from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.254.

P1 to P3 It indicates the LAN port used for the multicast group.

IIII--44--88 WWaakkee oonn LLAANN

A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.

In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way, WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.



Item Description

Wake by If you choose to be woken by MAC Address, you have to type the correct MAC address of the host in MAC Address boxes.

IP Address The IP addresses that have been configured in Firewall>>Bind IP to MAC will be shown in this drop down list. Choose the IP address from the drop down list that you want to wake up.

MAC Address Type any one of the MAC address of the bound PCs.

Wake Up Click this button to wake up the selected IP. See the following figure. The result will be shown on the box.

IIII--44--99 SSMMSS // MMaaiill AAlleerrtt SSeerrvviiccee

The function of SMS (Short Message Service)/Mail Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the real-time abnormal situations.

Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to different conditions.

IIII--44--99--11 SSMMSS AAlleerrtt This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and when the SMS will be sent.


Item Description

Index Check the box to enable such profile.

Enable Click the box to enable such profile.


SMS Provider Use the drop down list to choose SMS service provider.

You can click SMS Provider link to define the SMS server.

Recipient Number Type the phone number of the one who will receive the SMS.

Notify Profile Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.

You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content of the SMS.

Schedule (1-15) Type the schedule number that the SMS will be sent out.

You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the schedule.


IIII--44--99--22 MMaaiill AAlleerrtt This page allows you to specify Mail Server profile, who will get the notification e-mail, what the content is and when the message will be sent.


Item Description

Index Check the box to enable such profile.


Mail Service Use the drop down list to choose mail service object. All of the available objects are created in Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Service Option. If there is no object listed, click Mail Service link to define a new one with specified service provider.

Mail Address Type the e-mail address of the one who will receive the notification message.


Notify Profile Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.

You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content of the mail message.

Schedule (1-15) Type the schedule number that the notification will be sent out.

You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the schedule.



IIII--44--1100 BBoonnjjoouurr

Bonjour is a service discovery protocol which is a built-in service in Mac OS X; for Windows or Linux platform, there is correspondent software to enable this function for free.

Usually, users have to configure the router or personal computers to use above services. Sometimes, the configuration (e.g., IP settings, port number) is complicated and not easy to complete. The purpose of Bonjour is to decrease the settings configuration (e.g., IP setting). If the host and user’s computer have the plug-in bonjour driver install, they can utilize the service offered by the router by clicking the router name icon. In short, what the Clients/users need to know is the name of the router only.

To enable the Bonjour service, click Application>>Bonjour to open the following page. Check the box(es) of the server service(s) that you want to share to the LAN clients.

Below shows an example for applying the bonjour feature that Vigor router can be used as the FTP server.

1. Here, we use Firefox and DNSSD to discover the service in such case. Therefore, just ensure the Bonjour client program and DNSSD for Firefox have been installed on the computer.


2. Open the web browse, Firefox. If Bonjour and DNSSD have been installed, you can open the web page (DNSSD) and see the following results.

3. Open System Maintenance>>Management. Enter a name as the Router Name and click OK.

4. Next, open Applications>>Bonjour. Check the service that you want to use via Bonjour.

5. Open the DNSSD page again. The available items will be changed as the follows. It means the Vigor router (based on Bonjour protocol) is ready to be used as a printer server, FTP server, SSH Server, Telnet Server, and HTTP Server.


6. Now, any page or document can be printed out through Vigor router (installed with a printer).



AA--11 HHooww ttoo CCoonnffiigguurree CCuussttoommiizzeedd DDDDNNSS??

This article describes how to configure customized DDNS on Vigor routers to update your IP to the DDNS server. We will take “Changeip.org” and “3322.net” as example. Before setting, please make sure that the WAN connection is up.

PPaarrtt AA :: CChhaannggeeiipp..oorrgg

Note that,

Username: jo***

Password: jo********

Host name: j*****.changeip.org

WAN IP address: 1.169.185.242

Following is the screenshot of editing the HTML script on the browser to update your IP to the DDNS server.


Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically.

1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS client.

2. Set the Service Provider as Customized.

3. Set the Service API as: /dynamic/dns/update.asp?u=jo***&p=jo********&hostname=j****.changeip.org&ip=###IP### &cmd=update&offline=0

In which, ###IP### is a value which will be replaced with the current interface IP address automatically when DDNS service is running. In this case the IP will be 1.169.185.242.

4. After setting, the Customized DDNS service will be up, and our IP will be updated to the DDNS server.

PPaarrtt BB :: 33332222..nneett

Username: bi*******

Password: 88********

Host name: bi*******.3322.org


WAN IP address: 111.243.178.53

To update the IP to the DDNS server via editing the HTML script, we can type the following script on the browser:

“good 111.243.178.53” means our IP has been updated to the server successfully.

Now we have to configure the router so it can do the same job for us automatically.

1. Please go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS to create a profile for Customized DDNS client.

2. Set the Service Provider as Customized.

3. Set the Provider Host as member.3322.net.

4. Set the Service API as: /dyndns/update?hostname=yourhost.3322.org&myip=###IP###&wildcard=OFF&mx=mail.exchanger.ext&backmx=NO&offline=NO

5. Enter your account and password.

6. After the setting, the Customized DDNS service will be up, and our IP will be updated to the DDNS server automatically.


PPaarrtt CC :: EExxtteenndd NNoottee

The customized Service Provider is also eligible with the ClouDNS.net.


IIII--55 RRoouuttiinngg

Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance, security, routing decision, and etc.

Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request. In general, Route Policy can easily reach the following purposes:

Load Balance

You may manually create policies to balance the traffic across network interface.

Specify Interface

Through dedicated interface (WAN/LAN/VPN), the data can be sent from the source IP to the destination IP.

Address Mapping

Allows you specify the outgoing WAN IP address (es) for an internal private IP address or a range of internal private IP addresses.

Priority

The router will determine which policy will be adopted for transmitting the packet according to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.

Failover to/Failback

Packets will be sent through another Interface or follow another Policy when the original interface goes down (Failover to). Once the original interface resumes service (Failback), the packets will be returned to it immediately.

Other routing

Specify routing policy to determine the direction of the data transmission.

Info

For more detailed information about using policy route, refer to SUPPORT >> TECH SUPPORT >> KNOWLEDGE BASE on www.draytek.com.



IIII--55--11 SSttaattiicc RRoouuttee

Go to Routing to open setting page and choose Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6 for you to configure the static route. Both protocols bring different web pages.

IIII--55--11--11 SSttaattiicc RRoouuttee ffoorr IIPPvv44


Item Description

Index The number (1 to 20) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route.

Enable Check the box to enable such profile.

Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.


Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default settings.

Viewing Routing Table Displays the routing table for your reference.


AAdddd SSttaattiicc RRoouutteess ttoo PPrriivvaattee aanndd PPuubblliicc NNeettwwoorrkkss

Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet access has been configured and the router works properly:

use the Main Router to surf the Internet.

create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2)

create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).

have set Main Router 192.168.1.1 as the default gateway for the Router A 192.168.1.2.

Before setting Static Route, user A cannot talk to user B for Router A can only forward recognized packets to its default gateway Main Router.

1. Go to LAN page and click General Setup, select 1st Subnet as the RIP Protocol Control. Then click the OK button.

Info

There are two reasons that we have to apply RIP Protocol Control on 1st Subnet. The first is that the LAN interface can exchange RIP packets with the neighboring routers via the 1st subnet (192.168.1.0/24). The second is that those hosts on the internal private subnets (ex. 192.168.10.0/24) can access the Internet via the router, and continuously exchange of IP routing information with different subnets.


2. Click the Routing>> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box. Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to 192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK.


Item Description

Enable Click it to enable this profile.

Destination IP Address

Type an IP address as the destination of such static route.

Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for such static route.

Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for such static route.

3. Return to Static Route Setup page. Click on another Index Number to add another static route as show below, which regulates all packets destined to 211.100.88.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.3. Click OK.


4. Go to Diagnostics and choose Routing Table to verify current routing table.

IIII--55--11--22 SSttaattiicc RRoouuttee ffoorr IIPPvv66 You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following page:


Item Description

Index The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route.


Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.


Viewing IPv6 Routing Table

Displays the routing table for your reference.

Click any underline of index number to get the following page.



Item Description

Enable Click it to enable this profile.

Destination IPv6 Address / Prefix Len

Type the IP address with the prefix length for this entry.

Gateway IPv6 Address Type the gateway address for this entry.

Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static route.


IIII--55--22 RRoouuttee PPoolliiccyy



Item Description

Index Click the number of index to access into the configuration web page.


Enable Check this box to enable this policy.

Protocol Display the protocol used for this policy.

Interface Display the interface to send packets to once the policy is matched.

Priority Display the priority value for such route policy profile.

Src IP Start Displays the IP address for the start of the source IP.

Src IP End Displays the IP address for the end of the source IP.

Dest IP Start Displays the IP address for the start of the destination IP.

Dest IP End Displays the IP address for the end of the destination IP.

Dest Port Start Displays the IP address for the start of the destination port.

Dest Port End Displays the IP address for the end of the destination port.

Move UP/Move Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the policy.

Wizard Mode Allows to configure frequently used settings of route policy via three setting pages

Advance Mode Allows to configure detailed settings of route policy.

To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:

1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.

2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:


Item Description

Source IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.

Src IP Start - Type the source IP start for the specified WAN interface.

Src IP End - Type the source IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source IPs inside the LAN will be passed through the WAN interface.


Destination IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.

Dest IP Start- Type the destination IP start for the specified WAN interface.

Dest IP End - Type the destination IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination IPs will be passed through the WAN interface.

Country Object – Specify a country object. All the IPs coming from the country (countries) specified in the object will be passed through the WAN interface.

3. Click Next to get the following page.


Item Description

Interface Use the drop down list to choose an interface or VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be transferred to the interface chosen here.

4. After specifying the interface, click Next to get the following page.


Item Description

Force NAT /Force Routing

It determines which mechanism that the router will use to forward the packet to WAN.

5. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.


6. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.


To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:

1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.

2. Click Index 2 to access into the following page.


Item Description

Enable Check this box to enable this policy.

Comment Enter a brief explanation for such profile.

Protocol Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for the WAN interface.

Source Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.

IP Range – Define a range of IP address as source IP addresses.

Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such profile.

End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile.

IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask address.

Network – Type an IP address here.

Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask for the network.

IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a preconfigured IP object/group.


Destination Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.

IP Range – Define a range of IP address as destination IP addresses.

Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such profile.

End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile.

IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask address.

Network – Type an IP address here.

Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask for the network.

Domain Name – Specify a domain name as the destination.

Select – Click it to choose an existing domain name defined in Objects Setting>>String Object.

Delete – Remove current used domain name.

Add – Create a new domain name as the destination.

IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a preconfigured IP object/group.

Country Object – Use the drop dwon list to choose a preconfigured object. Then all IPs within that country will be treated as the destination IP.

Destination Port Any – Any port number can be treated as the destination port.

Dest Port Range –

Start - Type the destination port start for the destination IP.

End - Type the destination port end for the destination IP. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination ports will be passed through the WAN interface.

Send to if criteria matched

Interface – Use the drop down list to choose a WAN or LAN interface or VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be transferred to the interface chosen here.

Gateway – Specific gateway is used only when you want to forward the packets to the desired gateway. Usually, Default Gateway is selected in default.

Packet Forwarding to WAN/LAN via – When you choose WAN (e.g., WAN1) as the Interface for packet transmission, you have to specify the way the packet forwarded to. Choose Force NAT or Force Routing.

Failover to – Check this button to lead the data passing through specific interface (WAN/LAN/VPN/Route Policy) automatically when the selected interface (defined in Send via if criteria matched) is down.

WAN/LAN – Use the drop down list to choose an interface as an auto failover interface.

VPN – Use the drop down list to choose a VPN tunnel as a failover tunnel.

Route Policy – Use the drop down list to choose an existed route policy profile.

Gateway – Specific gateway is used only when you want to forward the packets to the desired gateway. Usually, Default Gateway is selected in default.


Priority Packets will be transmitted based on all routes or Route Policy. Vigor router will determine which rule will be adopted for transmitting the packet according to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.

The greater the value is, the lower the priority is. Default value for route policy is “200” which means it has higher priority than the default route.

3. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.

IIII--55--22--22 DDiiaaggnnoossee With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route) of the packets sent out of the router can be traced.

or


Item Description

Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor


router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy.

Analyze how multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be sent by a route policy.

Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor router.

Protocol - Specify a protocol (ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY) for diagnosis.

Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.

Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.

Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination port.

Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click export analysis to export the result as a file.

Input File Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for saving the result of analysis.


Note that the analysis was based on the current "load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee it will be 100% the same as the real case.



AA--11 HHooww ttoo sseett uupp AAddddrreessss MMaappppiinngg wwiitthh RRoouuttee PPoolliiccyy?? Address Mapping is used to map a specified private IP or a range of private IPs of NAT subnet into a specified WAN IP (or WAN IP alias IP). Refer to the following figure.

This document introduces how to set up address mapping with Route Policy. When a WAN interface has multiple public IP addresses, Administrator may specify the outgoing IP for certain internal IP address by a Route Policy.

1. Set up WAN IP Alias. Go to WAN >> Internet Access >> Details Page, and click on WAN IP Alias button.

(1) Check Enable.

(2) Enter the WAN IP address.

(3) Click OK to save.

After setting up the WAN IP Alias, the IP addresses will be shown in the drop-down list of Interface in Route Policy setting.


2. Go to Routing>>Route policy. Create a Route Policy for specific IP address to send from specific WAN IP Address.

Enable this policy.

Enter Source IP as the range of private IP address.

Leave the Destination IP and Port as Any.

Select Interface as WAN, and then select Interface address from the drop-down list. (The List can be edited in WAN IP Alias setting.)

Enable Failover to other WAN so the traffic will be sent via other Interface when the path fails. But do not enable this option if you want the traffic only to use a designated IP address.

Click OK to save.

3. After the above configuration, packet source from the range between 192.168.1.20 and 192.168.1.30 sent to the Internet will use the public IP 172.17.1.1.


AA--22 HHooww ttoo uussee ddeessttiinnaattiioonn ddoommaaiinn nnaammee iinn aa rroouuttee ppoolliiccyy?? Route Policy supports using a domain name as destination criteria. It provides a more direct way to set up route polices if the network administrator is trying to specify the gateway for the traffic that destined for a certain website.

To use a destination domain name as criteria, just select Domain Name as Destination in Criteria, and enter the domain name in the empty field.

Or you may click Select, and use a string that is pre-defined in Objects Settings >> String Object as the domain name.

Click Add too add more domain names, we can set up to 5 domain names in one route policy.


AAuuttoo--ccrreeaattee SSttrriinngg OObbjjeeccttss

If you manually enter the domain name in a route policy, after clicking OK to apply the route policy, those domain names will be given a number.

That means the router has automatically created string objects for those domain names, so that they can be used in other route policies or other functions.


This page is left blank.


PPaarrtt IIIIII WWiirreelleessss LLAANN

Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.


IIIIII--11 WWiirreelleessss LLAANN

This function is used for “n / ac” models only.

Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth. Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via wireless communication products. The Vigor2765 wireless series router (with “n” in model name) is designed for maximum flexibility and efficiency of a small office/home. Any authorized staff can bring a built-in WLAN client PDA or notebook into a meeting room for conference without laying a clot of LAN cable or drilling holes everywhere. Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.

Vigor2765 wireless router is a highly integrated wireless local area network (WLAN) for 2.4 GHz 802.11n WLAN applications. Vigor2765 “n / ac” series router supports 802.11n up to 300 Mbps for 40 MHz channel operations.

Info

The actual data throughput will vary according to the network conditions and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, network overhead and building materials.

In an Infrastructure Mode of wireless network, Vigor wireless router plays a role as an Access Point (AP) connecting to lots of wireless clients or Stations (STA). All the STAs will share the same Internet connection via Vigor wireless router. The General Settings will set up the information of this wireless network, including its SSID as identification, located channel etc.

MMuullttiippllee SSSSIIDDss

Vigor router supports four SSID settings for wireless connections. Each SSID can be defined with different name and download/upload rate for selecting by stations connected to the router wirelessly.


RReeaall--ttiimmee HHaarrddwwaarree EEnnccrryyppttiioonn

Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest protection to your data without influencing user experience.

CCoommpplleettee SSeeccuurriittyy SSttaannddaarrdd SSeelleeccttiioonn

To ensure the security and privacy of your wireless communication, we provide several prevailing standards on market.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a legacy method to encrypt each frame transmitted via radio using either a 64-bit or 128-bit key. Usually access point will preset a set of four keys and it will communicate with each station using only one out of the four keys.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), the most dominating security mechanism in industry, is separated into two categories: WPA-personal or called WPA Pre-Share Key (WPA/PSK), and WPA-Enterprise or called WPA/802.1x.

In WPA-Personal, a pre-defined key is used for encryption during data transmission. WPA applies Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption while WPA2 applies AES. The WPA-Enterprise combines not only encryption but also authentication.

Since WEP has been proved vulnerable, you may consider using WPA for the most secure connection. You should select the appropriate security mechanism according to your needs. No matter which security suite you select, they all will enhance the over-the-air data protection and /or privacy on your wireless network. The Vigor wireless router is very flexible and can support multiple secure connections with both WEP and WPA at the same time.

Info

The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK value for connection.

SSeeppaarraattee tthhee WWiirreelleessss aanndd tthhee WWiirreedd LLAANN-- WWLLAANN IIssoollaattiioonn

It enables you to isolate your wireless LAN from wired LAN for either quarantine or limit access reasons. To isolate means neither of the parties can access each other. To elaborate an example for business use, you may set up a wireless LAN for visitors only so they can connect to Internet without hassle of the confidential information leakage. For a more flexible deployment, you may add filters of MAC addresses to isolate users’ access from wired LAN.

MMaannaaggee WWiirreelleessss SSttaattiioonnss -- SSttaattiioonn LLiisstt

It will display all the stations in your wireless network and the status of their connection.


WWPPSS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and WPA2.



IIIIII--11--11 WWiirreelleessss WWiizzaarrdd

The wireless wizard allows you to configure settings specified for a host AP (for home use or internal use for a company) and specified for a guest AP (for any wireless clients accessing into Internet).

Follow the steps listed below:

1. Open Wizards>>Wireless Wizard.

2. The screen of wireless wizard will be shown as follows. This page will be used for internal users in a company or your home.


Item Description

Name Type the SSID name of this router for wireless 2.4GHz. The default name is defined with DrayTek. Change the name if


required.

Mode Available modes are different based on 2.4GHz and / or 5GHz supported by Vigor router.

Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6 (for 2.4GHz) or 36 (for 5GHz). You may switch channel if the selected channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system determine for you.

Security Key The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.

The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via 802.1x authentication.

Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as “0x321253abcde…”).


Cancel Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.

3. After entering the required information, click Next. The settings in the page limit the wireless station (guest) accessing into Internet but not being allowed to share the LAN network and VPN connection.


Item Description

Enable/Disable Click it to enable or disable settings in this page.

SSID Type the SSID name of this router. (SSID1)

Security Key The wireless mode offered by this wizard is WPA2/PSK.

The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via 802.1x authentication.

Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as


"0x321253abcde...").

Bandwidth Limit It controls the data transmission rate through wireless connection.

Total Upload – Check Enable and type the transmitting rate for data upload. Default value is 30,000 kbps.

Total Download – Type the transmitting rate for data download. Default value is 30,000 kbps.

Use the same SSID and Security Key as above

Check the box to use the same settings configured above.


Cancel Exit the wireless wizard without saving any changes.

4. After typing the required information, click Next.

5. The following page will display the configuration summary for wireless setting.

6. Click Finish to complete the wireless settings configuration.


IIIIII--11--22 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

By clicking the Wireless LAN>> General Settings, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more information.


Item Description

Enable Wireless LAN Check the box to enable wireless function.

Mode At present, the router can connect to 11b Only, 11g Only, 11n Only (2.4GHz), Mixed (11b+11g), Mixed (11g+11n), and Mixed (11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mixed (11b+11g+11n) mode.

Channel Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system determine for you.

SSID Means the identification of the wireless LAN. SSID can be any text numbers or various special characters.

Hide SSID Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN. Depending on the wireless utility, the user may only see the information except SSID or just cannot see any thing about Vigor wireless router while site surveying. The system allows


you to set four sets of SSID for different usage. In default, the first set of SSID will be enabled. You can hide it for your necessity.

Isolate Member –Check this box to make the wireless clients (stations) with the same SSID not accessing for each other.

VPN – Check this box to make the wireless clients (stations) with different VPN not accessing for each other.

Schedule Profiles Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only. You can choose schedule profiles pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule. Check the SSID number box to apply the selected schedule.



IIIIII--11--33 SSeeccuurriittyy

This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it.

The password (PSK) of default security mode is provided and stated on the label pasted on the bottom of the router. For the wireless client who wants to access into Internet through such router, please input the default PSK value for connection.

By clicking the Security, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the settings of WPA and WEP.



Item Description

Mode There are several modes provided for you to choose.

Info

You should also set RADIUS Server simultaneously if 802.1x mode is selected.

Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism.

WEP-Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key should be entered in WEP Key.

WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA2/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients simultaneously and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA/PSK-Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

WPA2/PSK-Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

Mixed (WPA+ WPA2)/PSK - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients simultaneously and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

WPA The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via 802.1x authentication. Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde...").

Pre-Shared Key (PSK) - Either 8~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678..(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde...").

Password Strength – The system will display the password strength (represented with the word of weak, medium or strong) of the PSK specified above.

WEP 64-Bit - For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445.)

128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters, such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D).

All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption bit size and have the same key. Four keys can be entered here, but only one key can be selected at a time. The keys can be entered in ASCII or Hexadecimal. Check the key you wish to use.



IIIIII--11--44 AAcccceessss CCoonnttrrooll

In the Access Control, the router may restrict wireless access to certain wireless clients only by locking their MAC address into a black or white list. The user may block wireless clients by inserting their MAC addresses into a black list, or only let them be able to connect by inserting their MAC addresses into a white list.

In the Access Control web page, users may configure the white/black list modes used by each SSID and the MAC addresses applied to their lists.


Item Description

Enable Mac Address Filter Select to enable the MAC Address filter for wireless LAN identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively. All the clients (expressed by MAC addresses) listed in the box can be grouped under different wireless LAN. For example, they can be grouped under SSID 1 and SSID 2 at the same time if you check SSID 1 and SSID 2.

MAC Address Filter Display all MAC addresses that are edited before.

Client’s MAC Address Manually enter the MAC address of wireless client.

Apply SSID After entering the client’s MAC address, check the box of the SSIDs desired to insert this MAC address into their access control list.

Attribute s: Isolate the station from LAN - select to isolate the wireless connection of the wireless client of the MAC address


from LAN.

Comment Type a brief description for the specified client’s MAC address.

Add Add a new MAC address into the list.

Delete Delete the selected MAC address in the list.

Edit Edit the selected MAC address in the list.

Cancel Give up the access control set up.

OK Click it to save the access control list.

Clear All Clean all entries in the MAC address list.

Backup Access Control Settings on this web page can be saved as a file which can be restored in the future by this device or other device.

Upload From File Restore wireless access control settings and applied onto this device.


IIIIII--11--55 WWPPSS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and WPA2.

Info

WPS is available for the wireless station with WPS supported.

It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router. Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to setup a wireless client every time. He/she only needs to press a button on wireless client, and WPS will connect for client and router automatically.

There are two methods to do network connection through WPS between AP and Stations: pressing the Start PBC button or using PIN Code.


On the side of Vigor router series which served as an AP, press WPS button once on the front panel of the router or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card.

If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client. Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.

For WPS is supported in WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode, if you do not choose such mode in Wireless LAN>>Security, you will see the following message box.

Please click OK and go back Wireless LAN>>Security to choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode and access WPS again.


Below shows Wireless LAN>>WPS web page:


Item Description

Enable WPS Check this box to enable WPS setting.

WPS Status Display related system information for WPS. If the wireless security (encryption) function of the router is properly configured, you can see ‘Configured’ message here.

SSID Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1 only.

Authentication Mode Display current authentication mode of the router. Only WPA2/PSK and WPA/PSK support WPS.

Configure via Push Button Click Start PBC to invoke Push-Button style WPS setup procedure. The router will wait for WPS requests from wireless clients about two minutes. The WPS LED on the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within two minutes)

Configure via Client PinCode

Please input the PIN code specified in wireless client you wish to connect, and click Start PIN button. The WPS LED on the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within two minutes)


IIIIII--11--66 WWDDSS ((ffoorr WWLLAANN 55 GGHHzz))

WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP) wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application:

Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air.

Extend the coverage range of a WLAN.

To meet the above requirement, two WDS modes are implemented in Vigor router. One is Bridge, the other is Repeater. Below shows the function of WDS-bridge interface:

The application for the WDS-Repeater mode is depicted as below:

The major difference between these two modes is that: while in Repeater mode, the packets received from one peer AP can be repeated to another peer AP through WDS links. Yet in Bridge mode, packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded to local wired or wireless hosts. In other words, only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding.

In the following examples, hosts connected to Bridge 1 or 3 can communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 2 through WDS links. However, hosts connected to Bridge 1 CANNOT communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 3 through Bridge 2.


Click WDS from Wireless LAN menu. The following page will be shown.


Item Description

Mode Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not invoke any WDS setting. Repeater mode is for the second one.

Security There are three types for security, Disable, WEP and Pre-shared key. The setting you choose here will make the following WEP or Pre-shared key field valid or not. Choose one of the types for the router.

Pre-shared Key Type – There are some types for you to choose. WPA and WPA2 are used for WDS devices (e.g.2920n wireless router, you can set the encryption mode as WPA or WPA2 to establish your WDS system between AP and the router.

Key - Type 8 ~ 66 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal digits leading by “0x”.


Repeater If you choose Repeater as the connecting mode, please type in the peer MAC address in these fields. Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time. Similarly, if you want to invoke the peer MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC address after typing.

Access Point Function Click Enable to make this router serve as an access point; click Disable to cancel this function.

Status It allows user to send “hello” message to peers. Yet, it is valid only when the peer also supports this function.



IIIIII--11--77 AAddvvaanncceedd SSeettttiinngg

This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth, guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission.


Item Description

Operation Mode Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards. However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.

Green Field – to get the highest throughput, please choose such mode. Such mode can make the data transmission happen between 11n systems only. In addition, it does not have protection mechanism to avoid the conflict with neighboring devices of 802.11a/b/g.

Channel Bandwidth 20- Vigor Router will use 20Mhz for data transmission and receiving between the AP and the stations.

20/40 – Vigor Router will scan for nearby wireless AP, and then use 20MHz if the number of AP is more than 10, or use 40MHz if it's not.

40- Vigor Router will use 40Mhz for data transmission and receiving between the AP and the stations.

Guard Interval It is to assure the safety of propagation delays and reflections for the sensitive digital data. If you choose auto as guard interval, the AP router will choose short guard interval (increasing the wireless performance) or long guard interval for data transmit based on the station capability.

Aggregation MSDU Aggregation MSDU can combine frames with different sizes. It is used for improving MAC layer’s performance for some brand’s clients. The default setting is Enable.


Long Preamble This option is to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. Click Enable to use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind of devices.

Packet-OVERDRIVE This feature can enhance the performance in data transmission about 40%* more (by checking Tx Burst). It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time. That is, the wireless client must support this feature and invoke the function, too.

Note: Vigor N61 wireless adapter supports this function. Therefore, you can use and install it into your PC for matching with Packet-OVERDRIVE (refer to the following picture of Vigor N61 wireless utility window, choose Enable for TxBURST on the tab of Option).

Info

* means the real transmission rate depends on the environment of the network.

Antenna Vigor router can be attached with two antennas to have good data transmission via wireless connection. However, if you have only one antenna attached, please choose 1T1R.

Tx Power Set the power percentage for transmission signal of access point. The greater the value is, the higher intensity of the signal will be.

WMM Capable To apply WMM parameters for wireless data transmission, please click the Enable radio button.

APSD Capable The default setting is Disable.

Rate Adaptation Algorithm Wireless transmission rate is adapted dynamically. Usually, performance of “new” algorithm is better than “old”.

Fragment Length Set the Fragment threshold. Do not modify default value if you don’t know what it is, default value is 2346.


(256 – 2346)

RTS Threshold (1 – 2347) Minimize the collision (unit is bytes) between hidden stations to improve wireless performance.

Set the RTS threshold of wireless radio. Do not modify default value if you don’t know what it is, default value is 2347.

Country Code Vigor router broadcasts country codes by following the 802.11d standard. However, some wireless stations will detect / scan the country code to prevent conflict occurred. If conflict is detected, wireless station will be warned and is unable to make network connection. Therefore, changing the country code to ensure successful network connection will be necessary for some clients.

Isolate 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands

The default setting is “Enable”. It means that the wireless client using 2.4GHz band is unable to connect to the wireless client with 5GHz band, and vice versa.

For WLAN 2.4GHz and 5GHz set with the same SSID name:

No matter such function is enabled or disabled, clients using WLAN 2.4GHz and 5GHz can communicate for each other if Isolate Member (in Wireless LAN>>General Setup) is NOT enabled for such SSID.

Yet, if the function of Isolate Member (in Wireless LAN>>General Setup) is enabled for such SSID, clients using WLAN 2.4GHz and 5GHz will be unable to communicate with each other.



IIIIII--11--88 SSttaattiioonn CCoonnttrrooll

Station Control is used to specify the duration for the wireless client to connect and reconnect Vigor router. If such function is not enabled, the wireless client can connect Vigor router until the router shuts down.

Such feature is especially useful for free Wi-Fi service. For example, a coffee shop offers free Wi-Fi service for its guests for one hour every day. Then, the connection time can be set as “1 hour” and reconnection time can be set as “1 day”. Thus, the guest can finish his job within one hour and will not occupy the wireless network for a long time.


Item Description

SSID Display the SSID that the wireless station will use it to connect with Vigor router.

Enable Check the box to enable the station control function.

Connection Time / Reconnection Time

Use the drop down list to choose the duration for the wireless client connecting /reconnecting to Vigor router. Or, type the duration manually when you choose User defined.

Display All Station Control List

All the wireless stations connecting to Vigor router by using such SSID will be listed on Station Control List.

Hotspot Web Portal Click it to access into Hotspot Web Portal page for modifying the settings if required.



IIIIII--11--99 BBaannddwwiiddtthh MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Bandwidth Management to make the bandwidth usage more efficient.


Item Description

SSID Display the specific SSID name.

Enable Check this box to enable the bandwidth management for clients.

Bandwidth Limit Type Auto Adjustment - Bandwidth limit is determined by the system automatically.

Per Station Limit – Bandwidth limit is determined according to the limitation of the wireless client.

Total Upload Limit It is available when Auto Adjustment is selected.

Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (uploading) for all of the wireless clients connecting to Vigor2765.

Total Download Limit It is available when Auto Adjustment is selected.

Type a value to define the maximum data clientstations connecting to Vigor2765.

Upload Limit It is available when Per Station Limit is selected.

Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (uploading) for each wireless client connecting to Vigor2765.

Download Limit It is available when Per Station Limit is selected

Type a value to define the maximum data traffic (downloading) for each wireless client connecting to Vigor2765.

After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings


IIIIII--11--1100 AAPP DDiissccoovveerryy

Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5 seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor.

This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which is in the same channel of this router can be found. Please click Scan to discover all the connected APs.


Item Description

Scan It is used to discover all the connected AP. The results will be shown on the box above this button.

Statistics It displays the statistics for the channels used by APs.


IIIIII--11--1111 AAiirrttiimmee FFaaiirrnneessss

Airtime fairness is essential in wireless networks that must support critical enterprise applications.

Most of the applications are either symmetric or require more downlink than uplink capacity; telephony and email send the same amount of data in each direction, while video streaming and web surfing involve more traffic sent from access points to clients than the other way around. This is essential for ensuring predictable performance and quality-of-service, as well as allowing 802.11n and legacy clients to coexist on the same network. Without airtime fairness, offices using mixed mode networks risk having legacy clients slow down the entire network or letting the fastest client(s) crowd out other users.

With airtime fairness, every client at a given quality-of-service level has equal access to the network's airtime.

The wireless channel can be accessed by only one wireless station at the same time.

The principle behind the IEEE802.11 channel access mechanisms is that each station has equal probability to access the channel. When wireless stations have similar data rate, this principle leads to a fair result. In this case, stations get similar channel access time which is called airtime.

However, when stations have various data rate (e.g., 11g, 11n), the result is not fair. The slow stations (11g) work in their slow data rate and occupy too much airtime, whereas the fast stations (11n) become much slower.

Take the following figure as an example, both Station A(11g) and Station B(11n) transmit data packets through Vigor router. Although they have equal probability to access the wireless channel, Station B(11n) gets only a little airtime and waits too much because Station A(11g) spends longer time to send one packet. In other words, Station B(fast rate) is obstructed by Station A(slow rate).

To improve this problem, Airtime Fairness is added for Vigor router. Airtime Fairness function tries to assign similar airtime to each station (A/B) by controlling TX traffic. In the following figure, Station B(11n) has higher probability to send data packets than Station A(11g). By this way, Station B(fast rate) gets fair airtime and it's speed is not limited by Station A(slow rate).


It is similar to automatic Bandwidth Limit. The dynamic bandwidth limit of each station depends on instant active station number and airtime assignment. Please note that Airtime Fairness of 2.4GHz and 5GHz are independent. But stations of different SSIDs function together, because they all use the same wireless channel. IN SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENTS, this function can reduce the bad influence of slow wireless devices and improve the overall wireless performance.

Suitable environment:

(1) Many wireless stations.

(2) All stations mainly use download traffic.

(3) The performance bottleneck is wireless connection.


Item Description

Enable Airtime Fairness Try to assign similar airtime to each wireless station by controlling TX traffic.

Airtime Fairness – Click the link to display the following screen of airtime fairness note.

Triggering Client Number –Airtime Fairness function is applied only when active station number achieves this number.

After finishing this web page configuration, please click OK to save the settings.

Info

Airtime Fairness function and Bandwidth Limit function should be mutually exclusive. So their webs have extra actions to ensure these two functions are not enabled simultaneously.


IIIIII--11--1122 BBaanndd SStteeeerriinngg

Band Steering detects if the wireless clients are capable of 5GHz operation, and steers them to that frequency. It helps to leave 2.4GHz band available for legacy clients, and improves users experience by reducing channel utilization.

If dual-band is detected, the AP will let the wireless client connect to less congested wireless LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion.

Info

To make Band Steering work successfully, SSID and security on 2.4GHz also MUST be broadcasted on 5GHz.


Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Band Steering to get the following web page:


Item Description

Enable Band Steering If it is enabled, Vigor router will detect if the wireless client is capable of dual-band or not within the time limit.

Check Time…. – If the wireless station does not have the capability of 5GHz network connection, the system shall wait and check for several seconds (15 seconds, in default) to make the 2.4GHz network connection. Specify the time limit for Vigor router to detect the wireless client.


Below shows how Band Steering works.


How to Use Band Steering?

1. Open Wireless LAN(2.4GHz)>>Band Steering.

2. Check the box of Enable Band Steering and use the default value (15) for check time setting.

3. Click OK to save the settings.

4. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>General Setup and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>> General Setup. Configure SSID as DrayTek2762_BandSteering for both pages. Click OK to save the settings.

Same value for 2.4GHz and 5GHz


5. Open Wireless LAN (2.4GHz)>>Security and Wireless LAN (5GHz)>>Security. Configure Security as 12345678 for both pages. Click OK to save the settings.

6. Now, Vigor router will let the wireless clients connect to less congested wireless LAN, such as 5GHz to prevent from network congestion.

Same value for 2.4GHz and 5GHz


IIIIII--11--1133 RRooaammiinngg

The network signal for a single wireless access point might be limited by its coverage range. Therefore, if you want to expand the wireless network in a large exhibition with a quick method, you can install multiple access points with enabling the Roaming feature for each AP to reach the purpose of expanding wireless signals seamlessly.

These access points connecting for each other shall be verified by pre-authentication. This page allows you to enable the roaming feature and the pre-authentication.


Item Description

Disable RSSI Requirement When the link rate of wireless station is too low or the signal received by the wireless station is too worse, Vigor router will automatically detect (based on the link rate and RSSI requirement) and cut off the network connection for that wireless station to assist it to connect another Wireless AP to get better signal.

This option is to disable the roaming mechanism.

Strictly Minimum RSSI Vigor router uses RSSI (received signal strength indicator) to decide to terminate the network connection of wireless station. When the signal strength is below the value (dBm) set here, Vigor router will terminate the network connection for that wireless station.

Minimum RSSI Minimum RSSI - When the signal strength of the wireless station is below the value (dBm) set here and adjacent AP (must be DrayTek AP and support such feature too) with higher signal strength value (defined in the field of With Adjacent AP RSSI over) is detected by Vigor router, Vigor router will terminate the network connection for that wireless station. Later, the wireless station can connect to the adjacent AP (with better RSSI).

With Adjacent AP RSSI over – Specify a value as a threshold.



IIIIII--11--1144 SSttaattiioonn LLiisstt

Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status code. There is a code summary below for explanation. For convenient Access Control, you can select a WLAN station and click Add to Access Control below.


Item Description

Refresh Click this button to refresh the status of station list.

Add Click this button to add current entered MAC address into Access Control.


PPaarrtt IIVV VVPPNN

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link.

It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard Web browser.

A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard X.509.


IIVV--11 VVPPNN aanndd RReemmoottee AAcccceessss

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link.

The VPN built is suitable for:

Communication between home office and customer

Secure connection between Teleworker, staff on business trip and main office

Exchange data between remote office and main office

POS between chain store and headquarters

SSiittee--ttoo--SSiittee ((LLAANN--ttoo--LLAANN))

A connection between two router's LAN networks.

Allows employees in branch offices and head office to share the same network resources.

RReemmoottee AAcccceessss ((RReemmoottee DDiiaall--iinn))

A connection between the remote host and router's LAN network. The host will use an IP address in the local subnet.

Allows employees to access the company's internal resources when they are traveling.



IIVV--11--11 VVPPNN CClliieenntt WWiizzaarrdd

Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN client. Such wizard will guide to set the LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial out connection (from server to client) step by step.

1. Open Wizards>>VPN Client Wizard. The following page will appear.


Item Description

Please choose a LAN-to-LAN Profile

There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set.


2. When you finish the mode and profile selection, please click Next to open the following page.

Item Description

LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection

Choose the client mode.

Route Mode/NAT Mode – If the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT mode, otherwise please choose Route Mode.

Select VPN Type Select suitable VPN type for the VPN client profile. There are several types provided here. Different type will lead to different configuration page.

After making the choices for the client profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection(s) you made.

Info

The following descriptions for VPN Type are based on the Route Mode specified in LAN-to-LAN Client Mode Selection.


When you choose PPTP (None Encryption) or PPTP (Encryption), you will see the following graphic:

When you choose IPsec, you will see the following graphic:


When you choose L2TP, you will see the following graphic:

When you choose L2TP over IPsec (Nice to Have) or L2TP over IPsec (Must), you will see the following graphic:

When you choose SSL, you will see the following graphic:



Item Description

Profile Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters.

VPN Dial-Out Through Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.

WAN1 First/ WAN2 First /WAN3 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN3 Only - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the only channel for VPN connection.

WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN connection.


Always On Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.

Server IP/Host Name for VPN

Type the IP address of the server or type the host name for such VPN profile.

Server Port (for SSL Tunnel)

Type a port number for SSL tunnel.

IKE Authentication Method

IKE Authentication Method usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node (LAN to LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and IPsec tunnel.

Pre-Shared Key- Specify a key for IKE authentication.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key-Confirm the pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509)

Click Digital Signature to invoke this function.

Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down list.

Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject


Name First.

Local Certificate – Use the drop down list to choose one of the certificates for using. You have to configure one certificate at least previously in Certificate Management >> Local Certificate. Otherwise, the setting you choose here will not be effective.

IPsec Security Method Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

High - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

Username This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.

The length of the user name is limited to 11 characters.

Password This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.

The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.

Remote Network IP Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

Remote Network Mask

Please type the network mask (according to the real location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

Local Network IP Please type the local network IP for TCP / IP configuration.

Local Network Mask Please type the local network mask for TCP / IP configuration.

3. After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on the page and click Finish to execute the next action.



Item Description

Go to the VPN Connection Management

Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN Connection status.

Do another VPN Server Wizard Setup

Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard.

View more detailed configuration

Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.


IIVV--11--22 VVPPNN SSeerrvveerr WWiizzaarrdd

Such wizard is used to configure VPN settings for VPN server. Such wizard will guide to set the LAN-to-LAN profile for VPN dial in connection (from client to server) step by step.

1. Open Wizards>>VPN Server Wizard. The following page will appear.


Item Description

VPN Server Mode Selection

Choose the direction for the VPN server.

Site to Site VPN – To set a LAN-to-LAN profile automatically, please choose Site to Site VPN.

Remote Dial-in User –You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection.

Please choose a LAN-to-LAN Profile

This item is available when you choose Site to Site VPN (LAN-to-LAN) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN profiles for users to set.

Please choose a Dial-in User Accounts

This item is available when you choose Remote Dial-in User (Teleworker) as VPN server mode. There are 32 VPN tunnels for users to set.

Allowed Dial-in Type This item is available after you choose any one of dial-in user account profiles. Next, you have to select suitable dial-in type for the VPN server profile. There are several types provided here (similar to VPN Client Wizard).


Different Dial-in Type will lead to different configuration page. In addition, adjustable items for each dial-in type will be changed according to the VPN Server Mode (Site to Site VPN and Remote Dial-in User) selected.

2. After making the choices for the server profile, please click Next. You will see different configurations based on the selection you made. Here we take the examples of choosing Site-to-Site VPN as the VPN Server Mode.

When you check PPTP/SSL, you will see the following graphic:


When you check PPTP & IPsec & L2TP (three types) or PPTP & IPsec (two types) or L2TP with Policy (Nice to Have/Must), you will see the following graphic:


Item Description

Profile Name Enter a name of this profile. The length of the file is limited to 10 characters.

User Name This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.

The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.

Password This field is used to authenticate for connection when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.


Pre-Shared Key For IPsec/L2TP IPsec authentication, you have to type a pre-shared key.


Confirm Pre-Shared Key

Type the pre-shared key again for confirmation.

Digital Signature (X.509)

Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function.

Peer ID – Choose the peer ID selection from the drop down list.

Local ID – Choose Alternative Subject Name First or Subject Name First.

Peer IP/VPN Client IP Type the WAN IP address or VPN client IP address for the remote client.

Peer ID Type the ID name for the remote client.


Remote Network IP Please type one LAN IP address (according to the real


location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

Remote Network Mask

Please type the network mask (according to the real location of the remote host) for building VPN connection.

Local Network IP Please type the local network IP for TCP / IP configuration.

Local Network Mask Please type the local network mask for TCP / IP configuration.

3. After finishing the configuration, please click Next. The confirmation page will be shown as follows. If there is no problem, you can click one of the radio buttons listed on the page and click Finish to execute the next action.


Item Description

Go to the VPN Connection Management

Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management for viewing VPN Connection status.

Do another VPN Server Wizard Setup

Click this radio button to set another profile of VPN Server through VPN Server Wizard.

View more detailed

configuration

Click this radio button to access VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN for viewing detailed configuration.


IIVV--11--33 RReemmoottee AAcccceessss CCoonnttrrooll

Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port.



IIVV--11--44 PPPPPP GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec.


Item Description

Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol.

PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users with the CHAP protocol first. If the dial-in user does not support this protocol, it will fall back to use the PAP protocol for authentication.

Dial-In PPP Encryption (MPPE)

Optional MPPE - This option represents that the MPPE encryption method will be optionally employed in the router for the remote dial-in user. If the remote dial-in user does not support the MPPE encryption algorithm, the router will transmit “no MPPE encrypted packets”. Otherwise, the MPPE encryption scheme will be used to encrypt the data.

Require MPPE (40/128bits) - Selecting this option will force the router to encrypt packets by using the MPPE encryption algorithm. In addition, the remote dial-in user will use 40-bit to perform encryption prior to using 128-bit for encryption. In other words, if 128-bit MPPE encryption method is not available, then 40-bit encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data.

Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data.

Mutual Authentication (PAP)

The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to communicate with other routers or clients who need bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable this function when your peer router requires mutual authentication. You should further specify the User Name and Password of the mutual authentication peer.


The length of the name/password is limited to 23/19 characters.

IP Address Assignment for Dial-In Users...

Enter a start IP address for the dial-in PPP connection for LAN1.

LAN2 will be available if it is enabled. Refer to LAN>>General Setup for enabling the LAN interface.

PPP Authentication Methods

Select the method(s) to be used for authentication in PPP connection.

While using Radius Authentication

If PPP connection will be authenticated via RADIUS server, it is necessary to specify the LAN profile for the dial-in user to get IP from.


IIVV--11--55 IIPPsseecc GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration.

There are two phases of IPsec.

Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509). The peer that starts the negotiation proposes all its policies to the remote peer and then remote peer tries to find a highest-priority match with its policies. Eventually to set up a secure tunnel for IKE Phase 2.

Phase 2: negotiation IPsec security methods including Authentication Header (AH) or Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for the following IKE exchange and mutual examination of the secure tunnel establishment.

There are two encapsulation methods used in IPsec, Transport and Tunnel. The Transport mode will add the AH/ESP payload and use original IP header to encapsulate the data payload only. It can just apply to local packet, e.g., L2TP over IPsec. The Tunnel mode will not only add the AH/ESP payload but also use a new IP header (Tunneled IP header) to encapsulate the whole original IP packet.

Authentication Header (AH) provides data authentication and integrity for IP packets passed between VPN peers. This is achieved by a keyed one-way hash function to the packet to create a message digest. This digest will be put in the AH and transmitted along with packets. On the receiving side, the peer will perform the same one-way hash on the packet and compare the value with the one in the AH it receives.

Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) is a security protocol that provides data confidentiality and protection with optional authentication and replay detection service.



Item Description


This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node (LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from remote dial-in user, XAuth and Pre-Shared Key.

Certificate -

Preferred Local ID -

General Pre-Shared Key - Define the PSK key for general authentication.

Confirm General Pre-Shared Key- Re-enter the characters to confirm the pre-shared key.

XAuth User Pre-Shared Key - Define the PSK key for IPsec XAuth authentication.

Confirm XAuth User Pre-Shared Key- Re-enter the characters to confirm the pre-shared key for IPsec XAuth.

Note: Any packets from the remote dial-in user which does not match the rule defined in VPN and Remote Access>>Remote Dial-In User will be applied with the method specified here.

IPsec Security Method Basic -

Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

High (ESP) - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

AH -



IIVV--11--66 IIPPsseecc PPeeeerr IIddeennttiittyy

To use digital certificate for peer authentication in either LAN-to-LAN connection or Remote User Dial-In connection, here you may edit a table of peer certificate for selection. As shown below, the router provides 32 entries of digital certificates for peer dial-in users.


Item Description

Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of IPsec Peer Identity.

Enable Check this box to enable this profile.

Name Display the profile name of that index.

Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.



Item Description

Enable this account Check it to enable such account profile.

Profile Name Type the name of the profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 32 characters.

Accept Any Peer ID Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity.

Accept Subject Alternative Name

Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address, Domain, or E-mail Address. The box under the Type will appear according to the type you select and ask you to fill in corresponding setting.

Accept Subject Name Click to check the specific fields of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field includes Country (C), State (ST), Location (L), Organization (O), Organization Unit (OU), Common Name (CN), and Email (E).



IIVV--11--77 OOppeennVVPPNN

OpenVPN offers a convenient way for users to build VPN between local end and remote end.

With integrating of OpenVPN, Vigor router can help users to achieve more robust, reliable and secure private connections for business needs.

There are two advantages of OpenVPN:

It can be operated on different systems such as Windows, Linux, and MacOS.

Based on the standard protocol of SSL encryption, OpenVPN can provide you with a scalable client/server mode, permitting multi-client to connect to a single OpenVPN Server process over a single TCP or UDP port.

IIVV--11--77--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

Before establishing OpenVPN connection, general settings for OpenVPN service shall be configured first.


Item Description

Enable UDP Check the box to enable UDP port setting for OpenVPN.

UDP Port – Enter a number.

Enable TCP Check the box to enable TCP port setting for OpenVPN.

TCP Port – Enter a number.


Cipher Algorithm Two encryptions are supported, AES128 and AES256.

HMAC Algorithm The HMAC algorithm only supports SHA1/SHA256.

Certificate Authentication If certificate authentication is required for OpenVPN, simply check the box to apply the trusted CA certificate and local certificate for OpenVPN tunnel.

Certificate authentication can offer more secure VPN tunnel between the client and the router.

Certificate Source Router generated certificates - Click it to get a certificate from Vigor router.

Uploading certificates to Router - Click it to upload a certificate onto Vigor router.

Trust CA - Use the drop down list to specify a trusted CA certificate.

Server Certificate - Use the drop down list to specify a server certificate (e.g., DrayDDNS).


IIVV--11--77--22 CClliieenntt CCoonnffiigg The settings on this page can be downloaded as a file. Later, such file can be imported and applied to remote end’s CPE (as VPN client). Then, a private connection via OpenVPN tunnel between the server and the client can be connected successfully.


Item Description


Remote Server Click IP and use the drop down list to specify an IP address of WAN for VPN connection. Or click Domain to enter a domain name for the remote server.

Transport Protocol Simply choose UDP or TCP as protocol for building OpenVPN connection between the server and the remote client.

Fine Name Enter a name for the configuration file.

CA cert Enter the certificate authority (CA) file name obtained from 3rd party provider

Client cert Each client in an OpenVPN connection must have its certificate and private key.

Enter the certificate file name obtained from 3rd party provider

Client key Enter the private key file name obtained from 3rd party provider

Export The settings in this page can be saved as a file after clicking such button. Later, the downloaded file can be imported to the VPN client for building OpenVPN connection.

IIVV--11--88 RReemmoottee DDiiaall--iinn UUsseerr

You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.

The router provides 32 access accounts for dial-in users. Besides, you can extend the user accounts to the RADIUS server through the built-in RADIUS client function. The following figure shows the summary table.



Item Description

Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of Remote Dial-in User.


User Display the username for the specific dial-in user of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty.

Status Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be active and inactive, respectively.

Backup setting to file Click the button to backup the remote dial-in user settings on this page as a file.

Restore From File Click the button to restore the remote dial-in user settings from the selected configuration file.

Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.



Item Description

User account and Authentication

Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.

Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.

Allowed Dial-In Type PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.

IPsec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.

IPsec XAuth – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPsec VPN connection through Internet via IPsec XAuth Pre-shared Key and the username/password authentication.

L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.


Must -Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

SSL Tunnel – Allow the remote dial-in user to make an SSL VPN connection through Internet.

OpenVPN Tunnel – Allow the remote dial-in user to set a VPN connection through OpenVPN.

Specify Remote Node -You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE aggressive mode).

Uncheck the checkbox means the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings.

Netbios Naming Packet -

Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.

Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.

Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast packets via VPN connection.

Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass through the router.

Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let multicast packets be blocked by the router.

Username - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 23 characters.

Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the password is limited to 19 characters.

Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box to make the authentication with mOTP function.

PIN Code – Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).

Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).

Subnet Chose one of the subnet selections for such VPN profile.

Assign Static IP Address – Please type a static IP address for the subnet you specified.


This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or without specifying the IP address of the remote node.

Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.

IPsec Security Method This group of fields is a must for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.


Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.

High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

Local ID (Optional)- Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.



IIVV--11--99 LLAANN ttoo LLAANN

Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles. You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out), connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.


Item Description

Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of LAN to LAN profile.


Name Indicate the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty.

Remote Network Display the IP address/subnet mask of the remote network.

Status Indicate the status of individual profiles. The symbol V and X represent the profile to be active and inactive, respectively.

To edit each profile:


1. Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each LAN-to-LAN profile includes 5 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanations will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.


Item Description

Common Settings Profile Name – Specify a name for the profile of the LAN-to-LAN connection.

Enable this profile - Check here to activate this profile.

Call Direction - Specify the allowed call direction of this LAN-to-LAN profile.

Both: initiator/responder

Dial-Out: initiator only

Dial-In: responder only.

Dial-Out Through - Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.

WAN1 First/ WAN2 First/ WAN3 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN1 Only /WAN2 Only/WAN3 Only/ - While connecting, the router will use WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 as the only channel for VPN connection.



Always On-Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.

Idle Timeout: The default value is 300 seconds. If the connection has been idled over the value, the router will


drop the connection.

Netbios Naming Packet

Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.

Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.


Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass through the router.

Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let multicast packets be blocked by the router.

Dial-Out Settings PPTP - Build a PPTP VPN connection to the server through the Internet. You should set the identity like User Name and Password below for the authentication of remote server.

IPsec Tunnel - Build an IPsec VPN connection to the server through Internet.

L2TP with IPsec Policy - Build a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

None: Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have: Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

Must: Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

SSL Tunnel - Build an SSL VPN connection to the server through Internet.

Server IP / Host Name - Enter the IP address of the server or the host name.

Dial-Out Schedule Profile - Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work.

Username - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 49 characters.


PPP Authentication - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above. PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 is the most common selection due to compatibility.

VJ compression - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression. Normally set to On to improve bandwidth utilization.

Request IP Address - Enter an IP address.



Item Description

Dial-In Settings Allowed VPN Type - Determine the dial-in connection with different types.

PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.

IPsec Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.

IPsec XAuth - Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPsec VPN connection after authenticated with the sever.

L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select from below:

None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

Must - Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.

SSL Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an SSL VPN connection through Internet.

Specify Remote VPN Gateway - You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box.


Also, you should further specify the corresponding security methods on the right side.

If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings.

Username - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.


PPP Advanced Settings - Click it to configure advanced settings.

VJ Compression - VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression. This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.

Assign Peer IP Address - Enter the IP address of the peer.

Allowed IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPsec tunnel either with or without specify the IP address of the remote node.

Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key.

X.509 Digital Signature – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.

Preferred Local ID – Specify which one will be inspected first.

Alternative Subject Name First – The alternative subject name (configured in Certificate Management>>Local Certificate) will be inspected first.

Subject Name First – The subject name (configured in Certificate Management>>Local Certificate) will be inspected first.

Allowed IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify the remote node.

AH/ESP-DES/ESP-3DES/ESP-AES - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

TCP/IP Network Settings

Local Network IP / Mask - Display the local network IP and mask for TCP / IP configuration. You can modify the settings if required.

Remote Network IP / Mask - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP Address/Remote


Network Mask through the VPN connection. For IPsec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick mode.

More Remote Subnet - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Masks through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.

Mode - If the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route.

For NAT,

Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to change the default route with this VPN tunnel.

RIP via VPN - The option specifies the direction of RIP (Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.

For Routing,

RIP via VPN - The option specifies the direction of RIP (Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.

Translate Local Network - This function is enabled in default.

When it is disabled, you can enable or disable Change Default route to this VPN tunnel.

Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to change the default route with this VPN tunnel.

When it is enabled, you have to specify type, local subnet, translated IP and more local subnet.


Type – There are two types for you to choose, Translate Whole Subnet and Translate Specific IP.

Local Subnet - Specify an Interface.

Translate IP - Enter an IP address.

More Local Subnet - Click the + button to display more subnet settings.

2. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.


IIVV--11--1100 CCoonnnneeccttiioonn MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool and clicking Dial button.


Item Description

Dial-out Tool Dial - Click this button to execute dial out function.



AA--11 HHooww ttoo BBuuiilldd aa LLAANN--ttoo--LLAANN VVPPNN BBeettwweeeenn VViiggoorr RRoouutteerrss vviiaa IIPPsseecc MMaaiinn

MMooddee This document introduces how to set up Main mode IPsec Tunnel between two Vigor Routers.IPsec VPN with Main mode use the IP address of VPN client as identifier, and the IP address must be set on VPN server; therefore, if the VPN client doesn't have a static IP, please use Aggressive mode instead.

VVPPNN SSeerrvveerr ((DDiiaall--IInn SSiittee)) SSeettuupp

1. Create a Dial-In profile for VPN user, go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN, click on an available index to add a new profile.

2. Set up the dial-in profile.


In Common Settings,

(a) Enter the Profile Name.

(b) Enable this profile.

(c) Set Call Direction to Dial-in.

In Dial-In Setting,

(d) Make sure Allowed Dial-in Type has IPsec Tunnel enabled.

(e) Enable Specify Remote VPN Gateway and enter Peer VPN Server IP as the public IP of VPN client router.

(f) Click on IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the Pre-shared Key.

(g) Select the IPsec Security Method that are allowed to use.

3. In TCP/IP Network Settings, enter VPN Client's LAN network in Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile.


VVPPNN CClliieenntt ((DDiiaall--oouutt SSiittee)) SSeettuupp

1. Create a Dial-out profile to VPN server: Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN, click on an available index to add a new profile.

2. Setup the dial-out profile.

In Common Settings,

(a) Enter a Profile Name.


(c) Set Call Direction to Dial-Out.

In Dial-out Setting,


(h) Select IPsec Tunnel for Type of Sever I am Calling.

(i) Enter VPN Server's WAN IP or domain name in Sever IP/Host Name for VPN.

(j) Click IKE Pre-Shared Key and enter the same Pre-Shared key as VPN Server.

(k) Click on Advanced in IPsec Security Method.

In IKE advanced settings,

(l) Select Main Mode for IKE phase 1 mode.

(m) Make sure phase 1 and phase 2 proposal are using the security methods which are accepted by VPN server.

(n) Click OK to save.

3. In TCP/IP Network Settings, enter VPN Server's LAN Network in Remote Network IP and Remote Network Mask. Click OK to save the profile.


VVPPNN TTuunnnneell EEssttaabblliisshhmmeenntt

To initiate the VPN connection, go to VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management on VPN Client, select the profile to VPN Sever and click Dial.

If all the settings are matched, the VPN will be established, and the statistics will be displayed on the same page.


IIVV--22 SSSSLL VVPPNN

SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that encrypts traffic using SSL, which is the same technology used on secured websites. Because of SSL’s prominence as an encryption protocol on the Internet, most networks have few restrictions on SSL traffic, and as a result SSL VPN is more likely to work when other VPN technologies experience difficulties due to obstacles such as firewalls and Network Address Translation (NAT).

In short,

It is not necessary for users to preinstall VPN client software for executing SSL VPN connection.

There are less restrictions for the data encrypted through SSL VPN in comparing with traditional VPN.



IIVV--22--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

The general settings of the SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel are entered on this page.


Item Description

Bind to WAN Select the WAN interfaces to accept inbound SSL VPN connections.

Port The port to be used for SSL VPN server. This is separate from the management port which is configured in System Maintenance>>Management. The default setting is 443.

Server Certificate When the client does not set any certificate, default certificate will be used for HTTPS and SSL VPN server.

Specify the certificate to be used for SSL connections. Select a certificate from imported or generated certificates on the router, or choose Self-signed to use the router’s built-in default certificate. The selected certificate can be used in SSL VPN server and HTTPS Web Proxy.



IIVV--22--22 UUsseerr AAccccoouunntt

With SSL VPN, Vigor2765 Series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel mode or proxy mode. Now, Vigor2765 Series allows up to 16 simultaneous incoming users.

SSL VPN authentication and permissions management are implemented through user accounts. SSL VPN user accounts are shared with the remote dial-in user accounts used by other VPN protocols such as PPTP and L2TP, and hence SSL VPN’s User Account setup page SSL VPN >> User Account is identical to VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in user.


Click each index to edit one remote user profile.


Item Description

User account and Authentication

Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.

Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.

User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name/password is limited to 23 characters.

Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the name/password is limited to 19 characters.

Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box to make the authentication with mOTP function.

PIN Code – Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).

Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).

Allowed Dial-In Type Select the VPN protocols that this user is allowed to use.

PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish VPN connections with the PPTP protocol. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.


Item Description

IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish IPsec tunnels.

IPsec XAuth - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish an IPSec VPN connection through XAuth server in Internet.

L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish L2TP VPN connections. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select one of the following options:

None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. L2TP connections are not encrypted.

Nice to Have - Attempt to establish an IPsec secure channel first, before starting an L2TP session. If an IPsec secure channel cannot be established with the remote client, fall back to an L2TP connection without encryption.

Must - Require that an IPsec secure channel be established before starting an L2TP connection. Disconnect if an IPsec secure channel cannot be established.

SSL Tunnel - Select to allow the remote dial-in user to initiate SSL VPN tunnels.

OpenVPN Tunnel - Select to allow the remote dial-in user to initiate OpenVPN tunnels.

Specify Remote Node - Select this option to specify the remote IP address, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE aggressive mode) used to authenticate the remote dial-in user. If this option is not selected, the authentication and security methods specified in the general settings will be used instead.

Netbios Naming Packet

Pass – Select this to allow Netbios name inquiries between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel.

Block – Select this to block Netbios name inquiries between remote and local hosts.


Pass –Select this to allow multicast packets to pass through VPN connections.

Block –Select this to block multicast packets from passing through the VPN connections. This is the default setting.

Subnet Select a subnet for this VPN profile.

Assign Static IP Address –If you would like to assign a static IP address to this user, enter it here.


All fields in this section, except for Digital Signature (X.509), are applicable to IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node (Remote Client IP in Specify Remote Node above).

Digital Signature (X.509) can be used with IPSec tunnels regardless of the IP address of the remote node is specified or not.

Pre-Shared Key - Select this checkbox to enable Pre-shared Key function and enter a string of up to 63 characters as the pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509) – Select this checkbox to enable


Item Description

X.509 Digital Signature and choose a predefined profile that has been set in VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec Peer Identity.

IPSec Security Method When the remote node is specified, all fields in this section are required for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with IPsec Policy. Select any combination of Medium, DES, 3DES and AES security methods as desired.

Medium-Authentication Header (AH) - Data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is enabled. You can uncheck it to disable it.

High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) - Payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

Local ID - Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.



IIVV--22--33 SSSSLL PPoorrttaall OOnnlliinnee UUsseerr

If you have finished the configuration of SSL Web Proxy (server), users can find out corresponding settings when they access into DrayTek SSL VPN portal interface.

Next, users can open SSL VPN>> SSL Portal Online User to view logging status of SSL VPN.


Item Description

Active User Display current user who visits SSL VPN server.

Host IP Display the IP address for the host.

Time out Display the time remaining for logging out.

Action You can click Drop to drop certain login user from the router's SSL Portal UI.

Refresh Seconds Sets the time interval at which this screen will be refreshed.

Click Refresh to force the screen to refresh immediately.



AA--11 VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr ttoo VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr –– SSSSLL VVPPNN This document introduces how to establish SSL VPN tunnel between two Vigor Routers.

VVPPNN SSeerrvveerr ((DDiiaall--iinn SSiittee)) SSeettuupp

1. Create a LAN-to-LAN VPN Profile. Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN, click on a profile index to add/edit a profile.

2. Edit the profile as the following figures.

(a) Enter Profile Name.


(c) Set Call Direction as “Dial-in”.


(d) Make sure Allow Dial-in Type has “SSL Tunnel” enabled.

(e) Enter Username and Password.

(f) For Remote Network IP/Mask, enter VPN client's LAN IP and subnet mask.

(g) Click OK to save the profile.

3. Go to VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Access Control to make sure the SSL VPN Service has enabled.

VVPPNN CClliieenntt ((DDiiaall--oouutt SSiittee)) SSeettuupp 4. Create a LAN-to-LAN profile. Go to VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN, click on an

available index number.


5. Edit the VPN profile as the following figures.



(c) Set Call Direction to “Dial-out”.

(d) Set Type of Server I am calling to SSL Tunnel.

(e) Enter Username and Password as the same set in VPN Client in Step 2.

(f) Enter VPN Server's WAN IP in Server IP/Host Name.

(g) Enter Remote Network IP/Mask as VPN Server's LAN settings (Note that this has to be the same as Local Network IP/Mask setting in Step 2).

(h) Click OK to save.


EEssttaabblliisshhiinngg tthhee VVPPNN TTuunnnneell 6. To dial the VPN, on VPN Client, go to VPN and Remote Access >> Connection

Management, select the profile created previously and click on “Dial”.

7. If all the credentials are Network administrator may check the VPN that is established and its Up Time from VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management page.


IIVV--33 CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard X.509.

Any entity wants to utilize digital certificates should first request a certificate issued by a CA server. It should also retrieve certificates of other trusted CA servers so it can authenticate the peer with certificates issued by those trusted CA servers.

Here you can manage generate and manage the local digital certificates, and set trusted CA certificates. Remember to adjust the time of Vigor router before using the certificate so that you can get the correct valid period of certificate.



IIVV--33--11 LLooccaall CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee


Item Description

Generate Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request window.

Type in all the information that the window requests. Then click Generate again.

Import Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information.

Refresh Click this button to refresh the information listed below.

View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.

Delete Click this button to delete selected name with certification information.

GGEENNEERRAATTEE

Click this button to open Generate Certificate Signing Request window. Type in all the information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE again.


Info

Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with rotuer’s WAN IP or domain name.

After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below:

IIMMPPOORRTT

Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party, you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a private key.


Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. There are three types of local certificate supported by Vigor router.


Item Description

Upload Local Certificate It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by Vigor router and signed by CA server.

If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of the certificate will be shown as “OK”.

Upload PKCS12 Certificate

It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually need passwords.

Note: PKCS12 is a standard for storing private keys and certificates securely. It is used in (among other things) Netscape and Microsoft Internet Explorer with their import and export options.

Upload Certificate and It is useful when users have separated certificates and private


Private Key keys. And the password is needed if the private key is encrypted.

RREEFFRREESSHH

Click this button to refresh the information listed below.

VViieeww

Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.

Info

You have to copy the certificate request information from above window. Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be issued to you by the CA server. You can save it.

DDeelleettee

Click this button to remove the selected certificate.


IIVV--33--22 TTrruusstteedd CCAA CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee

Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a RootCA certificate if required.

When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g., IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates offered by both ends.

However, the procedure of applying digital certificate from a trusted root certificate authority is complicated and time-consuming. Therefore, Vigor router offers a mechanism which allows you to generate root CA to save time and provide convenience for general user. Later, such root CA generated by DrayTek server can perform the issuing of local certificate.

Info

Root CA can be deleted but not edited. If you want to modify the settings for a Root CA, please delete the one and create another one by clicking Create Root CA.


CCrreeaattiinngg aa RRoooottCCAA

Click Create to open the following page. Type in all the information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE again.

IImmppoorrttiinngg aa TTrruusstteedd CCAA

To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window.

For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all the certificate information.


IIVV--33--33 CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee BBaacckkuupp

Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file. Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password and Confirm password.

Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.


IIVV--33--44 SSeellff--SSiiggnneedd CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee

A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is signed with its own private key.

The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be created for free by using a wide variety of tools.


PPaarrtt VV SSeeccuurriittyy

While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet.

CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.


VV--11 FFiirreewwaallll

While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.

FFiirreewwaallll FFaacciilliittiieess

The users on the LAN are provided with secured protection by the following firewall facilities:

User-configurable IP filter (Call Filter/ Data Filter).

Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI): tracks packets and denies unsolicited incoming data

Selectable Denial of Service (DoS) /Distributed DoS (DDoS) attacks protection

IIPP FFiilltteerrss

Depending on whether there is an existing Internet connection, or in other words “the WAN link status is up or down”, the IP filter architecture categorizes traffic into two: Call Filter and Data Filter.

Call Filter - When there is no existing Internet connection, Call Filter is applied to all traffic, all of which should be outgoing. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal, the packet will pass. Then the router shall “initiate a call” to build the Internet connection and send the packet to Internet.

Data Filter - When there is an existing Internet connection, Data Filter is applied to incoming and outgoing traffic. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal, the packet will pass the router.

The following illustrations are flow charts explaining how router will treat incoming traffic and outgoing traffic respectively.


SSttaatteeffuull PPaacckkeett IInnssppeeccttiioonn ((SSPPII))

Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header, stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.

DDeenniiaall ooff SSeerrvviiccee ((DDooSS)) DDeeffeennssee

The DoS Defense functionality helps you to detect and mitigate the DoS attack. The attacks are usually categorized into two types, the flooding-type attacks and the vulnerability attacks. The flooding-type attacks will attempt to exhaust all your system's resource while the vulnerability attacks will try to paralyze the system by offending the vulnerabilities of the protocol or operation system.

The DoS Defense function enables the Vigor router to inspect every incoming packet based on the attack signature database. Any malicious packet that might duplicate itself to paralyze the host in the secure LAN will be strictly blocked and a Syslog message will be sent as warning, if you set up Syslog server.

Also the Vigor router monitors the traffic. Any abnormal traffic flow violating the pre-defined parameter, such as the number of thresholds, is identified as an attack and the Vigor router will activate its defense mechanism to mitigate in a real-time manner.

The below shows the attack types that DoS/DDoS defense function can detect:

1. SYN flood attack 2. UDP flood attack 3. ICMP flood attack 4. Port Scan attack 5. IP options 6. Land attack 7. Smurf attack 8. Trace route

9. SYN fragment 10. Fraggle attack 11. TCP flag scan 12. Tear drop attack 13. Ping of Death attack 14. ICMP fragment 15. Unassigned Numbers



Below shows the menu items for Firewall.

VV--11--11 GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp

General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept incoming fragmented UDP packets.

Click Firewall and click General Setup to open the general setup page.

GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp PPaaggee

Such page allows you to enable / disable Call Filter and Data Filter, determine general rule for filtering the incoming and outgoing data.



Item Description

Call Filter Check Enable to activate the Call Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Call Filter.

Data Filter Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Data Filter.

Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…

Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable “Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”. By checking this box, you can play these kinds of on-line games. If security concern is in higher priority, you cannot enable “Always pass inbound fragmented large packets…”.

Enable Strict Security Firewall

For the sake of security, the router will execute strict security checking for data transmission.

Such feature is enabled in default. All the packets, while transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by firewall. If the firewall system (e.g., content filter server) does not make any response (pass or block) for these packets, then the router’s firewall will block the packets directly.

Block routing packet from WAN

Usually, IPv6 network sessions/traffic from WAN to LAN will be accepted by IPv6 firewall in default.

IPv6 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on LAN, check the box to make the packets (routed from WAN to LAN) via IPv6 being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by NAT.

IPv4 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on LAN, check the box to make the incoming packets via IPv4 being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by NAT.

Backup Firewall Click Backup to save the firewall configuration.

Restore Firewall Click Select to choose a firewall configuration file. Then click Restore to apply the file.


DDeeffaauulltt RRuullee PPaaggee

Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF, APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router.


Item Description

Filter Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with the filter rules.

Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The default setting is 60000.

Quality of Service Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule. For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the related section later.

APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.


URL Content Filter Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

DNS Filter Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or click the DNS Filter link in this page to create a new profile.

Advance Setting Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is strongly recommended to use the default settings here.

Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.

If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage, please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the dialog box.


Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol (0~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper.

Session timeout – Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources.



VV--11--22 FFiilltteerr SSeettuupp

Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page.

To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit each rule. Check Active to enable the filter rule.


Item Description

Rule Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page. For the detailed information, refer to the following page.

Active Enable or disable the filter rule.

Comment Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 23–character long.

Direction Display the direction of packet flow

Src IP Dst IP Display the source IP address and destination IP address of the rule.


Service Type Display the protocol setting with source port and destination port value.

Action Display the action taken when packets match the rule.

CSM Display the CSM profile name used by such rule.

Move Up/Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules.

Next Filter Set Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets.

Wizard Mode Allow to configure frequently used settings of filter rule via three setting pages

Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of filter rule in one page.

To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:

1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.

2. Click one of the indexe number linke (e.g., Index 2) to access into the following page.


Item Description

Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 14- character long.

Direction Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only. For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.

Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other LAN.

Source/Destination IP To set the IP address manually, please choose Any Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as


the Address Type and type them in this dialog.

Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.

Source Port / Destination Port

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.

(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and last values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.

(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.

(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this profile.

3. Click Next to get the following page.

4. After configuring the above settings, click Next to get the summary page for reference.

5. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.


To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:

1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.

2. Click one of the indexe number linke (e.g., Index 2) to access into the following page.


Item Description

Enable Check this box to enable the filter rule.

Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 14- character long.

Schedule Profile Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the function will always work.

Clear sessions when schedule ON

Check this box to clear the sessions when the above schedule profiles are applied.

Direction Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only. For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.

Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other LAN.

Source IP/ Country or Destination IP /

Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the source/destination IP or IP ranges.


Country

To set the IP address manually, please choose Any Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address/Group and Objects as the Address Type and type them in this dialog. For example, if you want to use the IP range from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Address Type.

From the IP Group drop down list, choose the one that you want to apply. Or use the IP Object drop down list to choose the object that you want.

Service Type Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose a suitable service type.

To set the service type manually, please choose User defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the service type from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Service Type.


Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.

Source/Destination Port –

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.




Service Group/Object - Use the drop down list to choose the one that you want.

Fragments Specify the action for fragmented packets. And it is used for Data Filter only.

Don’t care -No action will be taken towards fragmented packets.

Unfragmented -Apply the rule to unfragmented packets.

Fragmented - Apply the rule to fragmented packets.

Too Short - Apply the rule only to packets that are too short to contain a complete header.

Filter Specifies the action to be taken when packets match the rule.

Block Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be dropped immediately.

Pass Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be passed immediately.

Block If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be dropped.

Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be passed through.

Branch to other Filter Set

If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will not return to previous filter rule any more.

Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets that do not match the filter rule configured in this page. The default setting is 60000.

MAC Bind IP Strict –Make the MAC address and IP address settings configured in IP Object for Source IP and Destination IP are bound for applying such filter rule.

No-Strict - no limitation.

Quality of Service Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.


For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the related section later.

APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

URL Content Filter Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

DNS Filter Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or click the DNS Filter link from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.

Advance Setting Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is strongly recommended to use the default settings here.


Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.

If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage, please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the dialog box.

Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol (0~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper.

Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources. However, Queue timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with the firewall rule.

DrayTek Banner – Please uncheck this box and the following screen will not be shown for the unreachable web page. The default setting is Enabled.


Strict Security Checking - All the packets, while transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by firewall settings configured by Vigor router. When the resource is inadequate, the packets will be blocked if Strict Security Checking is enabled. If Strict Security Checking is not enabled, then the packets will pass through the router.

EExxaammppllee

As stated before, all the traffic will be separated and arbitrated using on of two IP filters: call filter or data filter. You may preset 12 call filters and data filters in Filter Setup and even link them in a serial manner. Each filter set is composed by 7 filter rules, which can be further defined. After that, in General Setup you may specify one set for call filter and one set for data filter to execute first.


VV--11--33 DDooSS DDeeffeennssee

As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default.

VV--11--33--11 DDooSS DDeeffeennssee Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page.


Item Description

Enable Dos Defense Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality.

Select All - Click this button to select all the items listed below.

White/Black List Option – Set white/black list of IPv4/IPv6 address.

Enable SYN flood defense Check the box to activate the SYN flood defense function. Once detecting the Threshold of the TCP SYN packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent TCP SYN packets for a period defined in Timeout. The goal for this is prevent the TCP SYN packets’ attempt to exhaust the limited-resource of Vigor router.

By default, the threshold and timeout values are set to 2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be


paused for 10 seconds.

Enable UDP flood defense Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function. Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets for a period defined in Timeout.

The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused for 10 seconds.

Enable ICMP flood defense Check the box to activate the ICMP flood defense function. Similar to the UDP flood defense function, once if the Threshold of ICMP packets from Internet has exceeded the defined value, the router will discard the ICMP echo requests coming from the Internet.

The default setting for threshold and timeout are 250 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That means, when 250 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused for 10 seconds.

Enable PortScan detection Port Scan attacks the Vigor router by sending lots of packets to many ports in an attempt to find ignorant services would respond. Check the box to activate the Port Scan detection. Whenever detecting this malicious exploration behavior by monitoring the port-scanning Threshold rate, the Vigor router will send out a warning.

By default, the Vigor router sets the threshold as 2000 packets per second. That means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will be regarded as “attack event”.

Block IP options Check the box to activate the Block IP options function. The Vigor router will ignore any IP packets with IP option field in the datagram header. The reason for limitation is IP option appears to be a vulnerability of the security for the LAN because it will carry significant information, such as security, TCC (closed user group) parameters, a series of Internet addresses, routing messages...etc. An eavesdropper outside might learn the details of your private networks.

Block Land Check the box to enforce the Vigor router to defense the Land attacks. The Land attack combines the SYN attack technology with IP spoofing. A Land attack occurs when an attacker sends spoofed SYN packets with the identical source and destination addresses, as well as the port number to victims.

Block Smurf Check the box to activate the Block Smurf function. The Vigor router will ignore any broadcasting ICMP echo request.

Block trace route Check the box to enforce the Vigor router not to forward any trace route packets.

Block SYN fragment Check the box to activate the Block SYN fragment function. The Vigor router will drop any packets having SYN flag and more fragment bit set.

Block Fraggle Attack Check the box to activate the Block fraggle Attack function. Any broadcast UDP packets received from the Internet is


blocked.

Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block some legal packets. For example, when you activate the fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets from the Internet might be dropped.

Block TCP flag scan Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function. Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.

Block Tear Drop Check the box to activate the Block Tear Drop function. Many machines may crash when receiving ICMP datagrams (packets) that exceed the maximum length. To avoid this type of attack, the Vigor router is designed to be capable of discarding any fragmented ICMP packets with a length greater than 1024 octets.

Block Ping of Death Check the box to activate the Block Ping of Death function. This attack involves the perpetrator sending overlapping packets to the target hosts so that those target hosts will hang once they re-construct the packets. The Vigor routers will block any packets realizing this attacking activity.

Block ICMP Fragment Check the box to activate the Block ICMP fragment function. Any ICMP packets with more fragment bit set are dropped.

Block Unassigned Numbers Check the box to activate the Block Unknown Protocol function. Individual IP packet has a protocol field in the datagram header to indicate the protocol type running over the upper layer. However, the protocol types greater than 100 are reserved and undefined at this time. Therefore, the router should have ability to detect and reject this kind of packets.

Warning Messages We provide Syslog function for user to retrieve message from Vigor router. The user, as a Syslog Server, shall receive the report sending from Vigor router which is a Syslog Client.

All the warning messages related to DoS Defense will be sent to user and user can review it through Syslog daemon. Look for the keyword DoS in the message, followed by a name to indicate what kind of attacks is detected.


VV--11--33--22 SSppooooffiinngg DDeeffeennssee Open Firewall >> Defense Setup and click Spoofing Defense to open the setup page.


VV--11--44 DDiiaaggnnoossee

The purpose of this function is to test when the router receiving incoming packet, which firewall rule will be applied to that packet. The test result, including firewall rule profile, IP address translation in packet transmission, state of the firewall fuctions and etc., also will be shown on this page.

Info

The result obtained by using Diagnose is offered for RD debug. It will be different according to actual state such as netework connection, LAN/WAN settings and so on.


Item Description

Mode To have a firewall rule test, specify the service type (ICMP, UDP, TCP) of the packet and type of the IP address (IPv4/IPv6).

Direction Set the way (from WAN or from LAN) that Vigor router receives the first packet for test. Different way means the firewall will process the connection initiated from LAN or from WAN.

Test View This is a dynamic display page.

According to the direction specified, test view will display the figure to guide you typing IP address, port number, and MAC address.

Later, after clicking the Analyze button, the information for the firewall rule profile and address translation will be shown on this page.

Src IP Type the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s source.

Src Port Type the port number of the packet’s source.

Src MAC Type the MAC address of the packet’s source.


Dst IP Type the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s destination.

Dst Port Type the port number of the packet’s destination.

Packet & Payload In firewall diagnose, two packets belong to one connection. In general, two packets are enough for Vigor router to perform this test.

Enable – Check the box to send out the test packet.

Direction – The first packet of the firewall test will follow the direction specified above. However, the direction for the second packet might be different. Simply choose the direction (from Computer A to B or from the B to A) for the second packet.

Protocol – It displays the mode selected above and the sate. If required, click the mode link to configure advanced setting. The common service type (Customize, Ping, Trace Route / Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize, Http(GET) related to that mode (ICMP / UDP / TCP) will be shown on the following dialog box.

Type – Choose Customize, DNS Query and Trace Route.

Payload – It is available when Customzie is selected. Simply type 16 HEX characters which represent certain packet (e.g., DNS packet) if you want to set the data transfered with protocol (ICMP/UDP/TCP) which is different to Type setting.

Analyze Execute the test and analyze the result.


The following figure shows the test result after clicking Analyze. Processing state for the fuctions (MAC Filter, QoS, User management, etc.,) related to the firewall will be displayed by green or red LED.



AA--11 HHooww ttoo CCoonnffiigguurree CCeerrttaaiinn CCoommppuutteerrss AAcccceessssiinngg ttoo IInntteerrnneett We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get the source from LAN only.

The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2.

1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor router.

2. Open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and choose the Filter Rule 2 button.


3. Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Type the comments (e.g., block_all). Choose Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK.

Info

In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter Rule 2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for Filter, the firewall of the router would check the packets with the rules starting from Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with the rules will be processed according to Rule 2.

4. Next, set another rule. Just open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and choose the Filter Rule 3 button.

5. Check the box of Check to enable the Filter Rule. Type the comments (e.g., open_ip). Click the Edit button for Source IP.


6. A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can access into the Internet.

7. Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.

8. Both filter rules have been created. Click OK.


Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.


AA--22 HHooww ttoo bbaacckkuupp aanndd rreessttoorree ffiirreewwaallll rruullee aanndd oobbjjeecctt sseettttiinnggss?? Firewall of Vigor router is object-oriented, such as IP object, service type object and keyword object. Since firmware version 3.8.5, Vigor router supports Firewall backup/restore feature. Users can backup firewall settings including object and CSM, then restore it to other routers to make the process of configuration more user-friendly.

After firewall setting is configured on one Vigor router, go to Firewall>>General Setting and click Backup in the end of the page to backup firewall configuration.

Then we can restore these settings on another router on the same page. Also, we can choose what settings to be restored.


The router will show a success message after firewall restoration finishes.


VV--22 CCSSMM ((CCeennttrraall SSeeccuurriittyy MMaannaaggeemmeenntt))

CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.

AAPPPP EEnnffoorrcceemmeenntt FFiilltteerr

As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot become much easier. Nevertheless, while some industry may leverage this as a great tool to connect with their customers, some industry may take reserved attitude in order to reduce employee misusage during office hour or prevent unknown security leak. It is similar situation for corporation towards peer-to-peer applications since file-sharing can be convenient but insecure at the same time. To address these needs, we provide CSM functionality.

UURRLL CCoonntteenntt FFiilltteerr

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal.

Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.

On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system. For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.

WWeebb CCoonntteenntt FFiilltteerr

We all know that the content on the Internet just like other types of media may be inappropriate sometimes. As a responsible parent or employer, you should protect those in your trust against the hazards. With Web filtering service of the Vigor router, you can protect your business from common primary threats, such as productivity, legal liability, network and security threats. For parents, you can protect your children from viewing adult websites or chat rooms.

Once you have activated your Web Filtering service in Vigor router and chosen the categories of website you wish to restrict, each URL address requested (e.g.www.bbc.co.uk) will be checked against our server database. This database is updated as frequent as daily by a global team of Internet researchers. The server will look up the URL and return a category to your router. Your Vigor router will then decide whether to allow access to this site according to the categories you have selected. Please note that this action will not introduce any delay in your Web surfing because each of multiple load balanced database servers can handle millions of requests for categorization.

Info

The priority of URL Content Filter is higher than Web Content Filter.



VV--22--11 AAPPPP EEnnffoorrcceemmeenntt PPrrooffiillee

You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Misc application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.


Item Description

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to set different policy.

Name Display the name of the APP Enforcement Profile.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.



Item Description

Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

Select All Click it to choose all of the items in this page.

Clear All Uncheck all the selected boxes.

Enable Check the box to select the APP to be blocked by Vigor router.

The profiles configured here can be applied in the Firewall>>General Setup and Firewall>>Filter Setup pages as the standard for the host(s) to follow.


VV--22--22 AAPPPPEE SSiiggnnaattuurree UUppggrraaddee

The APPE Enforcement Profile adopted by Vigor router will be treated as the APPE signature. DrayTek will periodically upgrade versions for all of the APPs supported by Vigor router. However, it might be inconvenient for users to upgrade the APP version one by one. This feature is specially designed to offer a quick method to execute APP version upgrade. Users can perform the APPE signature upgrade manually or configure the settings on this page to make Vigor router performing the APPE signature automatically.


Item Description

Upgrade Setting APPE Module Version – Display current version status of APPE signature.

New version from the Internet – Download button is available only when Vigor router detects new APPE version. After clicking it, a dialog will appear with information added to such new version. Click OK to exit the dialog and start the signature upgrade.

Upgrade via interface – Choose one of the WAN interfaces as a channel for APPE signature upgrade.

Setup Download Server Specify the download server by typing the URL of the server located. Or you can click Find more link to search the one you want.

Signature authentication/download message – Display the status of APPE Signature Upgrade.

Upgrade Manually Import – Click this button to open the following page. Press Choose File to locate the signature file which downloaded from MyVigor portal or FTP server previously. Then, click


Upgrade and wait for the system completing the process.

Upgrade Automatically Scheduled Update - Check the box to make Vigor router upgrading the APPE signature based on the schedule configured here.

After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.

VV--22--33 UURRLL CCoonntteenntt FFiilltteerr PPrrooffiillee

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal.

Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.

On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system. For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.

For example, if you add key words such as “sex”, Vigor router will limit web access to web sites or web pages such as “www.sex.com”, ”www.backdoor.net/images/sex/p_386.html”. Or you may simply specify the full or partial URL such as “www.sex.com” or “sex.com”.

Also the Vigor router will discard any request that tries to retrieve the malicious code.

Click CSM and click URL Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page.

http://www.sex.com/�

http://www.sex.com/�



Item Description


Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to set different policy.

Name Display the name of the URL Content Filter Profile.

Administration Message You can type the message manually for your necessity.

Default Message - You can type the message manually for your necessity or click this button to get the default message which will be displayed on the field of Administration Message.

You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page.



Item Description


Priority It determines the action that this router will apply.

Both: Pass – The router will let all the packages that match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below passing through. When you choose this setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web Feature will be inactive.

Both: Block –The router will block all the packages that match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below. When you choose this setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web Feature will be inactive.

Either: URL Access Control First – When all the packages matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below, such function can determine the priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router will process the packages with the conditions set below for URL first, then Web feature second.

Either: Web Feature First –When all the packages matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below, such function can determine the priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router will process the packages with the conditions set below for web feature first, then URL second.

Log Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.

Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.

All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in Syslog.

URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature. If the web content match the setting set in URL Access Control, the router will execute the action specified in this field and ignore the action specified under Restrict Web Feature.

Prevent web access from IP address - Check the box to deny any web surfing activity using IP address, such as http://202.6.3.2. The reason for this is to prevent someone dodges the URL Access Control. You must clear your browser cache first so that the URL content filtering facility operates properly on a web page that you visited before.

Action – This setting is available only when Either : URL


Access Control First or Either : Web Feature First is selected.

Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below. If the web pages do not match with the keyword set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

Exception List – Specify the object profile(s) as the exception list which will be processed in an opposite manner to the action selected above.

Group/Object Selections – The Vigor router provides several frames for users to define keywords and each frame supports multiple keywords. The keyword could be a noun, a partial noun, or a complete URL string. Multiple keywords within a frame are separated by space, comma, or semicolon. In addition, the maximal length of each frame is 32-character long. After specifying keywords, the Vigor router will decline the connection request to the website whose URL string matched to any user-defined keyword. It should be noticed that the more simplified the blocking keyword list is, the more efficiently the Vigor router performs.

Web Feature Enable Restrict Web Feature - Check this box to make the keyword being blocked or passed.

Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is selected.

Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission from inside to outside world to protect the local user's privacy.

Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of


great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.

Upload – Check the box to block the file upload by way of web page.

File Extension Profile – Choose one of the profiles that you configured in Object Setting>> File Extension Objects previously for passing or blocking the file downloading.

Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission from inside to outside world to protect the local user's privacy.

Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.

Upload – Check the box to block the file upload by way of web page.



VV--22--44 WWeebb CCoonntteenntt FFiilltteerr PPrrooffiillee

There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.

However, if you use the Web Content Filter Profile page to activate WCF feature, it is necessary for you to access into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com. Therefore, you need to register an account on http://myvigor.draytek.com for using corresponding service. Please refer to section of creating MyVigor account.

WCF adopts the mechanism developed and offered by certain service provider (e.g., DrayTek). No matter activating WCF feature or getting a new license for web content filter, you have to click Activate to satisfy your request. Be aware that service provider matching with Vigor router currently offers a period of time for trial version for users to experiment. If you want to purchase a formal edition, simply contact with the channel partner or your dealer.

Click CSM and click Web Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page. The default setting for Setup Query Server /Setup Test Server is auto-selected. You can choose another server for your necessity by clicking Find more to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable one.

Info 1

Web Content Filter (WCF) is not a built-in service of Vigor router but a service powered by Commtouch. If you want to use such service (trial or formal edition), you have to perform the procedure of activation first. For the service of formal edition, please contact with your dealer/distributor for detailed information.

Info 2 Commtouch is merged by Cyren, and GlobalView services will be continued to deliver powerful cloud-based information security solutions! Refer to:

http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239025151.html


http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239025151.html�

http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239025151.html�



Item Description

Activate Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service.

Setup Query Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize searching when you type URL in browser based on the web content filter profile.

Setup Test Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected.

Find more Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable server.

Cache None – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF precisely, however, the processing rate is normal. Such item can provide the most accurate URL matching.

L1 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the URL has been accessed previously, it will be stored in the router to be accessed quickly if required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with faster rate.

L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the


user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL matching with the fastest rate.

L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.

Set to Factory Default Click this link to retrieve the factory settings.

Default Message You can type the message manually for your necessity or click this button to get the default message which will be displayed on the field of Administration Message.

Eight profiles are provided here as Web content filters. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page. The items listed in Categories will be changed according to the different service providers. If you have and activate another web content filter license, the items will be changed simultaneously. All of the configuration made for web content filter will be deleted automatically. Therefore, please backup your data before you change the web content filter license.


Item Description


Log None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.




Black/White List Enable – Activate white/black list function for such profile. Group/Object Selections – Click Edit to choose the group or object profile as the content of white/black list.

Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below.

Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below.

Action Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the categories listed on the box below.

Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the categories listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, it will be processed with reverse action.



VV--22--55 DDNNSS FFiilltteerr PPrrooffiillee

The DNS Filter monitors DNS queries on UDP port 53 and will pass the DNS query information to the WCF to help with categorizing HTTPS URL's.

DNS can be specified in LAN>>General Setup by using the server (e.g., 168.95.1.1) on router or external DNS server (e.g., 8.8.8.8). If the router server is used, DNS Filter General Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN. However, if the external DNS server is used, DNS Filter Profile will be applied to DNS query coming from clients on LAN.

Info

For DNS filter must use the WCF service profile to filter the packets, therefore WCF license must be activated first. Otherwise, DNS filter does not have any effect on packets.



Item Description

DNS Filter Profile Table It displays a list of different DNS filter profiles (with specified WCF and UCF).

Click the profile link to open the following page. Then, type the name of the profile and specify WCF/UCF based on your requirement.

DNS Filter Local Setting DNS Filter Local Setting will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN when router’s DNS server is used.

DNS Filter - Check Enable to enable such feature.

Syslog - The filtering result can be recorded according to the setting selected for Syslog.

None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.



Web Content Filter- Set the filtering conditions.

URL Content Filter - Set the filtering conditions.

Black/White List – Specify IP address, subnet mask, IP object, or IP group as a black list or white list for DNS packets passing through or blocked by Vigor router.

Administration Message Type the words or sentences which will be displayed when a web page is blocked by Vigor router.



VV--22--66 AAPPPPEE SSuuppppoorrtt LLiisstt

This page offers the software versions for each applications managed by APP Enforcement Profiles by Vigor router. Click the IM/P2P/PROTOCOL/OTHERS tab to open the information page for different APP type.



AA--11 HHooww ttoo CCrreeaattee aann AAccccoouunntt ffoorr MMyyVViiggoorr The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering the web pages for the sake of protecting your system.

To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor.

CCrreeaattee aann AAccccoouunntt vviiaa VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr

1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.

Or

Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page.

Or,

Access into http://myvigor.draytek.com directly.



2. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically.

3. Click the link of Create an account now.

4. The system will ask if you are 16 years old or over.

If yes, click I am 16 or over.


If not, click I am under 16 years old to get the following page. Then, click I and my legal guardian agree.

5. After reading the terms of service/privacy policy, click Agree.

6. In the following page, enter your personal information in this page and then click Continue.


7. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.

8. Now you have created an account successfully. Click START.

9. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter from myvigor.draytek.com.

10. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.

http://www.vigorpro.com/�


11. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password.

12. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.


AA--22 HHooww ttoo BBlloocckk FFaacceebbooookk SSeerrvviiccee AAcccceesssseedd bbyy tthhee UUsseerrss vviiaa WWeebb CCoonntteenntt

FFiilltteerr // UURRLL CCoonntteenntt FFiilltteerr There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter.

Web Content Filter,

Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block.

Note: License is required.

URL Content Filter,

Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage.

Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.)

II.. VViiaa WWeebb CCoonntteenntt FFiilltteerr

1. Make sure the Web Content Filter (powered by Commtouch) license is valid.

2. Open CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile to create a WCF profile. Check Social Networking with Action, Block.


3. Enable this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule.

4. Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be blocked and the following message would be displayed instead.

II. Via URL Content Filter

A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook”

1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page.

2. In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure.


3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page.

4. Configure the settings as the following figure.

5. When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup.


6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word “facebook” inside.

B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook

1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting page.

2. In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook. Configure the settings as the following figure.


3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting page.

4. Configure the settings as the following figure.

5. When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup.

6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word “facebook” inside.


AA--33 HHooww ttoo uussee AAPPPP EEnnffoorrcceemmeenntt ttoo bblloocckk aapppplliiccaattiioonn lliikkee FFaacceebbooookk,, YYoouuTTuubbee

oorr TTeeaammVViieewweerr?? APP Enforcement helps network administrator to block applications on LAN network. Draytek routers provide a few categories to set up the profiles e.g., IM, P2P, Protocol, Stream, Remote control.

This section is going to demonstrate how to use APP Enforcement to block Facebook, Skype, YouTube and TeamViewer.

1. Create an APP Enforcement Profile: Click on an Index number to create a new profile at CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile.


2. Set up the details in the profile.


(b) Choose the Facebook in Instant Message.

(c) Choose Skype in VoIP.

(d) Choose YouTube in Stream.

(e) Choose TeamViewer in Remote control.

(f) Click OK to save.

3. Apply the APP Enforcement Profile to a Firewall Filter Rule. Go to Firewall >> Filter Setup, and click an available set.


4. Click on a Filter Rule index to set up a filter.

5. Set up the details in the profile.

(a) Enable the Filter Rule.

(b) Put the comments of this rule.

(c) Select the Direction as LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN -> WAN.

(d) Edit the Source IP which should be blocked from the APP.

(e) Select Filter as Pass Immediately.

(f) Select APP Enforcement as the profile we created in Step 2.

(g) You may also check the Syslog if needed.


(h) Click OK to save.

6. With the above configuration, LAN clients cannot be able to use the APP and website.


PPaarrtt VVII MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

There are several items offered for the Vigor router system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting, Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade and Activation.

It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).


VVII--11 SSyysstteemm MMaaiinntteennaannccee

For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration: System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting, Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, SNMP, Management, Self-Signed Certificate, Reboot System, Firmware Upgrade, Modem Code Upgrade and Activation.

Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.


VVII--11--11 SSyysstteemm SSttaattuuss

The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware related information from this presentation.


Item Description

Model Name Display the model name of the router.

Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the router.

Build Date/Time Display the date and time of the current firmware build.

LAN MAC Address

- Display the MAC address of the LAN Interface.

IP Address

- Display the IP address of the LAN interface.

Subnet Mask

- Display the subnet mask address of the LAN interface.

DHCP Server

- Display the current status of DHCP server of the LAN interface

DNS

- Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS.


WAN Link Status

- Display current connection status.

MAC Address

- Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface.

Connection

- Display the connection type.

IP Address

- Display the IP address of the WAN interface.

Default Gateway

- Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway.

IPv6 Address - Display the IPv6 address for LAN.

Scope - Display the scope of IPv6 address. For example, IPv6 Link Local could only be used for direct IPv6 link. It can't be used for IPv6 internet.

Internet Access Mode – Display the connection mode chosen for accessing into Internet.


VVII--11--22 TTRR--006699

This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server, e.g., VigorACS.



Item Description

TR-069 Click Enable to activate the settings on this page.

ACS Server On Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.

ACS Server URL/Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link.

Wizard – Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS server, port number and the handler.

Acquire URL form DHCP option 43 – Check the box to get the URL from DHCP option 43.

Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link.

Test With Inform – Click it to send a message based on the event code selection to test if such CPE is able to communicate with VigorACS SI server.

Event Code – Use the drop down menu to specify an event to perform the test.

Last Inform Response Time – Display the time that VigorACS server made a response while receiving Inform message from CPE last time.

CPE Client Such information is useful for Auto Configuration Server.

Protocol – Select HTTP or HTTPS.

Port – Sometimes, port conflict might be occurred. To solve such problem, you might change port number for CPE.

Username and Password – Type the username and password that VigorACS can use to access into such CPE.

Periodic Inform Settings Enable – It is the default setting.

Time Interval - Please set interval time or schedule time for the router to send notification to CPE.

Disable - Click it to close the mechanism of notification.

STUN Settings Disable - The default is Disable.

Enable - Please type the relational settings listed below:

Server Address – Type the IP address of the STUN server.

Server STUN Port – Type the port number of the STUN server.

Minimum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the CPE must send binding request to the server for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a number as the minimum period. The default setting is “60 seconds”.

Maximum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the CPE must send binding request to the server for the purpose of maintaining the binding in the Gateway. Please type a number as the maximum period. A value of “-1” indicates that no maximum period is specified.

Apply Settings to APs This feature is able to apply TR-069 settings (including STUN and ACS server settings) to all of APs managed by Vigor2765 at the same time.

Disable – Related settings will not be applied to VigorAP.

Enable – Above settings will be applied to VigorAP after clicking OK to save the configuration. If such feature is


enabled, you have to type the password for accessing VigorAP.

AP Password – Type the password of the VigorAP that you want to apply Vigor2765’s TR-069 settings.

Specify STUN Settings to APs – If you want to apply specific STUN settings (not the STUN Settings configured for Vigor2952) to VigorAPs to meet specific requirements, simply check this box. Then, enter the server IP address, server port, minimum keep alive period and maxmum keep alive period respectively.

Bandwidth Utilisation Notification Settings

To administrator, this feature is useful to monitor the bandwidth utilization of CPE(s). When the bandwidth used is over the threshold level (percentage defined in medium and high fields), a notification will be sent to VigorACS. After a long time observation, the administrator can determine if it is necessary to increase the bandwidth setting for that CPE or not.

Disable - The default is Disable.

Enable – Click it to enable such feature.

Time Period – Choose the time interval (15 mins, 30 mins, 1hour, 3 hours, or 6 hours) for CPE to send a notification of bandwidth utilization to VigorACS.

WAN – Choose the WAN interface for applying the bandwidth utilization notification mechanism.

Threshold Level – Set the percentage of bandwidth in transmission and receiving data as threshold values for CPE to detect bandwidth utilization.

Line Speed – Set the transmission rate and receiving rate for specified WAN interface.



VVII--11--33 AAddmmiinniissttrraattoorr PPaasssswwoorrdd

This page allows you to set new password for administrator.



Item Description

Administrator Password The administrator can login web user interface of Vigor router to modify all of the settings to fit the requirements.

Old Password - Type in the old password. The factory default setting for password is “admin”.

New Password – Define the basic password. The length of the password is limited to 23 characters.

Confirm Password – Enter the basic password again for confirmation.

Enable ‘admin’ account login to Web UI from the Internet – It is configurable only when Administrator Local User is enabled. The default setting is enabled. It can ensure that any user is able to successfully accesses into web user interface of Vigor router through Internet by username/password of “admin/admin”. However, if you want to prevent the admin account from password attacks by hackers, disable this function and let local user account access into the WUI instead.

Use only advanced authentication method for Admin “WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can offer a more secure network connection. In general, the above basic password setting will be used for authentication if such option is disabled. Simply check the box to enable the following settings.

Mobile one-Time Password (mOTP) – Click it to use mOTP as the advanced authentication method. Enter the PIN code and secret settings for one-time usage.

2-Step Auth code via SMS Profile and/or Mail Profile – Click it to use authentication code as the advanced authentication method. The authentication code will be sent out based on the selected SMS profile and Mail profile.

Administrator Local User Usually, the system administrator has the highest privilege to modify the settings on the web user interface of the Vigor router. However, in some cases, it might be necessary to have other users in LAN to access into the web user interface of Vigor router.

This feature is used to define other users in LAN who can access into the web user interface with the same privilege as the administrator.

Local User – Check the box to enable Administrator Local User setting and define the local user account and password.

Local User List – Display the username, authentication method of the local user.

Specific User – Create the new user account as the local user. Then specify the authentication method (dividing into Basic and Advanced) for the user account.

User Name – Enter a user name.

Authentication method (Basic) – Vigor router will authenticate the specific user via the local password.

Local Password – Enter the password for the local user.


Authentication method (Advanced) - Vigor router will authenticate the specific user via the mOTP or 2-Step Auth code.


2-Step Authentication via SMS Profile and/or Mail Profile – Click it to use authentication code as the advanced authentication method. The authentication code will be sent out based on the selected SMS profile and Mail profile.

Add – After typing the user name and password above, simply click it to create a new local user. The new one will be shown on the Local User List immediately.

Edit – If the username listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and modify it on the field of User Name. Later, click Edit to update the information.

Delete – If the local user listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and click Delete to remove it.

Use only advanced authentication method for Admin “WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can offer a more secure network connection. In general, the above basic password setting will be used for authentication if such option is disabled. Simply check the box to enable the following settings.

Administrator Local User Usually, the system administrator has the highest privilege to modify the settings on the web user interface of the Vigor router. However, in some cases, it might be necessary to have other users in LAN to access into the web user interface of Vigor router.

This feature is used to define other users in LAN who can access into the web user interface with the same privilege as the administrator.

Enable Local User – Check the box to enable Administrator Local User setting and define the local user account and password.

Use only advanced authentication method for Admin “WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can offer a more secure network connection. In general, the following basic password setting will be used for authentication if such option is disabled. Simply check the box to enable the following settings.

Local User List – Display the username, authentication method of the local user.

Specific User – Create the new user account as the local user. Then specify the authentication method (dividing into Basic and Advanced) for the user account.

User Name – Enter a user name.

Authentication method (Basic) – Vigor router will authenticate the specific user via the local password.

Local Password – Enter the password for the local user.


Authentication method (Advanced) - Vigor router will authenticate the specific user via the mOTP or 2-Step Auth code.


2-Step Authentication via SMS Profile and/or Mail Profile – Click it to use authentication code as the advanced authentication method. The authentication code will be sent out based on the selected SMS profile and Mail profile.

Add – After typing the user name and password above, simply click it to create a new local user. The new one will be shown on the Local User List immediately.

Edit – If the username listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and modify it on the field of User Name. Later, click Edit to update the information.

Delete – If the local user listed on the box above is not satisfied, simply click the username and click Delete to remove it.

When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into the web user interface again.


VVII--11--44 UUsseerr PPaasssswwoorrdd

This page allows you to set new password for user operation.


Item Description

Enable User Mode for simple web configuration

After checking this box, you can access into the web user interface with the password typed here for simple web configuration.

The settings on simple web user interface will be different with full web user interface accessed by using the administrator password.

Password Type in new password in this field. The length of the password is limited to 31 characters.

Confirm Password Type in the new password again.

Password Strength Display the security strength of the password specified above.

Set to Factory Default Click to return to the factory default setting.

When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into the web user interface again.

Below shows an example for accessing into User Operation with User Password.

1. Open System Maintenance>>User Password.

2. Check the box of Enable User Mode for simple web configuration to enable user mode operation. Type a new password in the field of New Password and click OK.


3. The following screen will appear. Simply click OK.

4. Log out Vigor router web user interface by clicking the Logout button.

5. The following window will be open to ask for username and password. Type the new user password in the filed of Password and click Login.

6. The main screen with User Mode will be shown as follows.


Settings to be configured in User Mode will be less than settings in Admin Mode. Only basic configuration settings will be available in User Mode.

Info

Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.


VVII--11--55 LLooggiinn PPaaggee GGrreeeettiinngg

When you want to access into the web user interface of Vigor router, the system will ask you to offer username and password first. At that moment, the background of the web page is blank and no heading will be displayed on the Login window. This page allows you to specify login URL and the heading on the Login window if you have such requirement.


Item Description

Login Page Logo Login page logo which is used as an identification of enterprise can be uploaded and displayed on the login page. You can use the default one, blank page or upload other image files (the size no mare than 524 × 352 pixel) to have an image of enterprise or have the effect of advertisement.

Enable Greeting Check this box to enable the login customization function.

Login Page Title Type a brief description (e.g., Welcome to DrayTek) which will be shown on the heading of the login dialog.

Welcome Message and Bulletin

Type words or sentences here. It will be displayed for bulletin message. In addition, it can be displayed on the login dialog at the bottom.

Note that do not type URL redirect link here.

Preview Click it to display the preview of the login window based on


the settings on this web page.

Set to Factory Default Click to return to the factory default setting.

Below shows an example of login customization with the information typed in Login Description and Bulletin.


VVII--11--66 CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn BBaacckkuupp

Such function can be used to apply the router settings configured by Vigor2760 to Vigor2765.

BBaacckkuupp tthhee CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn

Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.

1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following page will be popped-up, as shown below.


Item Description

Restore Choose File – Click it to specify a file to be restored.

Click Restore to restore the configuration.

Backup Click it to perform the configuration backup of this router.

2. Click Backup button to get into the following dialog. Click Save button to open another dialog for saving configuration as a file.


3. In Save As dialog, the default filename is config.cfg. You could give it another name by yourself.

4. Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named config.cfg.

The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available.

Info

Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration Backup does not include information of Certificate.


RReessttoorree CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn

1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be popped-up as shown below.

2. Click Choose File button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the router.

3. Click Restore button and wait for few seconds, the following picture will tell you that the restoration procedure is successful.


VVII--11--77 SSyyssLLoogg//MMaaiill AAlleerrtt

SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router.


Item Description

SysLog Access Setup Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog.

Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog server.

Check USB Disk to save the log to the attached USB storage disk.

Router Name Display the name for such router configured in System Maintenance>>Management.

If there is no name here, simply lick the link to access into System Maintenance>>Management to set the router name.

Server IP / Hostname - Enter the IP address or the hostname of the Syslog server.

Destination Port - Assign a port for the Syslog protocol.

Mail Syslog – Check the box to recode the mail event on Syslog.

Enable syslog message - Check the box listed on this web page to send the corresponding message of firewall, VPN, User Access, Call, WAN, Router/DSL information to Syslog.

Mail Alert Setup Check Enable to activate function of mail alert.

Send a test e-mail - Make a simple test for the e-mail


address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail address is available or not.

SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the SMTP server.

Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out.

Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from outside.

Use SSL - Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.

Authentication - Check this box to activate this function while using e-mail application.

Username - Type the user name for authentication.

Password - Type the password for authentication.

Enable E-mail Alert - Check the box to send alert message to the e-mail box while the router detecting the item(s) you specify here.

Click OK to save these settings.

For viewing the Syslog, please do the following:

1. Just set your monitor PC’s IP address in the field of Server IP Address

2. Install the Router Tools in the Utility within provided CD. After installation, click on the Router Tools>>Syslog from program menu.


3. From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router. Otherwise, you won’t succeed in retrieving information from the router.


VVII--11--88 TTiimmee aanndd DDaattee

It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from.


Item Description

Current System Time Click Inquire Time to get the current time.

Use Browser Time Select this option to use the browser time from the remote administrator PC host as router’s system time.

Use Internet Time Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the Internet using assigned protocol.

Time Server Type the web site of the time server.

Priority Choose Auto or IPv6 First as the priority.

Time Zone Select the time zone where the router is located.

Enable Daylight Saving Check the box to enable the daylight saving. Such feature is available for certain area.

Advanced – Click it to open a pop up dialog.

Use the default time setting or set user defined time for your requirement.

Automatically Update Interval

Select a time interval for updating from the NTP server.

Send NTP Request Specify a WAN interface to send NTP request for time


Through synchronization.


VVII--11--99 SSNNMMPP

This page allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services.

The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the encryption method (support AES and DES) and authentication method (support MD5 and SHA) for the management needs.


Item Description

Enable SNMP Agent Check it to enable this function. Then, enable SNMPV1 agent/SNMPV2C agent.

Get Community Set the name for getting community by typing a proper


character. The default setting is public.

The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.

Set Community Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting is private.


Manager Host IP (IPv4) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function. Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.

Manager Host IP (IPv6) Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function. Please type in IPv6 address to specify certain host.

Trap Community Set trap community by typing a proper name. The default setting is public.


Notification Host IP (IPv4) Set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the trap community.

Notification Host IP (IPv6) Set the IPv6 address of the host that will receive the trap community.

Trap Timeout The default setting is 10 seconds.

Enable SNMPV3 Agent Check it to enable this function.

USM User USM means user-based security mode.

Type a username which will be used for authentication. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.

Auth Algorithm Choose one of the encryption methods listed below as the authentication algorithm.

Auth Password Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.

Privacy Algorithm Choose one of the methods listed below as the privacy algorithm.

Privacy Password Type a password for privacy. The maximum length of the text is limited to 23 characters.



VVII--11--1100 MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, and Device Management.

The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different.

VVII--11--1100--11 IIPPvv44 MMaannaaggeemmeenntt SSeettuupp


Item Description

Router Name Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Default: Disable Auto-Logout

If it is enabled, the function of auto-logout for web user interface will be disabled.


The web user interface will be open until you click the Logout icon manually.

Enable Validation Code in Internet/LAN Access

If it is enabled, the mechanism of validation code will be offered by Vigor router. That is, the client must type validation code while accessing into Internet or web user interface of Vigor router.

Internet Access Control Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet. There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to specify.

Disable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to reject all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is enabled by default.

Access List from the Internet

You could specify that the system administrator can only login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.

Apply Access List to PING – The behavior of this feature is related to the function of Disable PING from the Internet.

When Disable PING from the Internet is disabled (unchecked) and Apply Access List to PING is enabled (checked), Vigor router will ping only the IPs list below (index in IP Object). When both Disable PING from the Internet and Apply Access List to PING are disabled (unchecked), Vigor router allows ping job of any IP.

index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object profile. Related IP with Subnet Mask will appear automatically.

Management Port Setup User Define Ports - Check to specify user-defined port numbers for the Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TR-069 and SSH servers.

Default Ports - Check to use standard port numbers for the Telnet and HTTP servers.

Brute Force Protection Any client trying to access into Internet via Vigor router will be asked for passing through user authentication. Such feature can prevent Vigor router from attacks when a hacker tries every possible combination of letters, numbers and symbols until find out the correct combination of password.

Enable brute force login protection – Enable the protection mechanism.

Maximum login failure – Specify the maximum number of wrong password that client can try for logging to Vigor router.

Penalty period – Set a period of time to block the IP address


which is used (by user or hacker) for passing through the user authentication again and again but failed always. When the time is up, Vigor system will unblock that IP and allow it to access into Vigor router again.

Blocked IP List – Open another web page which displays current blocked IPs.

TLS/SSL Encryption Setup Enable SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 – Check the box to enable the function of SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 if required.

Due to security consideration, the built-in HTTPS and SSL VPN server of the router had upgraded to TLS1.x protocol. If you are using old browser(eg. IE6.0) or old SmartVPN Client, you may still need to enable SSL 3.0 to make sure you can connect, however, it's not recommended.

AP Management Enable AP Management – Check it to enable the function of Central Management>>AP. If unchecked, menu items related to Central Management>>AP will be hidden.

Device Management Check the box to enable the device management function for Vigor2765.

Respond to external device – If it is enabled, Vigor2765 will be regarded as slave device. When the external device (master device) sends request packet to Vigor2765, Vigor2765 would send back information to respond the request coming from the external device which is able to manage Vigor2765.

After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.


VVII--11--1100--22 IIPPvv66 MMaannaaggeemmeenntt SSeettuupp


Item Description

Management Access Control

Allow management from the Internet - Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet. There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet. Check the box(es) to specify. Enable PING from the Internet - Check the checkbox to enable all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is disabled by default.

IPv6 Address Security Option

Enable Random Interface Identifiers (IIDs)... - The IPv6 address will be generated randomly but not using LAN/WAN MAC to prevent the attack from the hacker.

Access List from the Inernet

You could specify that the system administrator can only login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.

Index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.



VVII--11--1100--33 LLAANN AAcccceessss CCoonnttrrooll


Item Description

Allow management from LAN

Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from LAN interface. There are several servers provided by the system which allow you to manage the router from LAN interface. Check the box(es) to specify.

Apply To Subnet Check the LAN interface for the administrator to use for accessing into web user interface of Vigor router.

Index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.



VVII--11--1111 PPaanneell CCoonnttrrooll

The behavior of the LEDs, buttons, USB ports and LAN ports on the front panel of the Vigor router can be customized as desired.

FFoorr LLEEDD

By default, the LEDs are enabled, and will illuminate or blink continuously to show the status of the various functions in the router. However, they can be configured to remain off at all times, or remain off until a button is pressed to wake them up.


Item Description

Refresh Click to refresh the page to display the latest information.

Enable LED Select to enable front panel LEDs.

Enable Sleep Mode/Turn off LED after _ minutes – Available when Enable LED is selected. Select this option to turn off the LEDs after the specified number of minutes.

When sleep mode is enabled, LEDs can be woken up by pressing either the Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS button or the Factory Reset button on the front panel, or by clicking the Wake up LED button on this page. When LEDs are lit, they can be put to sleep by briefly pressing the Factory Reset button, or by clicking the LED sleep immediately button on this page.


Status Shows the status of the LEDs:

– LEDs are in sleep mode. To wake them up, do one of the following:

press the Wake up LED button on this page press the Wireless On/Off/WPS button on the front

panel press the Factory Reset button on the front panel.

– LEDs are awake. To put them to sleep immediately

press the LED sleep immediately button on this page press the Factory Reset button on the front panel for 1

second.


FFoorr BBuuttttoonn

The Factory Reset and Wireless ON/OFF/WPS buttons on the front panel are enabled by default and can be enabled or disabled if required. Disabling the Factory Reset button will prevent tampering by unauthorized parties, or to avoid accidental triggering of a router reset when being used wake up LEDs. Disabling the wireless button will prevent changing the wireless setting when LED Sleep Mode is enabled, and the buttons are primarily used to turn the LEDs on and off.

Click the Button tab to get the following page.



Item Description


Enable Wireless Button The default value is Enabled.

Deselect to disable the ability of the Wireless button to control WLAN and WPS functions.

Disabling the wireless button only prevents it from being used to control WLAN functions. It can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled.

Enable Factory Reset Button

The default value is Enabled.

Deselect to disable the reset function of the factory reset button.

Disabling the Factory Reset button only prevents it from being used to reboot Vigor router with default settings. It can still be used to wake up the LEDs when LED sleep mode is enabled.


FFoorr UUSSBB

The USB ports can be individually enabled or disabled. When a USB port is disabled, attached devices will not be recognized by the router.


Item Description


Port The number corresponds to the USB port number shown on the front panel.

Enable Deselect to disable the USB port. The default value is enabled.

Status Shows the status of the USB port.

No device – no USB device is connected to the port.

Connected – a USB device is connected to the port.

--- – the USB port is disabled.



FFoorr LLAANN PPoorrtt

The 4 LAN ports can be individually enabled or disabled. When a LAN port is disabled, attached devices will not be recognized by the router.


Item Description


Port The number corresponds to the LAN port number shown on the front panel.

Enable Deselect to disable the LAN port. The default value is enabled.

Status Shows the status of the USB port.

Link Up – An active Ethernet device is connected to the port.

Link Down – No active Ethernet device is detected.

--- – The LAN port is disabled.

Speed Shows the negotiated speed of the LAN port.

1000Mbps – Negotiated speed of the LAN port is 1000 Mbps.

100Mbps – Negotiated speed of the LAN port is 100 Mbps.

10Mpbs – Negotiated speed of the LAN port is 10 Mbps.

--- – The LAN port is disabled or there is no active device connected.



VVII--11--1122 SSeellff--SSiiggnneedd CCeerrttiiffiiccaattee

A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is signed with its own private key.

The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be created for free by using a wide variety of tools.


Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window. Type in all the information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE.


VVII--11--1133 RReebboooott SSyysstteemm

The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System Maintenance to open the following page.

Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

If you want to reboot the router using the current configuration, check Using current configuration and click Reboot Now. To reset the router settings to default values, check Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. The router will take 5 seconds to reboot the system.

Info

When the system pops up Reboot System web page after you configure web settings, please click Reboot Now to reboot your router for ensuring normal operation and preventing unexpected errors of the router in the future.


VVII--11--1144 FFiirrmmwwaarree UUppggrraaddee

Download the newest firmware from DrayTek's web site or FTP site. The DrayTek web site is www.DrayTek.com (or local DrayTek's web site) and FTP site is ftp.DrayTek.com.

Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to launch the Firmware Upgrade Utility.

Choose the right firmware by clicking Select. Then, click Upgrade. The system will upgrade the firmware of the router automatically.

Click OK. The following screen will appear. Please execute the firmware upgrade utility first.


VVII--11--1155 FFiirrmmwwaarree BBaacckkuupp

The firware for Vigor router can be saved on the host as a backup firmware. After that, if the router crashes due to the firmware error, the backup firmware will be applied to make the router run normally.


Item Description

Backup Setting Backup after reboot - Current firmware will be backup after rebooting Vigor router.

Backup after system running - Perform the firmware backup after a period of time.

Backup manually - Click this option and click OK, firmware backup will be performed immediately.

Firmware Version - Display recent firmware backup version.

Last backup - Display the time of recent firmware backup.

Automatic Firmware Recovery

Enable automatic firmware recovery - Vigor router will be recovered with the backup firmware automatically once failed to reboot for three times.

Simply specify the condition to run the firmware backup and click OK to save the settings.


VVII--11--1166 MMooddeemm CCooddee UUppggrraaddee

This function is used to upgrade modem code if you find built-in modem code is not suitable for Vigor router. Contact with your dealer for further assistance if required.

VVII--11--1177 AAccttiivvaattiioonn

There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it is the time to activate the mechanism for your computer.

Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing http://myvigor.draytek.com.


Item Description

Activate via Interface Choose WAN interface used by such device for activating Web Content Filter.

Activate The Activate link brings you accessing into www.vigorpro.com to finish the activation of the account and the router.

Authentication Message As for authentication information of web filter, the process


of authenticating will be displayed on this field for your reference.

Below shows the successful activation of Web Content Filter:


VVII--11--1188 DDaasshhbbooaarrdd CCoonnttrrooll

There are nine groups of setting information which can be displayed on Dashboard as a reference for administrator/user. Except for Front Panel and System Information, the settings information regarding to the groups listed on this page can be hidden if required.



AA--11 HHooww ttoo pprreevveenntt CCPPEE''ss sseettttiinnggss ffrroomm bbeeiinngg cchhaannggeedd bbyy tthhee eenndd--uusseerrss?? Sometimes network administrator does not wish end-users to change the configuration of CPE device.VigorACS (the administrator) server could use the KeepProfile Setting in the Provision page to always keep the parameter as original.

This document will demonstrate how to keep the admin123 as admin password via ACS SI.

KKeeeepp PPrrooffiillee SSeettuupp oonn VViiggoorrAACCSS SSII

1. Setup the parameter in KeepProfile Setting

Go to Provision page

Click Provision Setting >> KeepProfile Setting

From Network View, select the device which network administrator want to keep the setting


Click on drop menu to select on the setting menu, and choose SystemMaintenance _AdminPassword

Click Password parameter then drag it to left block

Type admin123 in Value field

Click Save button to save the setting

2. ACS server will pops up “Save Success” window.

3. Check ACS log: Go to Log page, select Device Action >> SetParameterLog, and we could see there's one log says that parameter has been applied.

VVeerriiffyyiinngg

1. Go to the CPE router, login with the password (admin123) set in KeepProfile Setting, and it could login successfully.


2. Try to modify the admin password to 123, then check whether ACS server will detect the changes and keep the original setting.

3. Wait a period of time for CPE inform. Then from the ACS log, we will find ACS has detected the parameter difference but assigned the original value again.

4. Go back to login the router, type 123 as password, we will find the password is incorrect, which means ACS has kept the password as admin123.


VVII--22 BBaannddwwiiddtthh MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

SSeessssiioonnss LLiimmiitt

A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications (e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.

BBaannddwwiiddtthh LLiimmiitt

The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Limit Bandwidth to make the bandwidth usage more efficient.

QQuuaalliittyy ooff SSeerrvviiccee ((QQooSS))

Deploying QoS (Quality of Service) management to guarantee that all applications receive the service levels required and sufficient bandwidth to meet performance expectations is indeed one important aspect of modern enterprise network.

One reason for QoS is that numerous TCP-based applications tend to continually increase their transmission rate and consume all available bandwidth, which is called TCP slow start. If other applications are not protected by QoS, it will detract much from their performance in the overcrowded network. This is especially essential to those are low tolerant of loss, delay or jitter (delay variation).

Another reason is due to congestions at network intersections where speeds of interconnected circuits mismatch or traffic aggregates, packets will queue up and traffic can be throttled back to a lower speed. If there’s no defined priority to specify which packets should be discarded (or in another term “dropped”) from an overflowing queue, packets of sensitive applications mentioned above might be the ones to drop off. How this will affect application performance?

There are two components within Primary configuration of QoS deployment:

Classification: Identifying low-latency or crucial applications and marking them for high-priority service level enforcement throughout the network.

Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and associated service types

The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on the service type information in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.

One more larger-scale implementation of QoS network is to apply DSCP (Differentiated Service Code Point) and IP Precedence disciplines at Layer 3. Compared with legacy IP Precedence that uses Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header to define 8 service classes, DSCP is a successor creating 64 classes possible with backward IP Precedence compatibility. In a QoS-enabled network, or Differentiated Service (DiffServ or DS) framework, a DS domain owner should sign a Service License Agreement (SLA) with other DS domain owners to define the service level provided toward traffic from different domains. Then each DS node in these domains will perform the priority treatment. This is called per-hop-behavior (PHB). The definition of PHB includes Expedited Forwarding (EF), Assured Forwarding (AF), and Best Effort (BE). AF defines the four classes of delivery (or forwarding) classes and three levels of drop precedence in each class.


Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header of bypassing traffic, to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing, classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the whole QoS-enabled network.

However, each node may take different attitude toward packets with high priority marking since it may bind with the business deal of SLA among different DS domain owners. It’s not easy to achieve deterministic and consistent high-priority QoS traffic throughout the whole network with merely Vigor router’s effort.



Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management.

VVII--22--11 SSeessssiioonnss LLiimmiitt

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page.

To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit.


Item Description

Session Limit Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit session.

Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit session.


Default Max Sessions - Defines the default session number used for each computer in LAN.

Limitation List Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page.

Specific Limitation Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session.

End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session.

Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do not set the session number in this field, the system will use the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for each index.

Add - Adds the specific session limitation onto the list above.

Edit - Allows you to edit the settings for the selected limitation.

Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the limitation list.

Administration Message Type the words which will be displayed when reaches the maximum number of Internet sessions permitted.

Default Message - Click this button to apply the default message offered by the router.

Time Schedule Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.



VVII--22--22 BBaannddwwiiddtthh LLiimmiitt

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page.

To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream and downstream limit.


Item Description

Enable Click this button to activate the function of limit bandwidth.

VPN Traffic – Check this box to apply the bandwidth limit to the traffic via VPN tunnel.

Default limit (Per User)

TX LImit - Define the default speed of the upstream for each computer in LAN.

RX limit - Define the default speed of the downstream for each computer in LAN.

Disable Click this button to close the function of limit bandwidth.

Limitation List Display a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page.


Add Entry By IP Range - All the IPs within the range defined will be restricted by bandwidth limit defined by TX Limit and RX Limit below.

Start IP - Define the start IP address for limit bandwidth.

End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth.

IP Object - All the IPs specified by the selected IP object or IP group will be restricted by bandwith limit defined by TX Limit and RX Limit below.

IP Group – Specify an IP group by using the drop down list.

IP Object - Specify an IP object by using the drop down list.

Each / Shared - Select Each to make each IP within the range of Start IP and End IP having the same speed defined in TX limit and RX limit fields; select Shared to make all the IPs within the range of Start IP and End IP share the speed defined in TX limit and RX limit fields.

TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

Add - Add the specific speed limitation onto the list above.

Edit - Allow you to edit the settings for the selected limitation.

Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the limitation list.

Allow-Adjustment Allow user to use more bandwidth… - Check this box to make the best utilization of available bandwidth.

Smart Bandwidth Limit Apply the below limit to ... - Check this box to have the bandwidth limit determined by the system automatically.

TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.

Time Schedule Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.


VVII--22--33 QQuuaalliittyy ooff SSeerrvviiccee

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page.


Item Description

General Setup Index – Display the WAN interface number link that you can edit.

Enable – Check the box to enable the QoS function for WAN interface. If it is enabled, you can configure general QoS setting for each WAN interface.

Direction –Define which traffic the QoS Control settings will apply to.

IN- apply to incoming traffic only.

OUT-apply to outgoing traffic only.

BOTH- apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Inbound/Outbound Bandwidth –Set the connecting rate of data input/output for other WAN. For example, if your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K upstream, please set 1000kbps for this box. The default value is 10000kbps.

Class 1 ~ 3 / Others –Define the ratio of bandwidth to upstream speed and bandwidth to downstream speed. There are four queues allowed for QoS control. The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. In which, the “Others” field is used for the packets which are not suitable for the three class


Item Description

rules.

Status – Display the online statistics of WAN interface.

Class Rule Set detailed settings for the selected Class.

Index – Display the class number that you can edit.

Enable - Display the status of this class rule.

QoS Class - Display the QoS class level.

Local Address - Display the local IP address for the rule.

Remote Address - Display the remote IP address for the rule.

DSCP - Display the levels of the data for processing with QoS control.

Service Type – Display detailed settings for the service type.

Add - Click it to create a class rule for QoS.

VoIP Prioritization Enable the First Priority for VoIP SIP/RTP - When this feature is enabled, the VoIP SIP/UDP packets will be sent with highest priority.

SIP UDP Port – Set a port number used for SIP.

Tag Outbound Traffic Add DSCP or Precedence Value for Class 1 to Class 3 - Check the box to add DSCP or Precedence value to Class 1 to Class 3.

This page displays the QoS settings result of the WAN interface. Click the Setup link to access into next page for the general setup of WAN interface. As to class rule, simply click the Edit link to access into next for configuration.

You can configure general setup for the WAN interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the Service Type for the Class Rule for your request.

OOnnlliinnee SSttaattiissttiiccss

Display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference. This feature is available only when the Quality of Service for WAN interface is enabled.


GGeenneerraall SSeettuupp ffoorr WWAANN IInntteerrffaaccee

Click WAN interface number link to configure the limited bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN interface.


Item Description

Enable UDP Bandwidth Control

Set the limited bandwidth ratio. This is a protection of TCP application traffic since UDP application traffic such as streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth.

Limited_bandwidth Ratio - The ratio typed here is reserved for limited bandwidth of UDP application.

Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize

The difference in bandwidth between download and upload are great in ADSL2+ environment. For the download speed might be impacted by the uploading TCP ACK, you can check this box to push ACK of upload faster to speed the network traffic.

Info

The rate of outbound/inbound must be smaller than the real bandwidth to ensure correct calculation of QoS. It is suggested to set the bandwidth value for inbound/outbound as 80% - 85% of physical network speed provided by ISP to maximize the QoS performance.

EEddiitt tthhee CCllaassss RRuullee ffoorr QQooSS

1. Class rules (Class 1 to Class 3) can be adjusted for your necessity. To add, edit or delete the class rule, please click the Add / Edit button of that one.


2. For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page.


Item Description

Enable Check this box to invoke these settings.

Hardware Acceleration

Check this box to enable the hardware acceleration when such rule is applied.

IP Version Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for this rule.

Local Address Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for the rule.


Remote Address Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on LAN/WAN) for the rule.

Address Type – Determine the address type for the source address.

For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.

For Range Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and End IP address.

For Subnet Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and Subnet Mask.

DiffServ CodePoint All the packets of data will be divided with different levels and will be processed according to the level type by the system. Please assign one of the levels of the data for processing with QoS control.

Service Type It determines the service type of the data for processing with QoS control. It can also be edited. You can choose the predefined service type from the Service Type drop down list. Those types are predefined in factory. Simply choose the one that you want for using by current QoS.

QoS Class Specify the QoS class (1, 2 or 3) for this rule.



You can set up to 20 rules and 10 service types for a Class. If you want to edit an existed rule, please click index number of the rule to open the rule edit page for modification.

RReettaagg tthhee PPaacckkeettss ffoorr IIddeennttiiffiiccaattiioonn

Packets coming from LAN IP can be retagged through QoS setting. When the packets sent out through WAN interface, all of them will be tagged with certain header and that will be easily to be identified by server on ISP.

For example, in the following illustration, the VoIP packets in LAN go into Vigor router without any header. However, when they go forward to the Server on ISP through Vigor router, all of the packets are tagged with AF (configured in Bandwidth >>QoS>>Class) automatically.


VVII--22--44 AAPPPP QQooSS

The QoS function is used to do bandwidth management for the services with certain IP or port number. However, there is no effect of bandwidth management on the service such as VNC or PPTV without fixed IP or port number.

APP QoS employs the function of APP Enforcement to detect the types of software in application layer. By combining the function of QoS (adjustment on Inbound/Outbond bandwidth and bandwidth ratio), Vigor router can perform the bandwidth management for the protocols, streaming, remote control, web HD and so on.

Click Bandwidth Management>>APP QoS to open the following page.


Item Description

Enable/Disable Click Enable to activate APP QoS function.

Click Disable to deactivate APP QoS function.

Traceable The protocol listed below is traceable by Vigor router.

Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your request.


Untraceable The protocol listed below is not easy to be traced by Vigor router.

Each tab offers different types of protocols to fit your request.

Select All Click it to select all of the protocols.

Clear All Click it to de-select all of the protocols.

Apply to all Choose one of the actions from the drop down list. It is prepared for applying to all protocols.

Apply – Click it to make the selected action be applied all of the selected protocols immediately.

Action There are many protocols which can be specified with different QoS Class.



VVII--33 HHoottssppoott WWeebb PPoorrttaall

The Hotspot Web Portal feature allows you to set up profiles so that LAN users could either be redirected to specific URLs, or be shown messages when they first connect to the Internet through the router. Users could be required to read and agree to terms and conditions, or authenticate themselves, prior to gaining access to the Internet. Other potential uses include the serving of advertisements and promotional materials, and broadcast of public service announcements.


VVII--33--11 PPrrooffiillee SSeettuupp

Select Profile Setup to create or modify Portal profiles. Up to 4 profiles can be created to meet different requirements according to LAN subnets, WLAN SSIDs, origin and destination IP addresses, etc.


Item Description

Index Click the index number link to view or update the profile settings.

Enable Check the box to enable the profile.

Comments Shows the description of the profile.

Login Mode Shows the login mode used by the profile. See the section Login Mode for details.


Applied Interface Shows the interfaces to which this profile applies.

Preview Click this button to preview the Hotspot Web Portal page that will be displayed to users.

VVII--33--11--11 LLooggiinn MMeetthhoodd There are several login methods to choose from for authenticating network clients. Each login mode will present a different web page to users when they connect to the network.

((AA)) SSkkiipp LLooggiinn,, llaannddiinngg ppaaggee oonnllyy

This mode does not perform any authentication. The user will be redirected to the landing page. The user can then leave the landing page to visit other websites.

((BB)) CClliicckk--tthhrroouugghh

The following page will be shown to the users when they first attempt to access the Internet through the router. After clicking Accept on the page, users will be directed to the landing page (defined in Captive Portal URL) and be granted access to the Internet.

((CC)) VVaarriioouuss HHoottssppoott LLooggiinn

An authentication page will appear when users attempt to access the Internet for the first time via the router. After authenticating themselves using a Facebook, Google account, PIN code, password for RADIUS sever, they will be directed to the landing page and be granted access to the Internet.

((DD)) EExxtteerrnnaall PPoorrttaall SSeerrvveerr

External RADIUS server will authenticate the users when they attempt to access the Internet for the first time via the router.

VVII--33--11--22 SStteeppss ffoorr CCoonnffiigguurriinngg aa WWeebb PPoorrttaall PPrrooffiillee

LLooggiinn MMeetthhoodd

Click the index link (e.g., #1) of the selected profile to display the following page.



Item Description

Enable this profile Check to enable this profile.

Comments Enter a brief description to identify this profile.

Portal Server

Portal Method There are four methods to be selected as for portal server.

Captive Portal URL Enter certain URL as captive portal URL.

Redirection URL It is available when External Portal Server is selected as portal method.

Enter the URL to redirect the client.

RADIUS Server It is available when External Portal Server is selected as portal method.

Specify authentication method, enable RADIUS MAC authentication


and choose MAC address format.

Login Methods

Choose Login Method

It is available when Various Hotspot Login is selected as portal method. Select and check desired login method(s)

Facebook It appears when Login with Facebook is selected as login method.

Facebook APP ID - Enter a valid Facebook developer app ID.

If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-1 How to create a Facebook App ID for Web Portal Authentication for instructions on obtaining an APP ID.

Facebook APP Secret - Enter the secret configured for the APP ID entered above.

Refer to section A-1 How to create a Facebook App ID for Web Portal Authentication for details.

Google It appears when Login with Google is selected as login method.

Google App ID - Enter a valid Google app ID.

If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-2 How to create a Google App ID for Web Portal Authentication for instructions on obtaining an APP ID.

Google App Secret - Enter the secret configured for the APP ID entered above.

Refer to section A-2 How to create a Google APP ID for Web Portal Authentication for details.

SMS Provider It appears when Receive PIN via SMS is selected as login method.

Receiving PIN via SMS Provider - Select the SMS Provider used to send PIN notifications SMS providers are configured in Objects Setting >> SMS / Mail Service Object.

Radius Server It appears when Login with RADIUS is selected as login method.

Authentication Method – Choose an external RADIUS server for authenticating web portal client.

RADIUS MAC Authentication – Check Enable to activate user authentication by MAC address.

MAC Address Format – Select a desirable format for MAC address.

Save and Next Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page.

Cancel Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the next page.

If you have chosen Skip Login, landing page only or External Portal Server as the portal method, skip to step 4 Whitelisting below.

Otherwise, proceed to configure the login page by following steps 2 and 3.


BBaacckkggrroouunndd

If you have selected a Login Mode that requires authentication, select a background for the login page.


Item Description

Choose Login Background

Select either Color Background or Image Background as the login page background scheme.

Browser Tab Title Enter the text to be shown as the webpage title in the browser.


Logo Image The DrayTek Logo will be displayed by default. However, you can enter HTML text or upload an image to replace the default logo.

Login Method Background Color

Select the background color of the login panel from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color.

Opacity (10 ~ 100) Available when Image Background is selected. Set the opacity of the background image.

Background Image Available when Image Background is selected. Click Browse… to select an image file (.JPG or .PNG format), then click Upload to upload it to the router.


Cancel Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile summary page.

If you have selected Skip Login, landing page only or External Portal Server as the portal method, proceed to Step 4 Whitelist Setting; otherwise, continue to Step 3 Login Page Setup.


LLooggiinn PPaaggee SSeettuupp

In this step you can configure settings for the login page.

CClliicckk TThhrroouugghh

This section describes the Login Page setup if you have selected Click Through as the Login Method.


Item Description

Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.

Terms and Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions


Conditions Description

hyperlink text.

Terms and Conditions Content

Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up window.

Accept Button Description

Enter the text to be displayed on the accept button

Accept Button Color Select the color of the accept button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color.




VVaarriioouuss HHoottssppoott LLooggiinn

This section describes the Login Page setup step if you have selected Various Hotspot Login the login method. You will see only settings that are relevant to the selected login method(s).

Settings that are common to Facebook, Google, PIN, and RADIUS authentication are:

Item Description

Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.

Terms and Conditions Description

Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions hyperlink text.

Terms and Conditions Content

Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up window.


If you have selected Facebook login, the setting will appear:

Item Description

Facebook Login Description

Enter the text to be displayed on the Facebook login button.

If you have selected Google login, the setting will appear:

Item Description

Google Login Description

Enter the text to be displayed on the Google login button.


If you have selected PIN login, these settings will appear:

Item Description

Hint Message for PIN Enter the text used to suggest users to choose SMS authentication.

Receiving PIN via SMS Description

Enter the text to be displayed on the button that the user clicks to receive an SMS PIN.

Receiving PIN via SMS Content

Enter the message to be sent by SMS to inform the user of the PIN. The PIN variable is specified by <PIN> within the message.

Enter PIN Description

Enter message to be displayed in the PIN textbox to prompt the user to enter the PIN.

Submit Button Description

Enter the text to be displayed on the submit PIN button

Submit Button Color Select the color of the submit button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color.


If you have selected RADIUS account login, these settings will appear:

Item Description

Hint Message for RADIUS

Enter the text used to suggest users to choose RADIUS authentication.

RADIUS Account Description

Enter a brief description for reminding the user about the account.

RADIUS Password Description

Enter a brief description for reminding the user about the password.

Login Button Description

Enter the text to be displayed on the login button.

Login Button Color Select the color of the login button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color.

And finally, the save and cancel buttons are always displayed.

Item Description




22nndd--ssttaaggee PPaaggee ffoorr PPIINN LLooggiinn

If you have selected PIN Login as the login method, you will also need to configure the page that is displayed to users when they request a PIN.


Item Description

Back Button Description

Enter text for the label of the hyperlink to return to the previous page.

PIN Code Message Enter text to be displayed as the body text on the page.

Default Country Select the default country code to be displayed using the dropdown


Code menu.

Enter Mobile Number Description

Enter message to be displayed in the mobile number textbox to prompt the user to enter the mobile number.

Send Button Description

Enter the label text of the send button.

Send Button Color Select the color of the send button from the predefined color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview to preview the selected color.

Send Succeeded Message

Enter text to be displayed to notify the user after the PIN has been sent.




WWhhiitteelliisstt SSeettttiinngg

In this step you can configure the whitelist settings. Users are allowed to send and receive traffic that satisfies whitelist settings.


Item Description

NAT Rules To prevent web portal settings from conflicting with NAT rules resulting in unexpected behavior, select the NAT rules that are allowed to bypass the web portal. Hosts listed in selected NAT rules can always access the Internet without being intercepted by the web portal.

Dest Domain Enter up to 30 destination domains that are allowed to be accessed.

Dest IP Enter up to 30 destination IP addresses that are allowed to be accessed.

Dest Port Enter up to 30 destination protocols and ports that are allowed through the router.

Source IP Enter up to 30 source IP addresses that are allowed through the router.




MMoorree OOppttiioonnss

In this step you can configure advanced options for the Hotspot Web Portal.


Item Description

Quota Management

Quota Policy Profile Choose a policy profile to apply to web portal client.

Web Portal Options

HTTPS Redirection If this option is selected, unauthenticated clients accessing HTTPS


websites will be redirected to the login page, but the browser may alert the user of certificate errors. If this option is not selected, attempts to access to HTTPS website will time out without redirection.

Captive Portal Detection

If this option is selected, the web portal page is triggered automatically when an unauthenticated client tries to access the Internet. This function is not available when the Login Mode is Social Login, as the web portal page may not be shown correctly due to the limitations of the operating system’s built-in Captive Portal Detection.

Landing Page After Authentication

Fixed URL Specifies the webpage that will be displayed after the user has successfully authenticated.

The user will be redirected to the specified URL. This could be used for displaying advertisements to users, such as guests requesting wireless Internet access in a hotel.

User Requested URL The user will be redirected to the URL they initially requested.

Bulletin Message The message configured here will be briefly shown for a few seconds to the user.

Default Message – This button is enabled when Bulletin Message is selected. Click to load the default text into the bulletin message textbox.

Applied Interfaces

Subnet The current Hotspot Web Portal profile will be in effect for the selected subnets.

WLAN The current Hotspot Web Portal profile will be in effect for the selected WLAN SSIDs.

Finish Click to complete the configuration.



VVII--33--22 QQuuoottaa MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

The system administrator can specify bandwidth and sessions quota which is only applicable to the web portal clients.

Settings configured in Quota Management will override the policies set in Bandwidth Management>>Bandwidth Limit and Bandwidth Management>>Limit.


Item Description

Bandwidth Limit Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth Management>>Bandwidth Limit.

Session Limit Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth Management>>Session Limit.

Quota Policy Profile Add - Create up to 20 policy profiles in such page.


To create a new quotal policy profile, click Add to open the followining page.


Item Description

Profile Name Enter a name for a new profile.

Account Validity Set a period of valid time for the client accessing Internet via web portal.

Expired Time After the First Login – Set the days, hours, and minutes. After expired time, Vigor router will block the client to access into network/Internet.

Idle Timeout – After checking the box, Vigor router will terminate the network connection if no activity for the user account after the time configured here.

Device Control Set the number of devices that each account can control, and specify the time restriction for the client accessing Internet via web portal.

Decices Allowed per account – Use the drop-down list to select a number. Each account allows the number of devices (defined here) for accessing into network.

Reconnection Time Restriction – For each account, Vigor router can set a time for network connection

At …. Everyday – Set the time to block the same client from reconnecting Vigor router before the time set here.

Hours.. min – Set the time period to block the same client from reconnecting Vigor router.


Bandwidth and Session Limit

Bandwidth Limit – Check the box to configure bandwidth limit for web portal client.

Download/Upload Limit – Set a value.

Session Limit- Check the box to configure session limit for web portal client.




AA--11 HHooww ttoo aallllooww uusseerrss llooggiinn ttoo VViiggoorr’’ss HHoottssppoott wwiitthh tthheeiirr ssoocciiaall mmeeddiiaa aaccccoouunnttss

((ee..gg..,, FFaacceebbooookk && GGooooggllee)) Vigor Router supports Hotspot Web Portal function. The network administrator can set Vigor Router as a Hotspot provider with web authentication and allow users to log in with their social media accounts, such as Facebook and Google. We demonstrate how to set up the hotspot web portal with Facebook login in the following paragraphs.

VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr SSeettuupp

1. Make sure the router is connected to the Internet.

2. Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available index.


3. Enter the values as the following figure.

(a) Click Enable this profile.

(b) Enter the comments.

(c) Select Various Hotspot Login for Portal Method.

(d) Choose Login with Facebook or Login with Google as Login Method.

If Login with Facebook is selected, the protocol of the Captive Portal URL need to be changed to HTTPS instead of HTTP because Facebook force to use HTTPS URL in their policy.

(e) Enter the APP ID and secret.

(f) Click Save and Next.


4. Choose the Color Background, customize the information a logo color, and click Save and Next.

You can click the Step Icon on the top of the page to go to the step you want. The router will save your setting automatically.


Or choose the Image Background, customize the information and background image, and click Save and Next.


5. Customize the descriptions on the login page, then click Save and Next.

6. You can set the Whitelist for the profile here to allow specific clients to access the internet or certain websites can be visited without login.


7. Set up the Expired Time After Activation and Landing Page After Activation that Hotspot clients will see after they login successfully. Finally, select the interfaces to which you would like this hotspot profile apply to, then click Finish to save the setting.

8. Then the Hotspot setup is finished. You may click Preview to check the login page.


HHoottssppoott CClliieennttss LLooggiinn

9. Now, when clients connect to the selected router interface, and try to access internet, they will be redirected to "portal.draytek.com".

Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot verify server identity, the clients would need to tap "Continue" before they can proceed to portal.draytek.com.

The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this domain name is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS to make sure the domain name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP.

10. Tap on a login method, and it will open the social media login page. Enter the social media accounts and password to log in.


11. If the credentials are correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page and be able to access the Internet afterward.

UUsseerr IInnffoorrmmaattiioonn

Network administrator can plug the USB disk to router, to record the basic information of the users who connect to the Wi-Fi and login with their social media accounts. The users' basic information will be listed on Hotspot Web Portal >> Users Information page.


AA--22 HHooww ttoo aallllooww hhoottssppoott cclliieennttss ttoo ggeett llooggiinn PPIINN ccooddee vviiaa SSMMSS?? Since 3.8.4.3 version firmware, Vigor Router can act as a hotspot gateway and provide internet access only to the authenticated clients. Network Administrator may set up the router to allow hotspot client to get the login PIN code from an SMS message. This note is going to demonstrate how to set up Vigor Router as a hotspot gateway and be able to send the PIN code to clients by SMS messages.

VViiggoorr RRoouutteerr SSeettuupp

1. Make sure the router is connected to the Internet.

2. Create an SMS Object to send SMS messages. Go to Objects Setting >> SMS Service Object, and click on an available profile.


3. Enter the Service Provider details, and click OK to apply.

4. Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available profile.

5. Enable the profile, give a comment, and choose “PIN Code Login”. Then click Next.


6. Choose a login page design, customize the details, and click Next.

7. Edit the message on the login page, and click Next.

8. Edit the details for SMS settings, then click Next.


9. Edit the landing page, choose the interfaces to which the SMS login should apply, and then click Finish.

10. Now, the hotspot settings are applied to the selected interfaces. You may click Preview to check how the login page looks.


HHoottssppoott CClliieenntt LLooggiinn

11. If the client connected to the selected interface of the router and try to open a webpage, they will be redirected to hotspot login page. If they do not have a password yet, they can click on the button to get a password.


Info

Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot verify server identity, the clients would need to tap "continue" before they can proceed to portal.draytek.com.

The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this domain name is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS to make sure the domain name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP.

12. Enter the mobile phone number to receive the SMS message.


13. The number will get a message about the password.

14. Enter the password on the login page, and click Login.


15. If the password is correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page, and after that, they will be able to surf the Internet.


VVII--44 CCeennttrraall MMaannaaggeemmeenntt ((AAPP))

Vigor2765 can manage the access points supporting AP management via Central AP Management.

AAPP MMaapp

AP Map is helpful to determine the best location for VigorAP in a room. A floor plan of a room is required to be uploaded first. By dragging and dropping available VigorAP icon from the list to the floor plan, the placement with the best wireless coverage will be clearly indicated through simulated signal strength

AAPP MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the access point.

LLooaadd BBaallaannccee ffoorr AAPP

The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain access points.



VVII--44--11 SSttaattuuss

This page displays current status (online, offline or SSID hidden, IP address, encryption, channel, version, password and etc.) of the access points managed by Vigor router.


Item Description

Index Click the index number link for viewing the settings summary of the access point.

Device Name The name of the AP managed by Vigor router will be displayed here.

IP Address Display the IP address of the access point.

SSID Display the SSID configured for the access point(s) connected to Vigor2765.

Ch. Display the channel used by the access point.

STA List Display the number of wireless clients (stations) connecting to the access point.

In which, 0/64 means that up to 64 clients are allowed to connect to the access point. But, now no one connects to the access point.

The number displayed on the left side means 2.4GHz; and the number displayed on the right side means 5GHz.

AP List Display the number of the AP around the device.

Uptime Display the duration of the AP powered up.

Version Display the firmware version used by the access point.


Password Vigor2765 can get related information of the access point by accessing into the web user interface of the access point.

This button is used to modify the logging password of the connected access point.


VVII--44--22 WWLLAANN PPrrooffiillee

WLAN profile is used to apply to a selected access point. It is very convenient for the administrator to configure the setting for access point without opening the web user interface of the access point.

Click the number link of the selected profile to modify the content of the profile. Available settings are explained as follows:

Item Description

Profile There are five WLAN profiles offered to be configured. Simply click the index number link to open the modification page.

Name Display the name of the profile.

The default profile cannot be renamed.

Main SSID Display the SSID configured by such wireless profile.

Security Display the security mode selected by such wireless profile.

Multi-SSID Enable means multiple SSIDs (more than one) are active.

Disable means only SSID1 is active.

WLAN ACL Display the name of the access control list.

Rate Ctrl Display the upload and/or download transmission rate.

Clone It can copy settings from an existing WLAN profile to another WLAN profile.

First, you have to check the box of the existing profile as the original profile. Second, click Clone. The following dialog will appear.

Third, choose the profile index to accept the settings from the original profile. Forth, type a new name in the field of Renamed as. Last, click Apply to save the settings on this dialog.

The new profile has been created with the settings coming from the original profile.

To AP Click it to apply the selected wireless profile to the specified Access Point.


Simply choose the device you want from Existing Device field. Click >> to move the device to Selected Device field. Then, click OK.

The selected WLAN profile will be applied to the selected access point immediately. Later the access point will reboot.

To Local WLAN Profile configured in this page is specified for VigorAP connected to Vigor router.

If required, these settings also can be applied to Vigor router. Select and check one of wireless profiles and click this button to apply the settings onto the WI-Fi wireless settings configured for such Vigor router.


HHooww ttoo eeddiitt tthhee wwiirreelleessss LLAANN pprrooffiillee??

1. Select the WLAN profile (index number 1 to 2) you want to edit.

2. Click the index number link to display the following page.

Info

The function of Auto Provision is available for the default WLAN profile.


3. After finished the general settings configuration, click Next to open the following page for 2.4G wireless security settings.


4. After finished the above web page configuration, click Next to open the following page for 5G wireless security settings.

5. When you finished the above web page configuration, click Finish to exit and return to the first page. The modified WLAN profile will be shown on the web page.


VVII--44--33 AAPP MMaaiinntteennaannccee

Vigor router can execute configuration backup, configuration restoration, firmware upgrade and remote reboot for the APs managed by the router. It is very convenient for the administrator to process maintenance without accessing into the web user interface of the access point.

Info

Config Backup can be performed to one AP at one time. Others functions (e.g., Config Restore, Firmware Upgrade, Remote Reboot can be performed to more than one AP at one time by using Vigor2765.


Item Description

Action There are four actions provided by Vigor router to manage the access points.

Vigor router can backup the configuration of the selected AP, restore the configuration for the selected AP, perform the firmware upgrade of the selected AP, reboot the selected AP remotely and perform the factory reset for the selected AP.

File/Path Specify the file and the path which will be used to perform Config Restore or Firmware Upgrade.

Select Device Display all the available access points managed by Vigor router. Simply click << or >> to move the device(s) between


Select Device and Selected Device areas.

Selected Device Display the access points that will be applied by such function after clicking OK.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to perform the action.

VVII--44--44 TTrraaffffiicc GGrraapphh

Click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose one of the managed Access Points, LAN-A or LAN-B, daily or weekly for viewing data transmission chart. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.

The horizontal axis represents time; the vertical axis represents the transmission rate (in kbps).

Info

Enabling/Disabling such function will also enable/disable the External Devices function.


VVII--44--55 LLooaadd BBaallaannccee

The parameters configured for Load Balance can help to distribute the traffic for all of the access points registered to Vigor router. Thus, the bandwidth will not be occupied by certain access points.


Item Description

AP Load Balance It is used to determine the operation mode when the system detects overload between access points.

Disable – Disable the function of AP load balance.

By Station Number –The operation of load balance will be executed based on the station number configured in this page. It is used to limit the allowed number for the station connecting to the access point. The purpose is to prevent lots of stations connecting to access point at the same time and causing traffic unbalanced. Please define the required station number for WLAN (2.4GHz) and WLAN (5GHz) separately. By Traffic – The operation of load balance will executed according to the traffic configuration in this page.

By Station Number or Traffic - The operation of load balance will be executed based on the station number or the traffic configuration.

Station Number Threshold

Set the number of stations as a threshold to activate AP load balance.


Traffic Threshold Upload Limit –Use the drop down list to specify the traffic limit for uploading.

Download Limit – Use the drop down list to specify the traffic limit for downloading.

Action When Threshold Exceeded

Stop accepting new connections – When the number of stations or the traffic reaches the threshold defined in this web page, Vigor router will stop any new connection asked by other access point.

Dissociate existing station by longest idel time - When the access point is overload (e.g., reaching the limit of station number or limit of network traffic), it will terminate the network connection of the client’s station which is idle for a longest time.

Dissociate existing station by worst signal strength if it is less than - When the access point is overload (e.g., reaching the limit of station number or limit of network traffic), it will terminate the network connection of the client’s station with the weakest signal.

Choose to Apply The settings configured for Load Balance can be applied to all of AP devices or selected AP devices.



VVII--55 CCeennttrraall MMaannaaggeemmeenntt ((EExxtteerrnnaall DDeevviicceess))

Vigor router can be used to connect with many types of external devices. In order to control or manage the external devices conveniently, open External Devices to make detailed configuration.


Item Description

External Device Syslog Check this box to display information of the detected device on Syslog.

External Device Auto Discovery

Check this box to detect the external device automatically and display on this page.

From this web page, check the box of External Device Auto Discovery. Later, all the available devices will be displayed in this page with icons and corresponding information. You can change the device name if required or remove the information for off-line device whenever you want.

When you finished the configuration, click OK to save it.

Info

Only DrayTek products can be detected by this function.


PPaarrtt VVIIII OOtthheerrss

Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.

USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications.


VVIIII--11 OObbjjeeccttss SSeettttiinnggss

Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.



VVIIII--11--11 IIPP OObbjjeecctt

For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group for applying it. For example, all the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address)

You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.



Item Description


Index Display the profile number that you can configure.

Name Display the name of the object profile.

Address Display the IP address configured for the object profile.

Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the IP object.

To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:

1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.

2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:



Item Description

Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Interface Choose a proper interface.

For example, the Direction setting in Edit Filter Rule will ask you specify IP or IP range for WAN or LAN/RT/VPN or any IP address. If you choose LAN/RT/VPN as the Interface here, and choose LAN/RT/VPN as the direction setting in Edit Filter Rule, then all the IP addresses specified with LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN interface will be opened for you to choose in Edit Filter Rule page.

Address Type Determine the address type for the IP address.

Select Single Address if this object contains one IP address only.

Select Range Address if this object contains several IPs within a range.

Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for IP address.

Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address.

Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.

MAC Address Type the MAC address of the network card which will be controlled.

Start IP Address Type the start IP address for Single Address type.

End IP Address Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is selected.

Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.

Invert Selection If it is checked, all the IP addresses except the ones listed above will be applied later while it is chosen.


4. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. Below is an example of IP objects settings.


VVIIII--11--22 IIPP GGrroouupp

This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group.


Item Description



Name Display the name of the group profile.

Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the IP group object.






Item Description


Interface Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP objects with the specified interface.

Available IP Objects All the available IP objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box.

Selected IP Objects Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.


VVIIII--11--33 IIPPvv66 OObbjjeecctt

You can set up to 64 sets of IPv6 Objects with different conditions.



Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the IPv6 object.






Item Description


Address Type Determine the address type for the IPv6 address. Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address only.

Select Range Address if this object contains several IPv6s within a range.

Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for IPv6 address.

Select Any Address if this object contains any IPv6 address.

Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.

Mac Address Type the MAC address of the network card which will be controlled.

Start IP Address Type or click Select to choose the start IP address for Single Address type.

End IP Address Type or click Select to choose the end IP address if the Range Address type is selected.

Prefix Length Type the number (e.g., 64) for the prefix length of IPv6 address.

Invert Selection If it is checked, all the IPv6 addresses except the ones listed above will be applied later while it is chosen.

3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.


VVIIII--11--44 IIPPvv66 GGrroouupp

This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group.


Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the IPv6 object.






Item Description


Available IPv6 Objects

All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box.

Selected IPv6 Objects Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box.


VVIIII--11--55 SSeerrvviiccee TTyyppee OObbjjeecctt

You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions.


Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the service type object.






Item Description


Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to.

Source/Destination Port

Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available for TCP/UDP protocol. It can be ignored for other protocols. The filter rule will filter out any port number.

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this profile.






VVIIII--11--66 SSeerrvviiccee TTyyppee GGrroouupp

This page allows you to bind several service types into one group.


Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the service type group object.



1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details.



Item Description


Available Service Type Objects

All the available service objects that you have added on Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this box.

Selected Service Type Objects

Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.



VVIIII--11--77 KKeeyywwoorrdd OObbjjeecctt

You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web Content Filter Profile.


Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the keyword object.






Item Description

Name Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Contents Type the content for such profile. For example, type gambling as Contents. When you browse the webpage, the page with gambling information will be watched out and be passed/blocked based on the configuration on Firewall settings.



VVIIII--11--88 KKeeyywwoorrdd GGrroouupp

This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile.


Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the keyword group object.






Item Description

Name Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.

Available Keyword Objects

You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page within one keyword group. All the available Keyword objects that you have created will be shown in this box.

Selected Keyword Objects Click button to add the selected Keyword objects in

this box.


VVIIII--11--99 FFiillee EExxtteennssiioonn OObbjjeecctt

This page allows you to set eight profiles which will be applied in CSM>>URL Content Filter. All the files with the extension names specified in these profiles will be processed according to the chosen action.


Item Description




Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the file extension object.



1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details.



Item Description

Profile Name Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 7 characters.

3. Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be processed in the router. Finally, click OK to save this profile.


VVIIII--11--1100 SSMMSS//MMaaiill SSeerrvviiccee OObbjjeecctt

SSMMSS SSeerrvviiccee OObbjjeecctt

This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert Service.


Item Description



Profile Display the name for such SMS profile.

SMS Provider Display the service provider which offers SMS service.

Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the SMS service object.


1. Click the SMS Provider tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.




Item Description

Profile Name Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.

Service Provider Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which offers SMS service.

Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Quota Type the number of the credit that you purchase from the service provider chosen above.

Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the standard route.

Sending Interval To avoid quota being exhausted soon, type time interval for sending the SMS.



CCuussttoommiizzeedd SSMMSS SSeerrvviiccee

Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index 10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed.

You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details.


Item Description

Profile Name Display the name of this profile. It cannot be modified.

Service Provider Type the website of the service provider.

Type the URL string in the box under the filed of Service Provider. You have to contact your SMS provider to obtain the exact URL string.


Server Response Enter the string.

Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS provider.


Quota Type the total number of the messages that the router will send out.

Sending Interval Type the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.


MMaaiill SSeerrvviiccee OObbjjeecctt



Item Description



Profile Display the name for such mail server profile.

Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the mail service object.



1. Click the Mail Server tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.



Item Description

Profile Name Type a name for such mail service profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.

SMTP Server Type the IP address of the mail server.

SMTP Port Type the port number for SMTP server.

Sender Address Type the e-mail address of the sender.

Use SSL Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.

Authentication The mail server must be authenticated with the correct username and password to have the right of sending message out. Check the box to enable the function.

Username – Type a name for authentication. The maximum length of the name you can set is 31 characters.

Password – Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of the password you can set is 31 characters.

Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out.



VVIIII--11--1111 NNoottiiffiiccaattiioonn OObbjjeecctt


You can set an object with different monitoring situation.


1. Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.



Item Description

Profile Name Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

Category Display the types that will be monitored.

Status Display the status for the category. You can check the box you want to be monitored.



VVIIII--11--1122 SSttrriinngg OObbjjeecctt

This page allows you to set several profiles of string object.


Item Description

Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all of the settings in this page.

Add Click it to create a new string object profile.

Objects Backup/Restore Click it to backup or restore the string object.

After creating a new string profile, the new added profile will be shown as follows:

Item Description

Index Click it to open the following page for modifying an existed string object.

String Display the name of a string profile.

Clear Choose the string that you want to remove. Then check the box and click Clear to delete the selected string profile.

Add Click it to create a new string object profile.

Below shows an example to apply string object (in Route Policy):


VVIIII--11--1133 CCoouunnttrryy OObbjjeecctt

The country object profile can determine which country/countries shall be blocked by the Vigor router’s Firewall.

The country object, by grouping IP addresses for multiple countries, can be applied by other functions such as router policy destination (refer to the following figure for example).


1. Open Object Setting>>Country Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.




Item Description

Name Type a name for such profile. The maximum length of the name you can set is 15 characters.

Available Country /

Selected Country

Select any country from Available Country. Click >> to move the selected country and place on Selected Country.

Note that one country profile can contain 1 up to 16 countries.



VVIIII--11--1144 OObbjjeeccttss BBaacckkuupp//RReessttoorree


Item Description

Backup Usually, the IP objects can be created one by one through the web page of Objects>>IP Object. However, to a user who wants to save more time in bulk creating IP objects, a quick method is offered by Vigor router to modify the IP objects with a single file, a CSV file.

All of the IP objects (or the template) can be exported as a file by clicking Download. Then the user can open the CSV file through Microsoft Excel and modify all the IP objects at the same time.

Select All - Check the box to select all of the items listed below.

Backup the current IP Objects with a CSV file – Click it to backup current IP objecsts as a CSV file. Such file can be restored for future use.

Download the default CSV template to edit – After clicking it, press Download to store the default CSM template (a table without any input data) to your hard disk.

Download – Download the CSV file from Vigor router and store in your hard disk.

Restore IP Object Select – Click it to specify a predefined CSV file.

Restore – Import the selected CSV file onto Vigor router.



AA--11 HHooww ttoo SSeenndd aa NNoottiiffiiccaattiioonn ttoo SSppeecciiffiieedd PPhhoonnee NNuummbbeerr vviiaa SSMMSS SSeerrvviiccee iinn

WWAANN DDiissccoonnnneeccttiioonn Follow the steps listed below:

1. Log into the web user interface of Vigor router.

2. Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Server Object to get the following page.

Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider. If the SMS service provider is not on the list, you can configure Index 9 and Index 10 to add the new service provider to Vigor router.

3. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure the SMS Provider setting. In the following page, type the username and password and set the quota that the router can send the message out.


4. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting.

5. Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the notification.

6. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending the SMS. In the following page, type the name of the profile and check the Disconnected and Reconnected boxes for WAN to work in concert with the topic of this paper.


7. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the configuration of the notification object profile setting.

8. Now, open Application >> SMS / Mail Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose SMS Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, type the phone number in the field of Recipient (the one who will receive the SMS).

9. Click OK to save the settings. Later, if one of the WAN connections fails in your router, the system will send out SMS to the phone number specified. If the router has only one WAN interface, the system will send out SMS to the phone number while reconnecting the WAN interface successfully.


RReemmaarrkk:: HHooww tthhee ccuussttoommiizzee tthhee SSMMSS PPrroovviiddeerr

Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the web page, type the URL string of the SMS provider and type the username and password. After clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to specify for sending SMS out.


VVIIII--22 UUSSBB AApppplliiccaattiioonn

USB device connected on Vigor router can be regarded as a server or WAN interface. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB storage disk with different applications. After setting the configuration in USB Application, you can type the IP address of the Vigor router and username/password created in USB Application>>USB User Management on the client software. Then, the client can use the FTP site (USB storage disk) or share the SMB service through Vigor router.

Info

USB ports on Vigor router are allowed to connect to USB modem. Models of the modems supported by Vigor router can be seen from USB Application>>Modem Support List. For network connection via USB modem, refer to WAN>>Internet Access and WAN>>General Setup for detailed information.



VVIIII--22--11 UUSSBB GGeenneerraall SSeettttiinnggss

This page will determine the number of concurrent FTP connection, default charset for FTP server and enable SMB service. At present, the Vigor router can support USB storage disk with formats of FAT16 and FAT32 only. Therefore, before connecting the USB storage disk into the Vigor router, please make sure the memory format for the USB storage disk is FAT16 or FAT32. It is recommended for you to use FAT32 for viewing the filename completely (FAT16 cannot support long filename).


Item Description

General Settings Simultaneous FTP Connections - This field is used to specify the quantity of the FTP sessions. The router allows up to 6 FTP sessions connecting to USB storage disk at one time.

Default Charset - At present, Vigor router supports four types of character sets. Default Charset is for English based file name.


SMB File Sharing Service Click Enable to invoke SMB file sharing service via the router.

Access Mode LAN Only – Users coming from internet cannot connect to the SMB server of the router.

LAN And WAN - Both LAN and WAN users can access SMB server of the router.

NetBios Name Service For the NetBios service of USB storage disk, you have to specify a workgroup name and a host name. A workgroup name must not be the same as the host name. The workgroup name can have as many as 15 characters and the host name can have as many as 23 characters. Both them cannot contain any of the following--- ; : " < > * + = \ | ?.

Workgroup Name – Type a name for the workgroup.

Host Name – Type the host name for the router.

Printer Server Enable – Click it to make Vigor router act as a printer server (with USB printer attached).


VVIIII--22--22 UUSSBB UUsseerr MMaannaaggeemmeenntt

This page allows you to set profiles for FTP/SMB users. Any user who wants to access into the USB storage disk must type the same username and password configured in this page. Before adding or modifying settings in this page, please insert a USB storage disk first. Otherwise, an error message will appear to warn you.


Click index number to access into configuration page.


Item Description

Enable Activate this profile (account) for FTP service or SMB file sharing service. Later, the user can use the username specified in this page to login into FTP server.

Username Type the username for FTP/SMB users for accessing into FTP server (USB storage disk). Be aware that users cannot access into USB storage disk in anonymity. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the username specified here for accessing into USB storage disk. The length of the name is limited to 11 characters.


Note: “Admin” could not be typed here as username, for the word is specified for accessing into web pages of Vigor router only. Also, it is reserved for FTP firmware upgrade usage.

Note: FTP Passive mode is not supported by Vigor Router.

Please disable the mode on the FTP client.

Password Type the password for FTP/SMB users for accessing FTP server. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the password specified here for accessing into USB storage disk. The length of the password is limited to 11 characters.

Confirm Password Type the password again to make confirmation.

Home Folder It determines the folder for the client to access into. The user can enter a directory name in this field. Then, after clicking OK, the router will create the specific/new folder in the USB storage disk. In addition, if the user types “/” here, he/she can access into all of the disk folders and files in USB storage disk.

Note: When write protect status for the USB storage disk is ON, you cannot type any new folder name in this field. Only “/” can be used in such case.

You can click to open the following dialog to add any new folder which can be specified as the Home Folder.

Access Rule It determines the authority for such profile. Any user, who uses such profile for accessing into USB storage disk, must follow the rule specified here.

File – Check the items (Read, Write and Delete) for such profile.

Directory –Check the items (List, Create and Remove) for such profile.

Before you click OK, you have to insert a USB storage disk into the USB interface of the Vigor router. Otherwise, you cannot save the configuration.


VVIIII--22--33 FFiillee EExxpplloorreerr

File Explorer offers an easy way for users to view and manage the content of USB storage disk connected on Vigor router.

After inserting a USB, the following page will be shown on the screen.


Item Description

Refresh Click this icon to refresh files list.

Back Click this icon to return to the upper directory.

Create Click this icon to add a new folder.

Current Path Display current folder.

Upload Click this button to upload the selected file to the USB storage disk. The uploaded file in the USB diskette can be shared for other user through FTP.


VVIIII--22--44 UUSSBB DDeevviiccee SSttaattuuss

This page is to monitor the status for USB device connecting to Vigor router. In addition, the status of the USB modem or USB printer or USB sensor connecting to Vigor router can be checked from such page. If you want to remove the storage disk from USB port in router, please click Disconnect USB Disk first. And then, remove the USB device later.


Item Description

Connection Status If there is no USB device connected to Vigor router, “No Disk Connected” will be shown here.

Disk Capacity It displays the total capacity of the USB storage disk.

Free Capacity It displays the free space of the USB storage disk. Click Refresh at any time to get new status for free capacity.

Index It displays the number of the client which connects to FTP server.

IP Address It displays the IP address of the user’s host which connects to the FTP server.

Username It displays the username that user uses to login to the FTP server.

When you insert USB device into the Vigor router, the system will start to find out such device within several seconds.


VVIIII--22--55 TTeemmppeerraattuurree SSeennssoorr

A USB Thermometer is now available. It complements your installed DrayTek router installations which will help you monitor the server or data communications room environment and notify you if the server room or data communications room is overheating.

During summer in particular, it is important to ensure that your server or data communications equipment are not overheating due to cooling system failures.

The inclusion of a USB thermometer in compatible Vigor routers will continuously monitor the temperature of its environment. When a pre-determined threshold is reached you will be alerted by either an email or SMS so you can undertake appropriate action.

TTeemmppeerraattuurree SSeennssoorr SSeettttiinnggss


Item Description

Display Settings Temperature Calibration - Type a value used for correcting the temperature error.

Temperature Unit - Choose the display unit of the temperature. There are two types for you to choose.

Alarm Settings Enable Syslog Alarm - The temperature log will be recorded on Syslog if it is enabled.

Upper temperature limit/Lower temperature limit - Type the upper limit and lower limit for the system to send out temperature alert.


TTeemmppeerraattuurree CChhaarrtt

Below shows an example of temperature graph:

VVIIII--22--66 MMooddeemm SSuuppppoorrtt LLiisstt

Such page provides the information about the brand name and model name of the USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.


VVIIII--22--77 SSMMBB CClliieenntt SSuuppppoorrtt LLiisstt

SMB Client Support List provides the test status information for applications with file sharing operated under different platforms.



AA--11 HHooww ccaann II ggeett tthhee ffiilleess ffrroomm UUSSBB ssttoorraaggee ddeevviiccee ccoonnnneeccttiinngg ttoo VViiggoorr rroouutteerr??

Files on USB storage device can be reviewed by opening USB Applicaiton>>File Explorer. If it is necessary for you to delete, copy files on the device or write, paste files to the devcie, it must be done through SMB server or FTP server.

SMB service is based on the original USB FTP service. You will need to setup USB FTP first. We would like to give brief instructions on USB FTP setup here.

1. Plug the USB device to the USB port on the router. Open USB Application>>USB Device Status. Make sure Disk Connected appears on the Connection Status as the figure shown below:

2. Then, please open USB Application >> USB General Settings to enable SMB service.


3. Setup a user account for the FTP service by using USB Application >>USB User Management. Click index #1 link, and click Enable to enable FTP/SMB User account. Here we add a new account "user1" and assign authorities “Read”, “Write” and “List” to it.

4. Click OK to save the configuration.

5. Make sure the FTP service is running properly. Please open a browser and type ftp://192.168.1.1. Use the account "user1" to login.

ftp://192.168.1.1/�


6. When the following screen appears, it means the FTP service is running properly.

7. Return to USB Application >> USB Disk Status. The information for FTP server will be shown as below.

Now, users in LAN of Vigor2765 can access into the USB storage device by typing ftp://192.168.1.1 on any browser. They can add or remove files / directories, depending on the Access Rule for FTP account settings in USB Application >>USB User Management.


PPaarrtt VVIIIIII TTrroouubblleesshhoooottiinngg

This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration


VVIIIIII--11 DDiiaaggnnoossttiiccss

This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to check your basic installation status stage by stage.

Checking if the hardware status is OK or not.

Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not.

Pinging the router from your computer.

Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.

Backing to factory default setting if necessary.

If all above stages are done and the router still cannot run normally, it is the time for you to contact your dealer or DrayTek technical support for advanced help.



Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router.

VVIIIIII--11--11 DDiiaall--oouutt TTrriiggggeerriinngg

Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.


Item Description

Decoded Format It shows the source IP address (local), destination IP (remote) address, the protocol and length of the package.

Refresh Click it to reload the page.


VVIIIIII--11--22 RRoouuttiinngg TTaabbllee

Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page.


Item Description



VVIIIIII--11--33 AARRPP CCaacchhee TTaabbllee

Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address.


Item Description



VVIIIIII--11--44 IIPPvv66 NNeeiigghhbboouurr TTaabbllee

The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6 address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.

Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page.


Item Description



VVIIIIII--11--55 DDHHCCPP TTaabbllee

The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.

Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page.


Item Description

Index It displays the connection item number.

IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified PC.

MAC Address It displays the MAC address for the specified PC that DHCP assigned IP address for it.

Leased Time It displays the leased time of the specified PC.

HOST ID It displays the host ID name of the specified PC.



VVIIIIII--11--66 NNAATT SSeessssiioonnss TTaabbllee

Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page.


Item Description

Private IP:Port It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC.

#Pseudo Port It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT.

Peer IP:Port It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote host.

Interface It displays the representing number for different interface.



VVIIIIII--11--77 DDNNSS CCaacchhee TTaabbllee

Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page.

The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS Cache Table.


Item Description

Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.


When an entry’s TTL is larger than….

Check the box the type the value of TTL (time to live) for each entry. Click OK to enable such function.

It means when the TTL value of each DNS query reaches the threshold of the value specified here, the corresponding record will be deleted from router’s Cache automatically.


VVIIIIII--11--88 PPiinngg DDiiaaggnnoossiiss

Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page.

or


Item Description

IPV4 /IPV6 Choose the interface for such function.

Ping through Use the drop down list to choose the WAN interface that you want to ping through or choose Auto to be determined by the router automatically.


Ping to Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you want to ping.

IP Address Type the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping.

Ping IPv6 Address Type the IPv6 address that you want to ping.

Run Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be displayed on the screen.



VVIIIIII--11--99 DDaattaa FFllooww MMoonniittoorr

This page displays the running procedure for the IP address monitored and refreshes the data in an interval of several seconds. The IP address listed here is configured in Bandwidth Management. You have to enable IP bandwidth limit and IP session limit before invoking Data Flow Monitor. If not, a notification dialog box will appear to remind you enabling it.

Click Diagnostics and click Data Flow Monitor to open the web page. You can click IP Address, TX rate, RX rate or Session link for arranging the data display.


Item Description

Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function.

Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of


refreshing data flow that will be done by the system automatically.

Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually.

Index Display the number of the data flow.

IP Address Display the IP address of the monitored device.

TX rate (kbps) Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.

RX rate (kbps) Display the receiving speed of the monitored device.

Sessions Display the session number that you specified in Limit Session web page.

Action Block - can prevent specified PC accessing into Internet within 5 minutes.

Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking.

Current /Peak/Speed Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate for WAN interface.

Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in data transmission.

Speed means line speed specified in WAN>>General Setup. If you do not specify any rate at that page, here will display Auto for instead.


VVIIIIII--11--1100 TTrraaffffiicc GGrraapphh

Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 Bandwidth, Sessions, daily or weekly for viewing different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted) data of WAN. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.

The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings. For WAN1/WAN2/WAN3 Bandwidth chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the transmitted and received packets in the past.

For Sessions chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the NAT sessions during the past.


VVIIIIII--11--1111 TTrraaccee RRoouuttee

Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen.

or


Item Description

IPv4 / IPv6 Click one of them to display corresponding information for it.

Trace through Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want to ping through.


Protocol Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want to ping through.

Host/IP Address It indicates the IP address of the host.

Trace Host/IP Address It indicates the IPv6 address of the host.

Run Click this button to start route tracing work.


VVIIIIII--11--1122 SSyysslloogg EExxpplloorreerr

Such page provides real-time syslog and displays the information on the screen.

FFoorr WWeebb SSyysslloogg

This page displays the time and message for User/Firewall/call/WAN/VPN settings. You can check Enable Web Syslog, specify the type of Syslog and choose the display mode you want. Later, the event of Syslog with specified type will be shown for your reference.


Item Description

Enable Web Syslog Check this box to enable the function of Web Syslog.

Syslog Type Use the drop down list to specify a type of Syslog to be displayed.

Export Click this link to save the data as a file.


Clear Click this link to clear information on this page.


Display Mode There are two modes for you to choose.

Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of syslog is full, the system will stop recording.

Always record the new event – only the newest events will be recorded by the system.

Time Display the time of the event occurred.

Message Display the information for each event.

FFoorr UUSSBB SSyysslloogg

This page displays the syslog recorded on the USB storage disk.


Item Description

Time Display the time of the event occurred.

Log Type Display the type of the record.

Message Display the information for each event.


VVIIIIII--11--1133 IIPPvv66 TTSSPPCC SSttaattuuss

IPv6 TSPC status web page could help you to diagnose the connection status of TSPC.

If TSPC has configured properly, the router will display the following page when the user connects to tunnel broker successfully.


Item Description



VVIIIIII--11--1144 DDSSLL SSttaattuuss

Such page is useful for RD debug or web technician.


VVIIIIII--11--1155 DDooSS FFlloooodd TTaabbllee

This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism. It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection.

Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.

Moreover, IP address detected and suspected to attack the network system can be blocked shortly by clicking the Block button shown on pages of SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood.

Info

The icon - - means there is something wrong (e.g., attacking the system) with that IP address.


VVIIIIII--11--1166 RRoouuttee PPoolliiccyy DDiiaaggnnoossiiss

With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route) of the packets sent out of the router can be traced.

or


Item Description

Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route policy.

Analyze multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be sent by a route policy.

Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor router.

ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.

Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.

Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.


Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination port.

Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The analyzed result will be shown on the page.

Input File It is available when Analyze multiple packets.. is selected as Mode.

Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for saving the result of analysis.


Note that the analysis was based on the current "load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee it will be 100% the same as the real case.


VVIIIIII--22 CChheecckkiinngg IIff tthhee HHaarrddwwaarree SSttaattuuss IIss OOKK oorr NNoott

Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status.

1. Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections. Refer to “I-2 Hardware Installation” for details.

2. Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent LAN LED is bright.

3. If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to “I-2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try again.


VVIIIIII--33 CChheecckkiinngg IIff tthhee NNeettwwoorrkk CCoonnnneeccttiioonn SSeettttiinnggss oonn YYoouurr

CCoommppuutteerr IIss OOKK oorr NNoott

Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure the network connection settings is OK.

FFoorr WWiinnddoowwss

Info

The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in www.DrayTek.com.

1. Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Control Panel. Click Network and Sharing Center.

2. In the following window, click Change adapter settings.

3. Icons of network connection will be shown on the window. Right-click on Local Area Connection and click on Properties.


4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.

5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically. Finally, click OK.


FFoorr MMaacc OOSS

1. Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop.

2. Open the Application folder and get into Network.

3. On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.


VVIIIIII--44 PPiinnggiinngg tthhee RRoouutteerr ffrroomm YYoouurr CCoommppuutteerr

The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP automatically. (Please refer to the section VIII-3).

Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.

FFoorr WWiinnddoowwss

1. Open the Command Prompt window (from Start menu> Run).

2. Type command (for Windows 95/98/ME) or cmd (for Windows NT/ 2000/XP/Vista/7/8). The DOS command dialog will appear.

3. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “Reply from 192.168.1.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255” will appear.

4. If the line does not appear, please check the IP address setting of your computer.

FFoorr MMaacc OOSS ((TTeerrmmiinnaall))

1. Double click on the current used MacOs on the desktop.

2. Open the Application folder and get into Utilities.

3. Double click Terminal. The Terminal window will appear.

4. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=xxxx ms” will appear.


VVIIIIII--55 CChheecckkiinngg IIff tthhee IISSPP SSeettttiinnggss aarree OOKK oorr NNoott

If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed on section I-1) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please:

Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex).

Next, change the physical type of modem (e.g., DSL) offered by ISP with the same value configured in Vigor router. Check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.

If not, please install an additional switch for connecting both Vigor router and the modem offered by ISP. Then, check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.

If the problem of LEDs cannot be solved by the above measures, please contact with the nearest reseller, or send an e-mail to DrayTek FAE for technical support.

Check if the settings offered by ISP are configured well or not.

When the LEDs are on and correct, yet the WAN connection still cannot be up, please:

Open WAN >> Internet Access page and then check whether the ISP settings are set correctly. Click Details Page of WAN1~WAN4 to review the settings that you configured previously.


VVIIIIII--66 PPrroobblleemmss ffoorr 33GG//44GG NNeettwwoorrkk CCoonnnneeccttiioonn

When you have trouble in using 3G/4G network transmission, please check the following:

CChheecckk iiff UUSSBB LLEEDD lliigghhttss oonn oorr ooffff

You have to wait about 15 seconds after inserting 3G/4G USB Modem into your Vigor2765. Later, the USB LED will light on which means the installation of USB Modem is successful. If the USB LED does not light on, please remove and reinsert the modem again. If it still fails, restart Vigor2765.

UUSSBB LLEEDD lliigghhttss oonn bbuutt tthhee nneettwwoorrkk ccoonnnneeccttiioonn ddooeess nnoott wwoorrkk

Check the PIN Code of SIM card is disabled or not. Please use the utility of 3G/4G USB Modem to disable PIN code and try again. If it still fails, it might be the compliance problem of system. Please open DrayTek Syslog Tool to capture the connection information (WAN Log) and send the page (similar to the following graphic) to the service center of DrayTek.

TTrraannssmmiissssiioonn RRaattee iiss nnoott ffaasstt eennoouugghh

Please connect your Notebook with 3G/4G USB Modem to test the connection speed to verify if the problem is caused by Vigor2765. In addition, please refer to the manual of 3G/4G USB Modem for LED Status to make sure if the modem connects to Internet via HSDPA mode. If you want to use the modem indoors, please put it on the place near the window to obtain better signal receiving.


VVIIIIII--77 BBaacckkiinngg ttoo FFaaccttoorryy DDeeffaauulltt SSeettttiinngg IIff NNeecceessssaarryy

Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only.

Info

After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing. The password of factory default is null.

SSooffttwwaarree RReesseett

You can reset the router to factory default via Web page. Such function is available in Admin Mode only.

Go to System Maintenance and choose Reboot System on the web page. The following screen will appear. Choose Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. After few seconds, the router will return all the settings to the factory settings.


HHaarrddwwaarree RReesseett

While the router is running (ACT LED blinking), press the Factory Reset button and hold for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED blinks rapidly, please release the button. Then, the router will restart with the default configuration.

After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again to fit your personal request.

VVIIIIII--88 CCoonnttaaccttiinngg DDrraayyTTeekk

If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer for further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to [email protected].


PPaarrtt IIXX DDrraayyTTeekk TToooollss


IIXX--11 SSmmaarrttVVPPNN CClliieenntt

IIXX--11--11 DDrraayyTTeekk AAnnddrrooiidd--bbaasseedd SSmmaarrttVVPPNN AAPPPP ffoorr tthhee eessttaabblliisshhmmeenntt

ooff SSSSLL VVPPNN ccoonnnneeccttiioonn

DrayTek has been the world-leading company to integrate VPN with Vigor SOHO routers to serve professionals and business customers with secure data transactions over Internet. The facilities of VPN let businesses are able to receive and send data over Internet with secure tunnels. We provide multiple protocol VPN connections such as IPSec/PPTP/L2TP protocols for secure data exchange and communication. With SSL VPN embedded on Vigor routers, teleworkers can have convenient and simple access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe.

DrayTek provided free SmartVPN for Windows-based users to easily establish VPN tunnels. There were million downloads. Now, DrayTek released Android-based SmartVPN app for those who would like to set up SSL VPN connection with the VPN server working at the main office. The SmartVPN app is available for your free download! Then, you can use the SmartVPN App on smartphone/tablet PC to establish SSL VPN tunnels with your main office.


IIXX--11--22 HHooww ttoo UUssee SSmmaarrttVVPPNN AAnnddrrooiidd AAPPPP ttoo EEssttaabblliisshh SSSSLL VVPPNN

TTuunnnneell??

SmartVPN APP for Android is now available on Google play. This document demonstrates how to use the APP to establish a SSL VPN tunnel.

1. On VPN server, create a SSL user account. Please refer to “How to Set up SSL VPN” on www.draytek.com for detailed instructions.

2. Download the APP from Google play, and run the APP.

3. Click “+” to add a new profile.


4. Edit the profile.

a. Enter description of this profile.

b. Enter VPN Server's IP in Server.

c. Enter Port as the port which VPN server uses for SSL VPN; for Vigor Routers, it is 443 by default.

d. Tap SAVE to save the profile or “<” to cancel.

Info

Installation of relevant Root CA is required to enable server certificate authentication.

If you check “Use default gateway on remote network”, all the traffic of this smart device will be forwarded to the remote gateway.

5. Tap the profile bar to establish SSL VPN tunnel.

6. Enter Username and Password, then tap Dial.


7. When the tunnel is up, the profile will turn green. Tap the bar again will disconnect the tunnel.

8. Tap the pencil icon to edit or remove the profile.


PPaarrtt XX TTeellnneett CCoommmmaannddss


AAcccceessssiinngg TTeellnneett ooff VViiggoorr22776655

This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual.

Info

For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs.

Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later.

In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter. Note that the IP address in the example is the default address of the router. If you have changed the default, enter the current IP address of the router.

Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. Then, type ?. You will see a list of valid/common commands depending on the router that your use.


For users using previous Windows system (e.g., 2000/XP), simply click Start >> Run and type Telnet 192.168.1.1 in the Open box as below. Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. And, type ? to get a list of valid/common commands.


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ttxxppcctt //aaddssll rrxxppcctt This command allows the user to adjust the percentage of data transmission (receiving/transmitting) for QoS application.

SSyynnttaaxx

adsl txpct [auto:percent]

adsl rxpct [auto:percent]

Syntax Description

auto It means auto detection of ADSL transmission packet.

percent It means to specify the percentage of ADSL transmission packet. Available range is 10-100.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl txpct auto % tx percentage : 80 > adsl txpct 75 % tx percentage : 75

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ssttaattuuss This command is used to display current status of ADSL setting.

SSyynnttaaxx

adsl status

EExxaammppllee

> adsl status --------------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A) ---------- Running Mode : State : TRAINING DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0 NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB DS actual PSD : 0. 0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB NE Rcvd Cells : 0 NE Xmitted Cells : 0 NE CRC Count : 0 FE CRC Count : 0 NE ES Count : 0 FE ES Count : 0 Xdsl Reset Times : 0 Xdsl Link Times : 0 ITU Version[0] : b5004946 ITU Version[1] : 544e0000 ADSL Firmware Version : 06-06-01-07-00-01 Power Management Mode : DSL_G997_PMS_NA Test Mode : DISABLE ----------------------- ATU-C Info --------------------------------- Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000 DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < ----- > >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll pppppp This command can set the Internet Access mode for the router.

SSyynnttaaxx

adsl ppp [ ? | pvc_no vci vpi Encap Proto modu acqIP idle [Username Password]

SSyynnttaaxx DDeessccrriippttiioonn

PPaarraammeetteerr DDeessccrriippttiioonn

? Display the command syntax of “adsl ppp”.

pvc_no It means the PVC number and the adjustable range is from 0 (Channel-1) to 7(Channel-8).

Encap Different numbers represent different modes.

0 : VC_MUX,

1: LLC/SNAP,

2: LLC_Bridge,

3: LLC_Route,

4: VCMUX_Bridge

5: VCMUX_Route,

6: IPoE.

Proto It means the protocol used to connect Internet. Different numbers represent different protocols.

0: PPPoA,

1: PPPoE,

2: MPoA.

Modu 0: T1.413,

2: G.dmt,

4: Multi,

5: ADSL2,

7:ADSL2_AnnexM

8:ADSL2+

14:ADSL2+_AnnexM.

acqIP It means the way to acquire IP address. Type the number to determine the IP address by specifying or assigned dynamically by DHCP server.

0 : fix_ip,

1: dhcp_client/PPPoE/PPPoA.(acquire IP method)

idle Type number to determine the network connection will be kept for always or idle after a certain time.

-1: always on, else idle timeout secs. Only for PPPoE/PPPoA.

Username This parameter is used only for PPPoE/PPPoA.

Password This parameter is used only for PPPoE/PPPoA.

You have to reboot the system when you set it on Route mode.

EExxaammppllee


> adsl ppp o 35 8 1 1 4 1 -1 draytek draytek

pvc no.=0

vci=35

vpi=8

encap=LLC(1)

proto=PPPoE(1)

modu=MULTI(4)

AcquireIP: Dhcp_client(1) Idle timeout:-1 Username=draytek Password=draytek

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll bbrriiddggee This command can specify a LAN port (LAN1 to LAN4) for mapping to certain PVC, and the mapping port/PVC will be operated in bridge mode.

adsl bridge [pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable] [on/off/clear/tag tag_no] [service type] [px ... ]



pvc_no It means pvc number and must be between 0(Channel 1) to 7(Channel 8).

status It means to shown the whole bridge status.

save It means to save the configuration to flash.

enable It means to enable the Multi-VLAN function.

disable It means to disable the Multi-VLAN function.

on/off It means to turn on/off bridge mode for the specific channel.

clear It means to turn off and clear all the PVC settings.

tag tag_no No tag: -1

Available number for tag: 0-4095

pri pri_no The number 0 to 7 can be set to indicate the priority. “7” is the highest.

service type Two number can be set:

0: for Normal (all the applications will be processed with the same PVC).

1: for the IGMP with different PVC which is used for special ISP.

px… It means the number of LAN port (x=2~4). Port 1 is locked for NAT.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl bridge 4 on p2 p3 PVC Bridge p1 p2 p3 p4 Service Type Tag Pri


------------------------------------------------------------ 4 ON 0 0 1 0 Normal -1(OFF) 0 PVC 0 & 1 can't set for bridge mode. Please use 'save' to save config.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ddrriivveerrmmooddee This command is useful for laboratory to measure largest power of data transmission. Please follow the steps below to set adsl drivermode.

1. Please connect dsl line to the DSLAM.

2. Waiting for dsl SHOWTIME.

3. Drop the dsl line.

4. Now, it is on continuous sending mode, and adsl2/2+ led is always ON.

5. Use 'adsl reboot' to restart dsl to normal mode.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll rreebboooott This command can wake up the idle router.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl reboot % Adsl is Rebooting...


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ooaammllbb This command is used to test if the connection between CPE and CO is OK or not.

adsl oamlb [n][type]

adsl oamlb chklink [on/off]

adsl oamlb [log_on/log_off]



n It means the total number of transmitted packets.

type It means the protocol that you can use. 1 – for F4 Seg-to-Seg (VP level) 2 – for F4 End-to-End (VP level) 4 – for F5 Seg-to-Seg (VC level) 5 – for F5 End-to-End (VC level)

chklink Check the DSL connection.

Log_on/log_off Enable or disable the OAM log for debug.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl oamlb chklink on OAM checking dsl link is ON. > adsl oamlb F5 4 Tx cnt=0 Rx Cnt=0 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll vvcciilliimmiitt This command can cancel the limit for vci value.

Some ISP might set the vci value under 32. In such case, we can cancel such limit manually by using this command. Do not set the number greater than 254.

adsl vcilimit [n]



n The number shall be between 1 ~ 254.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl vcilimit 33 change VCI limitation from 32 to 33.


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll aannnneexx This command can display the annex interface of this router.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl annex % hardware is annex B. % modem code is annex B; built at 01/15,07:34.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll aauuttoommooddee This command is used to add or remove ADSL modes (such as ANNEXL, ANNEXM and ANNEXJ) supported by Multimode.

adsl automode [add|remove|set|default|show] [adsl_mode]



add Add ADSL mode.

remove Remove ADSL mode.

set Use default settings plus the new added ADSL mode.

default Use default settings.

show Display current setting.

adsl_mode There are three modes to be choose, ANNEXL, ANNEXM and ANNEXJ.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl automode set ANNEXJ Automode supported : T1.413, G.DMT, ADSL2, ADSL2+, ANNEXJ, > adsl automode default Automode supported : T1.413, G.DMT, ADSL2, ADSL2+,

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll sshhoowwbbiinnss This command can display the allocation for each Bin (Tone) SNR, Gain, and Bits.

adsl showbins [startbin endbin |up]


Parameter Description

startbin The number is between 0 ~ 4092.

endbin The number is between 4 ~ 4095.

up Show upstream information.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl showbins 2 30 DOWNSTREAM :

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi


dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts

--- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --

--- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --

Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi

dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ooppttnn This command allows you to configure DSL line feature. This feature is depended on modem firmware. For G.Vector feature, modem firmware needs to support VDSL2 G.Vector.

adsl optn FUNC [us/ds/bi [value/on/off]



FUNC Available functions include:

'trellis', 'bitswap', 'sra', 'retx', 'aelem', 'status', 'g.vector', 'default'.

default: Set all features back to default settings.

us/ds/bi us: means “upstream”

ds: means “downstream”

bi: means “bidirection”

value The values for different functions change slightly.

bitswap=0~2, sra=0,2,3,4.

on/off Type “on” for enabling such function. Type “off” for disabling such function.

Functions of 'aelem' and 'g.vector' are only on/off.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl optn status trellis [US] = ON, [DS] = ON. bitswap [US] = 0, [DS] = 0. [0: default(ON), 1: ON, 2: OFF] sra [US] = 0, [DS] = 0. [0: default(=3), 2: OFF, 3: ON , 4: DYNAMIC_SOS] retx [US] = ON, [DS] = ON. aelem ON G.Vector ON

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ssaavveeccffgg This command can save the configuration into FLASH with a file format of cfg.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl savecfg % Xdsl Cfg Save OK!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll vveennddoorriidd This command allows you to configure user-defined CPE vendor ID.

adsl vendorid [status/on/off/ set vid0 vid1]




status Display current status of user-defined vendor ID.

on Enable the user-defined function.

off Disable the user-defined function.

set vid0 vid1 It means to set user-defined vendor ID with vid0 and vid1.

The vendor ID shall be set with HEX format, ex: 00fe7244: 79612f21.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl vendorid status % User define CPE Vendor ID is OFF % vid0:vid1 = 0x00fe7244:79612f21 > adsl vendorid on set vid0 vid1 % User define CPE Vendor ID is ON

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll aattmm This command can set QoS parameter for ATM.

adsl atm pcr [pvc_no][PCR][max][status]

adsl atm scr [pvc_no][SCR][status]

adsl atm mbs [pvc_no][MBS][status]

adsl atm status



pvc_no It means pvc number and must be between 0(Channel 1) to 7(Channel 8).

PCR It means Peak Cell Rate for upstream.

The range for the number is “1” to “2539”.

max Get the highest speed for the upstream.

SCR Mean Sustainable Cell Rate.


MBS Maximum Burst Size.


status Display PCR/SCR/MBS setting.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl atm pcr 1 200 max % PCR is 0 for pvc 1. > adsl atm pcr status pvc channel PCR --------------------------- 0 1 0 1 2 0 2 3 0 3 4 0 4 5 0 5 6 0


6 7 0 7 8 0 8 9 0 9 10 0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll ppvvccbbiinnddiinngg This command can configure PVC to PVC binding. Such command is available only for PPPoE and MPoA 1483 Bridge mode.

adsl pvcbinding [pvc_x pvc_y | status | -1 ]



pvc_x The PVC number for the source.

pvc_y The PVC number that the source PVC will be bound to.

status Display a table for PVC binding group.

-1 It means to clear specific PVC binding.

EExxaammppllee

> adsl pvcbinding 3 5 set done. bind pvc3 to pvc5.

The above example means PVC3 has been bound to PVC5.

> adsl pvcbinding 3 -1 clear pvc-1 binding

The above example means the PVC3 binding group has been removed.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aaddssll iinnvveennttoorryy This command is used to display information about CO or CPE.

SSyynnttaaxx

adsl inventory [co|cpe]



co It means DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) or CO (Central Office).

cpe It means CPE (Customer Premise Equipment).

EExxaammppllee

> adsl inventory co DrayTek> adsl inventory co xDSL inventory info only available in showtime. DrayTek> adsl inventory cpe G.994 vendor ID : 0XB5004946544E0000 G.994.1 country code : 0XB500 G.994.1 provider code : IFTN


G.994.1 vendor info : 0X000 System vendor ID : 0XFE00445241590000 System country code : 0XFE00 System provider code : DRAY System vendor info : 0X000 Version number : 8B0F07 Version number(16 octets) : 0X38423046303700000000000000000000 Self-test result : PASS Transmission mode capability : 0X50004000C010007 DrayTek> >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll ssttaattuuss This command is used to display current status of VDSL setting.

SSyynnttaaxx

vdsl status [more | counts | hlog | qln | snr | bandinfo | olr]

EExxaammppllee > vdsl status ---------------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A/B/C) ----------- Running Mode : State : TRAINING DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0 NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB DS actual PSD : 0. 0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB NE CRC Count : 0 FE CRC Count : 0 NE ES Count : 0 FE ES Count : 0 Xdsl Reset Times : 0 Xdsl Link Times : 0 ITU Version[0] : b5004946 ITU Version[1] : 544e0000 VDSL Firmware Version : 05-04-08-00-00-06 Power Management Mode : DSL_G997_PMS_NA Test Mode : DISABLE ---------------------- ATU-C Info --------------------------------- Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000 DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < unknown >

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll iiddllee This command can make the router accessing into the idle status. If you want to invoke the router again, you have to reboot the router by using “reboot” command.

SSyynnttaaxx

vdsl idle [on | tcpmessage | tcpmessage_off]



on DSL is under test mode. DSL debug tool mode is off.

tcpmessage DSL debug tool mode is on. tcpmessage_off DSL debug tool mode is off.


EExxaammppllee

> vdsl idle on % DSL is under [IDLE/QUIET] test mode. % DSL debug tool mode is off. > vdsl idle tcpmessage % Set DSL debug tool mode on. Please reboot system to take effect. > vdsl idle tcpmessage_off % Set DSL debug tool mode off. Please reboot system to take effect.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll ddrriivveerrmmooddee This command is useful for laboratory to measure largest power of data transmission. Please follow the steps below to set vdsl drivermode.

1. Please connect dsl line to the DSLAM.

2. Waiting for dsl SHOWTIME.

3. Drop the dsl line.

4. Now, it is on continuous sending mode, and vdsl2/2+ led is always ON.

5. Use 'vdsl reboot' to restart dsl to normal mode.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll rreebboooott This command can reboot the DSL router.

EExxaammppllee

> vdsl reboot % Adsl is Rebooting...

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll aannnneexx This command can display the annex interface of this router.

EExxaammppllee

> vdsl annex % hardware is annex A. % ADSL modem code is annex A

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll sshhoowwbbiinnss This command can display the allocation for each Bin (Tone) SNR, Gain, and Bits.

SSyynnttaaxx

vdsl showbins [startbin endbin | up]



startbin The number is between 0 ~ 4092. endbin The number is between 4 ~ 4095. up Show upstream information.

EExxaammppllee

> vdsl showbins 2 30 DOWNSTREAM :


-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- ----- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- -- - --- ----- ---- --Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi - Bin SNR Gain Bi dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts dB .1dB ts

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll ooppttnn This command allows you to configure DSL line feature.

SSyynnttaaxx

vdsl optn FUNC [us/ds/bi [value/on/off]]



FUNC Available settings contain: 'bitswap', 'sra', 'aelem', 'g.vector', 'status', 'trellis', 'retx', 'default'.

us/ds/bi us: upstream ds: downstream bi: bidirection. 'aelem' and 'g.vector' can be only on/off.

value The value shall be hex digits.

bitswap=0~2,

sra=0,2,3,4.

on/off Type “on” for enabling such function. Type “off” for disabling such function.

EExxaammppllee

> vdsl optn default trellis [US] = ON, [DS] = ON. Bitswap [US] = 0, [DS] = 0. [0: default(ON), 1: ON, 2: OFF] sra [US] = 0, [DS] = 0. [0: default(=3), 2: OFF, 3: ON , 4: DYNAMIC_SOS] retx [US] = ON, [DS] = ON. aelem ON G.Vector ON

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll ssaavveeccffgg This command can save the configuration into FLASH with a file format of cfg.

EExxaammppllee

> vdsl savecfg % Xdsl Cfg Save OK!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll vveennddoorriidd This command allows you to configure user-defined CPE vendor ID.


SSyynnttaaxx

vdsl vendorid [status/on/off/ set vid0 vid1]



status Display current status of user-defined vendor ID.

on Enable the user-defined function.

off Disable the user-defined function.

set vid0 vid1 It means to set user-defined vendor ID with vid0 and vid1.

The vendor ID shall be set with HEX format, ex: 00fe7244: 79612f21.

EExxaammppllee

> vdsl vendorid status % User define CPE Vendor ID is OFF % vid0:vid1 = 0x00fe7244:79612f21 > vdsl vendorid on set vid0 vid1 % User define CPE Vendor ID is ON

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvddssll iinnvveennttoorryy This command is used to display information about CO or CPE.

SSyynnttaaxx

vdsl inventory [co|cpe]



co It means DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer) or CO (Central Office).

cpe It means CPE (Customer Premise Equipment).

EExxaammppllee > vdsl inventory co xDSL inventory info only available in showtime. > vdsl inventory cpe G.994 vendor ID : 0XB5004946544E0000 G.994.1 country code : 0XB500 G.994.1 provider code : IFTN G.994.1 vendor info : 0X000 System vendor ID : 0XFE00445241590000 System country code : 0XFE00 System provider code : DRAY System vendor info : 0X000 Version number : 8B0F07 Version number(16 octets) : 0X38423046303700000000000000000000 Self-test result : PASS Transmission mode capability : 0X50004000C010007 >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm aappppee pprrooff

Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application.

“csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.

SSyynnttaaxx

csm appe prof -i INDEX [-v | -n NAME|setdefault]



INDEX Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 32.

- v View the configuration of the CSM profile.

- n Set a name for the CSM profile.

NAME Specify a name for the CSM profile, less then 15 characters.

setdefault Reset to default settings.

EExxaammppllee

> csm appe prof -i 1 -n games The name of APPE Profile 1 was setted.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm aappppee sseett It is used to configure group settings for IM/P2P/Protocol and Others in APP Enforcement Profile.

SSyynnttaaxx

csm appe set -i INDEX [-v GROUP| -e AP_IDX | -d AP_IDX| -a AP_IDX [ACTION]]




- v View the IM/P2P/Protocol and Others configuration of the CSM profile.

-e Enable to block specific application.

-d Disable to block specific application.

-a Set the action of specific application

GROUP Specify the category of the application. Available options are: IM, P2P, Protocol and Others.

AP_IDX Each application has independent index number for identification in CLI command.

Specify the index number of the application here. If you have no idea of the inex number, do the following (Take IM as an example):

Type “csm appe set –I 1 –v IM”, the system will list all of the index numbers of the applications categorized under IM.

ACTION Specify the action of the application, 0 or 1.


0: Block. All of the applications meet the CSM rule will be blocked.

1: Pass. All of the applications meet the CSM rule will be passed.

EExxaammppllee

>csm appe set -i 1 -a 1 1

Profile 1 - : <NULL> action set to Pass.

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm aappppee sshhooww It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile.

SSyynnttaaxx

csm appe show [-a|-i|-p|-t|-m]



-a View the configuration status for All groups.

-i View the configuration status of IM group.

-p View the configuration status of P2P group.

-t View the configuration status of protocol group.

-m View the configuration status of Others group.

EExxaammppllee

>csm appe show -t

Type Index Name Version Advance

Advanced Option: (M)essage, (F)ile Transfer, (G)ame, (C)onference, and (O)ther

Activities

-------------------------------------------------------------

PROTOCOL 52 DB2

PROTOCOL 53 DNS

PROTOCOL 54 FTP

PROTOCOL 55 HTTP 1.1

PROTOCOL 56 IMAP 4.1

PROTOCOL 57 IMAP STARTTLS 4.1

PROTOCOL 58 IRC 2.4.0 …………

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm aappppee ccoonnffiigg It is used to display the configuration status (enabled or disabled) for IM/P2P/Protocol/Other applications.

SSyynnttaaxx

csm appe config -v INDEX [-i|-p|-t|-m]





-i View the configuration status of IM group.

-p View the configuration status of P2P group.

-t View the configuration status of protocol group.

-m View the configuration status of Others group.

EExxaammppllee > csm appe config -v 1 -m Group Type Index Name Enable A vance Enable Advance abbreviation: Message, File Transfer, Game, Conference, and Other Advance abbreviation: : M, F, G, C, and O ------------------------------------------------------------------- OTHERS TUNNEL 75 DNSCrypt Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 76 DynaPass Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 77 FreeU Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 78 HTTP Proxy Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 79 HTTP Tunnel Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 80 Hamachi Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 81 Hotspot Shield Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 82 MS Teredo Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 83 PGPNet Disable OTHERS TUNNEL 84 Ping Tunnel Disable . . . ------------------------------------------------------------------

Total 66 APPs

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm aappppee iinntteerrffaaccee It is used to configure APPE signature download interface.

SSyynnttaaxx

csm appe interface [AUTO/WAN#]



AUTO Vigor router specifies WAN interface automatically.

WAN Specify the WAN interface for signature downloading.

EExxaammppllee

> csm appe interface wan1

Download interface is set as "WAN1" now.

> csm appe interface auto

Download interface is set as "auto-selected" now.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm aappppee eemmaaiill It is used to set notification e-mail for APPE signature based on the settings configured in System Maintenance>>SysLog/Mail Alert Setup (in which, the box of APPE Signature is checkd under Enable E-Mail Alert).

SSyynnttaaxx


csm appe email [-e|-d|-s]



-e Enable notification e-mail mechanism.

-d Disable notification e-mail mechanism.

-s Send an example e-mail.

EExxaammppllee

> csm appe email -e Enable APPE email.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm uuccff It is used to configure settings for URL control filter profile.

csm ucf show

csm ucf setdefault

csm ucf msg MSG

csm ucf obj INDEX [-n PROFILE_NAME | -l [P|B|A|N] | uac | wf ]

csm ucf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME

csm ucf obj INDEX -p VALUE

csm ucf obj INDEX -l P|B|A|N

csm ucf obj INDEX uac

csm ucf obj INDEX wf



show Display all of the profiles.

setdefault Return to default settings for all of the profile.

msg MSG Set the administration message.

MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message itself.

obj Specify the object for the profile.


-n Set the profile name.

PROFILE_NAME Specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)

-p Set the priority (defined by the number specified in VALUE) for the profile.

VALUE Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions.

0: It means Bundle: Pass.

1: It means Bundle: Block.

2: It means Either: URL Access Control First.

3: It means Either: Web Feature First.

-l It means the log type of the profile. They are:

P: Pass,


B: Block,

A: All,

N: None

MSG Specify the Administration Message, less then 255 characters

uac Set URL Access Control part.

wf Set Web Feature part.

EExxaammppllee

> csm ucf obj 1 -n game -l B Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[game] Log:[none] Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass] [ ]Enable URL Access Control Action:[pass] [ ]Prevent web access from IP address. No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------- No Grp NO. Group Name --- -------- ---------------------------------

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm uuccff oobbjj IINNDDEEXX uuaacc It means to configure the settings regarding to URL Access Control (uac).

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -v

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -e

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -d

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -a P|B

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -i E|D

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -o KEY_WORD_Object_Index

csm ucf obj INDEX uac -g KEY_WORD_Group_Index




- v View the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.

-e Enable the function of URL Access Control.

-d Disable the function of URL Access Control.

-a Set the action of specific application, P or B.

B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be blocked.

P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be passed.

-i Prevent the web access from any IP address.

E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP address will


be blocked.

D: Disable the function.

-o Set the keyword object.

KEY_WORD_Object_Index Specify the index number of the object profile.

-g Set the keyword group.

KEY_WORD_Group_Index Specify the index number of the group profile.

EExxaammppllee

> csm ucf obj 1 uac -i E Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[game] Log:[none] Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass] [ ]Enable URL Access Control Action:[pass] [v]Prevent web access from IP address. No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------- No Grp NO. Group Name --- -------- --------------------------------- > csm ucf obj 1 uac -a B Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[game] Log:[none] Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass] [ ]Enable URL Access Control Action:[block] [v]Prevent web access from IP address. No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------- No Grp NO. Group Name --- -------- ---------------------------------


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm uuccff oobbjj IINNDDEEXX wwff It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf).

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -v

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -e

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -d

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -a P|B

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -s WEB_FEATURE

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -u WEB_FEATURE

csm ucf obj INDEX wf -f File_Extension_Object_index




- v View the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.

-e Enable the restriction of web feature.

-d Disable the restriction of web feature.

-a Set the action of web feature, P or B.

B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.

P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.

-s Enable the the Web Feature configuration.

Features available for configuration are:

c: Cookie

p: Proxy

u: Upload

-u Cancel the web feature configuration.

-f Set the file extension object index number.

File_Extension_Object_index

Type the index number (1 to 8) for the file extension object.

EExxaammppllee

> csm ucf obj 1 wf -s c Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[game] Log:[none] Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass] [ ]Enable URL Access Control Action:[block] [v] Prevent web access from IP address. No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------- No Grp NO. Group Name --- -------- --------------------------------- [ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature Action:[pass]


File Extension Object Index : [0] Profile Name : [] [V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm wwccff It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).

csm wcf show

csm wcf look

csm wcf cache

csm wcf server WCF_SERVER

csm wcf msg MSG

csm wcf setdefault

csm wcf obj INDEX -v

csm wcf obj INDEX -a P|B

csm wcf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME

csm wcf obj INDEX -l N|P|B|A

csm wcf obj INDEX -o KEY_WORD Object Index

csm wcf obj INDEX -g KEY_WORD Group Index

csm wcf obj INDEX -w E|D|P|B

csm wcf obj INDEX -s CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP

csm wcf obj INDEX -u CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP



show Display the web content filter profiles.

Look Display the license information of WCF.

Cache Set the cache level for the profile.

Server WCF_SERVER Set web content filter server.

Msg MSG Set the administration message.

MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message itself.

setdefault Return to default settings for all of the profile.

obj Specify the object profile.

INDEX Specify the index number of web content filter profile, from 1 to 8.

- v View the web content filter profile.

-a Set the action of web content filter profile, P or B.

B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.

P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.

-n Set the profile name.

PROFILE_NAME Specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)

-l It means the log type of the profile. They are:

P: Pass,

B: Block,

A: All,

N: None

-o Set the keyword object.


KEY_WORD_Object_Index Specify the index number of the object profile.

-g Set the keyword group.

KEY_WORD_Group_Index Specify the index number of the group profile.

-w Set the action for the black and white list.

E:Enable,

D:Disable,

P:Pass,

B:Block

-s It means to choose the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.

-u It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.

WEB_GROUP Child_Protection, Leisure, Business, Chating, Computer Internet, Other

CATEGORY Includes:

Alcohol & Tobacco, Criminal Activity, Gambling, Hate & Intoleranc, Illegal Drug, Nudity, Pornography/Sexually Explicit, Weapons, Violence, School Cheating,Sex Education, Tasteless, Child Abuse Imges, Entertainment, Games, Sports, Travel, Leisure & Recreation, Fashin & Beauty, Business, Job Search, Web-based Emai, Chat, Instant Messaging, Anonymizers, Forums & Newsgroups, Computers & Technology, Download Sites, Streaming Media & Downloads, Phishing & Fraud, Search Engines & Portals, Social Networking, Spam Sites,Malware, Botnets, Hacking, Illegal Software, Information Security,Peer-to-eer, Advertisements & Pop-Ups, Arts, Transportation, Compromised, Dating & Personals, , Education, Finance, Government,Health & Medcine, News, Non-profits & NGOs, Personal Sites,Politics, Real Estate, Rligion, Restaurants & Dining,Shopping, Translators, General, Cults,Greetig cards, Image Sharing, Network Errors, Parked Domains, Private IP Addresses)


EExxaammppllee

> csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[test_wcf] []White/Black list Action:[block] No Obj NO. Object Name --- -------- --------------------------------- No Grp NO. Group Name --- -------- --------------------------------- Action:[block]

Log:[block]

------------------------------------------------------------------

child Protection Group:

[v]Alcohol & Tobacco [v]Criminal & Activity [v]Gambling

[v]Hate & Intolerance [v]Illegal Drug [v]Nudity

[v]Pornography & Sexually explicit [v]Violence [v]Weapons

[v]School Cheating [v]Sex Education [v]Tasteless

[v]Child Abuse Images ------------------------------------------------------------------ leisure Group: [ ]Entertainment [ ]Games [ ]Sports [ ]Travel [ ]Leisure & Recreation [ ]Fashion & Beauty. . >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ccssmm ddnnssff It means to configure the settings regarding to DNS filter.

csm dnsf enable ON|OFF

csm dnsf syslog N|P|B|A

csm dnsf service WCF_PROFILE

csm dnsf service_ucf UCF_PROFILE

csm dnsf time CACHE_TIME

csm dnsf blockpage show/on/off

csm dnsf profile_show

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -l N|P|B|A

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -w WCF_PROFILE

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -u UCF_PROFILE

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -c CACHE_TIME




enable Enable or disable DNS Filter.

ON: enable.

OFF: disable.

syslog Determine the content of records transmitting to Syslog.

P: Pass. Records for the packets passing through DNS filter will be sent to Syslog.

B: Block. Records for the packets blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog.

A: All. Records for the packets passing through or blocked by DNS filter will be sent to Syslog.

N: None. No record will be sent to Syslog.

service WCF_PROFILE WCF_PROFILE: Specify a WCF profile as the base of DNS filtering. Type a number to indicate the index number of WCF profile (1 is first profile, 2 is second profile, and so on ...).

time CACHE_TIME CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for DNS filter.

blockpage DNS sends block page for redirect port. When a web page is blocked by DNS filter, the router system will send a message page to describe that the page is not allowed to be visisted.

ON: Enable the function of displaying message page.

OFF: Disable the function of displaying message page.

SHOW: Display the function of displaying message page is ON or OFF.

profile_show Display the table of the DNS filter profile.

profile_edit Modify the content of the DNS filter profile.

-n PROFILE_NAME PROFILE_NAME: Type the name of the DNS filter profile that you want to modify.

-l N|P|B|A Specify the log type of the profile.

P: Pass.

B: Block.

A: All.

N: None.

-w WCF_PROFILE WCF_PROFILE: Type the index number of the WCF profile.

-u UCF_PROFILE UCF_PROFILE: Type the index number of the UCF profile.

-c CACHE_TIME -c means to set the cache time for DNS filter.

CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for DNS filter.

EExxaammppllee

> csm dnsf service 2 dns service set up!!! >csm dnsf service 3 wcf profile 3 is empty..... >csm dnsf cachetime 1 dns cache time set up!!!


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ddddnnss lloogg Displays the DDNS log.

EExxaammppllee

>ddns log >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ddddnnss ttiimmee Sets and displays the DDNS time.

ddns time <update in minutes>



Update in minutes Type the value as DDNS time. The range is from 1 to 14400.

EExxaammppllee

> ddns time ddns time <update in minutes> Valid: 1 ~ 14400 %Now: 14400 > ddns time 1000 ddns time <update in minutes> Valid: 1 ~ 14400 %Now: 1000

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ddooss This command allows users to configure the settings for DoS defense system.

dos [-V | D | A]

dos [-s ATTACK_F [THRESHOLD][ TIMEOUT]]

dos [-a | e [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0] | d [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0]]



-V View the configuration of DoS defense system.

-D Deactivate the DoS defense system.

-A Activate the DoS defense system.

-s Enable the defense function for a specific attack and set its parameter(s).

ATTACK_F Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or portscan, e.g., synflood, udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.

THRESHOLD It means the packet rate (packet/second) that a flooding attack will be detected. Set a value larger than 20.

TIMEOUT It means the time (seconds) that a flooding attack will be blocked. Set a value larger than 5.

-a Enable the defense function for all attacks listed in ATTACK_0.


-e Enable defense function for a specific attack(s).

ATTACK_0 Specify a name of the following attacks: ip_option, tcp_flag, land, teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath, traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag, unknow_proto, fraggle.

-d Disable the defense function for a specific attack(s).

EExxaammppllee

>dos –A The Dos Defense system is Activated >dos –s synflood 50 10 Synflood is enabled! Threshold=50 <pke/sec> timeout=10 <pke/sec>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: eexxiitt Type this command will leave telnet window.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: IInntteerrnneett This command allows you to configure detailed settings for WAN connection.

SSyynnttaaxx

internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



-W n W means to set WAN interface.

1=WAN1, 2=WAN2,…. Default is WAN1.

-M n M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means different modes (represented by 0 – 3) n=0: Offline

n=1: PPPoE

n=2: Dynamic IP

n=3: Static IP

n=4: PPTP with Dynamic IP,

n=5: PPTP with Static IP,

n=6: L2TP with Dynamic IP

n=7: L2TP with Static IP

n=A: 3G/4G USB Modem(PPP mode),

n=B: 3G/4G USB Modem(DHCP mode)

<command><parameter>|…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.

[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.

-S <isp name> Set ISP Name (max. 23 characters).

-P <on/off> Enable PPPoE Service.

-u <username> Set username (max. 49 characters) for Internet accessing.

-p <password> Set password (max. 49 characters) for Internet accessing.

-a n It means to set PPP Authentication Type and n means different types (represented by 0-1).

n=0: PAP/CHAP (this is default setting)

n=1: PAP Only

-t n Set connection duration and n means different conditions.

n=-1: Always-on


n=1 ~ 999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds)

-i <ip address> It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified here for CPE (PPPoE client).

If you type 0.0.0.0 as the <ip address>, ISP will assign suitable IP address for you. However, if you type an IP address here, the router will use that one as a fixed IP.

-w <ip address> It means to assign WAN IP address for such connection. Please type an IP address here for WAN port.

-n <netmask> It means to assign netmask for WAN connection. You have to type 255.255.255.xxx (x is changeable) as the netmask for WAN port.

-g <gateway> Assign gateway IP for such WAN connection.

-V View Internet Access profile.

-C <sim pin code> Set (PPP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 15 characters).

-O <init string> Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String (max. 47 characters).

-T <init string2> Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String2 (max. 47 characters)

-D <dial string> Set (PPP mode) Modem Dial String (max. 31 characters).

-v <service name> Set (PPP mode) Service Name (max. 23 characters).

-m <ppp username> Set (PPP mode) PPP Username (max. 63 characters).

-o <ppp password> Set (PPP mode) PPP Password (max. 62 characters).

-e n Set (PPP mode) PPP Authentication Type.

n= 0: PAP/CHAP (default),

1: PAP Only

-q n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-One

-x n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Two

-y n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Three

-z n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Four

-Q <mode> Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Mode.

<mode>

0: ARP Detect;

1: Ping Detect

-I <ping ip> Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Ping IP.

<ping ip>= ppp.qqq.rrr.sss: WAN Connection Detection Ping IP

-L n Set (PPP mode) WAN Connection Detection TTL (1-255) value.

-E <sim pin code> Set (DHCP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 19 characters).

-G <mode> Set (DHCP mode) Network Mode.

<mode>

0: 4G/3G/2G;

1: 4G Only;

2: 3G Only;

3: 2G Only

-N <apn name> Set (DHCP mode) APN Name (max. 47 characters)

-U n (DHCP mode) MTU(1000-1440)

EExxaammppllee

>internet -M 1 -S tcom -u username -p password -a 0 -t -1 -i 0.0.0.0 WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA


WAN1 ISP Name set to tcom WAN1 Username set to username WAN1 Password set successful WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP WAN1 Idle timeout set to always-on WAN1 Gateway IP set to 0.0.0.0 > internet -V WAN1 Internet Mode:PPPoE ISP Name: tcom Username: username Authentication: PAP/CHAP Idle Timeout: -1 WAN IP: Dynamic IP > internet -W 1 -M 1 -u link1 -p link1 -a 0 You are going to watching and setting in WAN 1 WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA WAN1 Username set to link1 WAN1 Password set successful WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ppuubbssuubbnneett This command allows users to enable or disable the IP routing subnet for your router.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip pubsubnet <Enable/Disable>



Enable Enable the function.

Disable Disable the function.

EExxaammppllee

> ip 2ndsubnet enable public subnet enabled!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ppuubbaaddddrr This command allows to set the IP routed subnet for the router.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip pubaddr ?

ip pubaddr <public subnet IP address>



? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet IP address.

public subnet IP address Specify an IP address. The system will set the one that you specified


as the public subnet IP address.

EExxaammppllee

> ip pubaddr ? % ip addr <public subnet IP address> % Now: 192.168.0.1 > ip pubaddr 192.168.2.5 % Set public subnet IP address done !!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ppuubbmmaasskk This command allows users to set the mask for IP routed subnet of your router.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip pubmask ?

ip pubmask <public subnet mask>



? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet mask.

public subnet IP address Specify a subnet mask. The system will set the one that you specified as the public subnet mask.

EExxaammppllee

> ip pubmask ? % ip pubmask <public subnet mask> % Now: 255.255.255.0 > ip pubmask 255.255.0.0 % Set public subnet mask done !!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp aauuxx This command is used for configuring WAN IP Alias.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip aux add [IP] [Join to NAT Pool][wanX]

ip aux remove [index]



add Create a new WAN IP address.

remove Delete an existed WAN IP address.

IP It means the auxiliary WAN IP address.

Join to NAT Pool 0 (disable) or 1 (enable).

wanX Add or remove an address for WAN interface.

index Type the index number of the table displayed on your screen.


EExxaammppllee

> ip aux add 192.168.1.65 1 % 192.168.1.65 has added in index 3.

When you type ip aux?, the current auxiliary WAN IP Address table will be shown as the following:

Index no. Status IP address IP pool ---------------------------------------------- 1 Enable 172.16.3.229 Yes 2 Enable 172.16.3.56 No 3 Enable 172.16.3.113 No

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp aaddddrr This command allows users to set/add a specified LAN IP your router.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip addr [IP address]



IP address The LAN IP address.

EExxaammppllee

>ip addr 192.168.50.1 % Set IP address OK !!!

Info

When the LAN IP address is changed, the start IP address of DHCP server are still the same. To make the IP assignment of the DHCP server being consistent with this new IP address (they should be in the same network segment), the IP address of the PC must be fixed with the same LAN IP address (network segment) set by this command for accessing into the web user interface of the router. Later, modify the start addresses for the DHCP server.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp nnmmaasskk This command allows users to set/add a specified netmask for your router.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip nmask [IP netmask]



IP netmask The netmask of LAN IP.

EExxaammppllee


> ip nmask 255.255.0.0 % Set IP netmask OK !!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp aarrpp ARP displays the matching condition for IP and MAC address.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip arp add [IP address] [MAC address] [LAN or WAN]

ip arp del [IP address] [LAN or WAN]

ip arp flush

ip arp status

ip arp accept [0/1/2/3/4/5status]

ip arp setCacheLife [time]

In which, arp add allows users to add a new IP address into the ARP table; arp del allows users to remove an IP address; arp flush allows users to clear arp cache; arp status allows users to review current status for the arp table; arp accept allows to accept or reject the source /destination MAC address; arp setCacheLife allows users to configure the duration in which ARP caches can be stored on the system. If ip arp setCacheLife is set with “60”, it means you have an ARP cache at 0 second. Sixty seconds later without any ARP messages received, the system will think such ARP cache is expired. The system will issue a few ARP request to see if this cache is still valid.



IP address It means the LAN IP address.

MAC address It means the MAC address of your router.

LAN or WAN It indicates the direction for the arp function.

0/1/2/3/4/5 0: disable to accept illegal source mac address

1: enable to accept illegal source mac address

2: disable to accept illegal dest mac address

3: enable to accept illegal dest mac address

4: Decline VRRP mac into arp table

5: Accept VRRP mac into arp table

status: display the setting status.

Time Available settings will be 10, 20, 30,....2550 seconds.

EExxaammppllee

> ip arp status [ARP Table] Index IP Address MAC Address Netbios Name Interface VLAN Port 1 192.168.1.5 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE LAN1 VLAN0 P1 >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ddhhccppcc This command is available for WAN DHCP.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip dhcpc option

ip dhcpc option -h|l

ip dhcpc option -d [idx]

ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -v [option value]

ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -x "[option value]"

ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -a [option value]

ip dhcpc option -u [idx unmber]

ip dhcpc release [wan number]

ip dhcpc renew [wan number]

ip dhcpc status



option It is an optional setting for DHCP server.

-h: display usage

-l: list all custom set DHCP options

-d: delete custom dhcp client option by index number

-e: enable/disable option feature, 1:enable, 0:disable

-w: set WAN number (e.g., 1=WAN1)

-c: set option number: 0~255

-v: set option value by string

-x: set option value by raw byte (hex)

-u: update by index number

release It means to release current WAN IP address.

renew It means to renew the WAN IP address and obtain another new one.

status It displays current status of DHCP client.

EExxaammppllee

>ip dhcpc status I/F#3 DHCP Client Status: DHCP Server IP : 172.16.3.7 WAN Ipm : 172.16.3.40 WAN Netmask : 255.255.255.0 WAN Gateway : 172.16.3.1 Primary DNS : 168.95.192.1 Secondary DNS : 0.0.0.0 Leased Time : 259200 Leased Time T1 : 129600 Leased Time T2 : 226800 Leased Elapsed : 259194 Leased Elapsed T1 : 129594


Leased Elapsed T2 : 226794

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ppiinngg This command allows users to ping IP address of WAN1/WAN2 for verifying if the WAN connection is OK or not.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip ping [IP address] [WAN1/WAN2]



IP address It means the WAN IP address.

WAN1/WAN2 It means the WAN interface that the above IP address passes through.

EExxaammppllee

>ip ping 172.16.3.229 WAN1 Pinging 172.16.3.229 with 64 bytes of Data: Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <0% loss>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ttrraacceerrtt This command allows users to trace the routes from the router to the host.

ip tracert [Host/IP address] [WAN1/WAN2/WAN3/WAN4/WAN5] [Udp/Icmp]



IP address The target IP address.

WAN1/WAN2 It means the WAN port that the above IP address passes through.

Udp/Icmp The UDP or ICMP.

EExxaammppllee

>ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1 Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max 1 172.16.3.7 10ms 2 172.16.1.2 10ms 3 Request Time out. 4 168.95.90.66 50ms 5 211.22.38.134 50ms 6 220.128.2.62 50ms Trace complete

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp tteellnneett This command allows users to access specified device by telnet.

SSyynnttaaxx


ip telnet [IP address][Port]



IP address Type the WAN or LAN IP address of the remote device.

Port Type a port number (e.g., 23).

Available settings: 0 ~65535.

EExxaammppllee

> ip telnet 172.17.3.252 23 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp rriipp This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of IP.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip rip [0/1/2]



0/1/2 0 means disable;

1 means LAN1 and 2 means IP Routed.

EExxaammppllee

> ip rip 1 %% Set RIP LAN1.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp wwaannrriipp This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip wanrip [ifno] -e [0/1]



ifno It means the connection interface.

1: WAN1,2: WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5

Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs.

-e It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN interface.

1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP.

0: Disable the function.

EExxaammppllee


> ip wanrip ? Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1> <ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5 -e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable Now status: WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable WAN[2] Rip Protocol disable WAN[3] Rip Protocol disable WAN[4] Rip Protocol disable WAN[5] Rip Protocol disable > ip wanrip 5 -e 1 > ip wanrip ? Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1> <ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5 -e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable Now status: WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable WAN[2] Rip Protocol disable WAN[3] Rip Protocol disable WAN[4] Rip Protocol disable WAN[5] Rip Protocol enable >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp rroouuttee This command allows users to set static route.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip route add [dst] [netmask][gateway][ifno][rtype]

ip route del [dst] [netmask][rtype]

ip route status

ip route cnc

ip route default [wan1/wan2/off/?]

ip route clean [1/0]



add It means to add an IP address as static route.

del It means to delete specified IP address.

status It means current status of static route.

dst It means the IP address of the destination.

netmask It means the netmask of the specified IP address.

gateway It means the gateway of the connected router.


3=WAN1, 4=WAN2, 5=WAN3, 6=WAN4


rtype It means the type of the route.

default : default route;

static: static route.

cnc It means current IP range for CNC Network.

default Set WAN1/WAN2/off as current default route.

clean Clean all of the route settings.

1: Enable the function.


EExxaammppllee

> ip route add 172.16.2.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.2.4 3 static > ip route status Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - privateC~ 192.168.9.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, DMZ C~ 192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN1 S 172.16.2.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 172.16.2.4, WAN1


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp iiggmmpp__pprrooxxyy This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip igmp_proxy set

ip igmp_proxy reset

ip igmp_proxy wan

ip igmp_proxy query

ip igmp_proxy ppp [0/1]

ip igmp_proxy status



set It means to enable proxy server.

reset It means to disable proxy server.

wan It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service.

query It means to set IGMP general query interval.

The default value is 125000 ms.

ppp 0 – No need to set IGMP with PPP header.

1 – Set IGMP with PPP header.

status It means to display current status for proxy server.

EExxaammppllee

This command is for setting IGMP General Query Interval The default value is 125000 ms Current Setting is:130000 ms > ip igmp_proxy set % ip igmp_proxy [set|reset|wan|status], IGMP Proxy is ON > ip igmp_proxy status %% ip igmp_proxy [set|reset|wan|status], IGMP Proxy is ON %%% igmp_proxy WAN: 239.255.255.250 state=1 239.255.255.250 timer=0


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp iiggmmpp__ssnnoooopp This command is used to enable/disable igmp snoop server.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip igmp_snoop enable

ip igmp_snoop disable

ip igmp_snoop status

ip igmp_snoop txquery [on|off] [v2|v3]

ip igmp_snoop chkleave [on|off]

ip igmp_snoop separate [on|off]



enable It means to enable proxy server.

disable It means to disable proxy server.

status It means to display current status for proxy server.

table Display the whole table of IGMP Snoop configuration.

txquery [on|off] [v2|v3] IGMP query will be sent out to LAN periodically.

mode [hw/sw] Make IGMP snooping work on software or hardware.

chkleave [on|off] Off – Vigor router will drop LEAVE if clients still on the same group.

separate [on|off] On – IGMP packets will be separated by NAT/Bridge mode.

EExxaammppllee

> ip igmp_snoop enable

% ip igmp snooping [enable|disable|status], IGMP Snooping is Enabled.

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp iiggmmpp__ffll This command is used to enable/disable igmp fast leave.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip igmp_fl enable

ip igmp_fl disable

ip igmp_fl status



enable Enable IGMP fast leave.

disable Disable IGMP fast leave.

status Display current status of IGMP Fast Leave.

EExxaammppllee


> ip igmp_fl enable

%% ip igmp_fl [enable|disable|status], IGMP Fast Leave is Enabled.

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ddmmzz Specify MAC address of certain device as the DMZ host.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip dmz [mac]



mac It means the MAC address of the device that you want to specify.

EExxaammppllee

>ip dmz ? % ip dmz <mac>, now : 00-00-00-00-00-00 > ip dmz 11-22-33-44-55-66 > ip dmz ? % ip dmz <mac>, now : 11-22-33-44-55-66 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ddmmzzsswwiittcchh This command is to enable /disable private IP DMZ or Active True IP DMZ for DMZ host.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip dmzswitch off

ip dmzswitch private

ip dmaswitch active_trueip



off Disable the function of DMZ host.

private Enable private IP address of the DMZ host.

Active_trueip Enable active true IP address of the DMZ host.

EExxaammppllee

> ip dmzswitch ? %% ip dmzswitch [off|private|active_trueip], DMZ is OFF > ip dmzswitch private %% ip dmzswitch [off|private|trueip|active_trueip], PRIVATE IP DMZ is ON > ip dmzswitch trueip > ip dmzswitch active_trueip %% ip dmzswitch [off|private|trueip|active_trueip], ACTIVE TRUE IP DMZ is ON


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp sseessssiioonn This command allows users to set maximum session limit number for the specified IP; set message for exceeding session limit and set how many seconds the IP session block works.

ip session on

ip session off

ip session default [num]

ip session defaultp2p [num]

ip session status

ip session show

ip session timer [num]

ip session [block/unblock][IP]

ip session [add/del][IP1-IP2][num][p2pnum]



on Turn on session limit for each IP.

off Turn off session limit for each IP.

default [num] Set the default number of session num limit.

Defautlp2p [num] Set the default number of session num limit for p2p.

status Display the current settings.

show Display all session limit settings in the IP range.

timer [num] Set when the IP session block works.

The unit is second.

[block/unblock][IP] Block/unblock the specified IP address.

Block: The IP cannot access Internet through the router.

Unblock: The specified IP can access Internet through the router.

add Add the session limits in an IP range.

del Delete the session limits in an IP range.

IP1-IP2 It means the range of IP address specified for this command.

num It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100.

p2pnum It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 50 for P2P.

EExxaammppllee

>ip session default 100 > ip session add 192.168.1.5-192.168.1.100 100 50 > ip session on > ip session status IP range: 192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.100 : 100 Current ip session limit is turn on Current default session number is 100


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp bbaannddwwiiddtthh This command allows users to set maximum bandwidth limit number for the specified IP.

ip bandwidth on

ip bandwidth off

ip bandwidth default [tx_rate][rx_rate]

ip bandwidth status

ip bandwidth show

ip bandwidth [add/del] [IP1-IP2][tx][rx][shared]



on Turn on the IP bandwidth limit.

off Turn off the IP bandwidth limit.

default [tx_rate][rx_rate] Set default tx and rx rate of bandwidth limit. The range is from 0 – 65535 Kpbs.

status Display the current settings.

show Display all the bandwidth limits settings within the IP range.

add Add the bandwidth within the IP range.

del Delete the bandwidth within the IP range.

IP1-IP2 It means the range of IP address specified for this command.

tx Set transmission rate for bandwidth limit.

rx Set receiving rate for bandwidth limit.

shared It means that the bandwidth will be shared for the IP range.

EExxaammppllee

> ip bandwidth default 200 800 > ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60 > ip bandwidth status IP range: 192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off Auto adjustment is off

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp bbiinnddmmaacc This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.

ip bindmac on

ip bindmac off

ip bindmac strict_on


ip bindmac show

ip bindmac add [IP][MAC][Comment]

ip bindmac del [IP]/all



on Turn on IP bandmac policy. Even the IP is not in the policy table, it can still access into network.

off Turn off all the bindmac policy.

strict_on It means that only those IP address in IP bindmac policy table can access into network.

show Display the IP address and MAC address of the pair of binded one.

add Add one IP bindmac.

del Delete one IP bindmac.

IP Type the IP address for binding with specified MAC address.

MAC Type the MAC address for binding with the IP address specified.

Comment Type words as a brief description.

All Delete all the IP bindmac settings.

EExxaammppllee

> ip bindmac add 192.168.1.46 00:50:7f:22:33:55 just for test > ip bindmac show ip bind mac function is turned ON IP : 192.168.1.46 bind MAC : 00-50-7f-22-33-55 Comment : just


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp mmaaxxnnaattuusseerr This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip maxnatuser user no



User no A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor router supports.

0 – It means no limitation.

EExxaammppllee

> ip maxnatuser 100 % Max NAT user = 100

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ppoolliiccyy__rrtt This command is used to set the IP policy route profile.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip policy_rt [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



<command><parameter>|…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.


General Setup for Policy Route

-i [value] Specify an index number for setting policy route profile.

Value: 1 to 60. “-1” means to get a free policy index automatically.

-e [0/1] 0: Disable the selected policy route profile.

1: Enable the selected policy route profile.

-o [value] Determine the operation of the policy route.

Value:

add – Create a new policy rotue profile.

del – Remove an existed policy route profile.

edit – Modify an existed policy route profile.

flush – Reset policy route to default setting.

-1 [any/range] Specify the source IP mode.

Range: Indicate a range of IP addresses.

Any: It means any IP address will be treated as source IP address.

-2 [any/ip_range/ip_subnet/domain]

Specify the destination IP mode.

Any: No need to specify an IP address for any IP address will be treated as destination IP address.

ip_range: Indicates a range of IP addresses.

ip_subnet: Indicates the IP subnet.

domain: Indicates the domain name.

-3 [any/range] Specify the destination port mode.

Range: Indicate a range of port number.


Any: It means any port number can be used as destination port.

-G [default/specific] Specify the gateway mode.

-L [default/specific] Specify the failover gateway mode.

-s [value] Indicate the source IP start.

Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.0)

-S [value] Indicate the source IP end.


-d [value] Indicate the destination IP start.


-D [value] Indicate the destination IP end.


-p [value] Indicate the destination port start.

Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port start (e.g., 1000).

-P [value] Indicate the destination port end.

Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port end (e.g., 2000).

-y [value] Indicate the priority of the policy route profile. Value: Type a number (0 ~ 250). The default value is “150”.

-I [value] Indicate the interface specified for the policy route profile. Value: Available interfaces include, LAN1 ~ LAN8, IP_Routed_Subnet, DMZ_Subnet, WAN1 ~ WAN5, VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100, WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8

-g [value] Indicate the gateway IP address. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.3.1)

-l [value] Indicate the failover IP address. Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.4.1)

-t [value] It means “protocol”.

Value: Available settings include “TCP”, “UDP”, “TCP/UDP”, “ICMP”

and “Any”.

-n [0/1] Indicates the function of “Force NAT”.



-a [0/1] Indicates to enable the function of failover.



-f [value] It means to specify the interface for failover.

Value: Avaialbe interfaces include, NO_FAILOVER, Default_WAN, Policy1 ~ Policy60 LAN1 ~ LAN8 IP_Routed_Subnet, DMZ_Subnet, WAN1 ~ WAN5, VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,

WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8

-b [value] It means “failback”.


Value: Available settings include,

0: Disable the function of “failback”.

1: Enable the function of “failback”.

-v: View current failback setting.

Diagnose for Policy Route

-s [value] It means “source IP”.

Value: Available settings include:

Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as source IP address.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: The type format (e.g, 192.168.1.0).

-d [value] It means “destination IP”.

Value : Available settings include:

Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as destination IP address.

“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: Specify an IP address.

-p [value] It means “destination port”.

Value: Specify a number or type Any (indicating any number).

-t [value] It means “protocol”.

Value: Available settings include “ICMP”, “TCP”, “UDP” and “Any”.

EExxaammppllee

> ip policy_rt diagnose -s 192.168.1.100 -d any -p any -t ICMP ------------------------------------------------- Matched Route (Priority) ------------------------------------------------- * No_Match ------------------------------------------------- Matched Policy (Priority) ------------------------------------------------- * Policy_1 (200) * Conclusion:The packet was dropped because the send-to interface of the mat ched policy "policy 1" was inactive and there was no failover setting> ip policy_rt -i -1 -o add -1 range -s 192.168.1.10 -S 192.168.1.20 -2 ip_range –d 202.211.100.10 -D 202.211.100.20 -g 202.211.100.1 -I WAN2

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp llaannDDNNSSRReess This command is used to set LAN DNS profile.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip lanDNSRes [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



[<command> <parameter>|…]

The available commands with parameters are listed below.


-a <IP Address> Set IP Address that domain name mapped.

-c <CNAME> Set CNAME value.

-d <address mapping index number>

Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.


-e <0/1> 0: disable the selected LAN DNS profile.

1: enable the selected LAN DNS profile.

-i <profile setting index number>

Type the index number of the profile.

-l List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP address and message).

-n <domain name> Set domain name.

-p <profile name> Set profile name for LAN DNS.

-r Reset the settings for selected profile.

-s <0/1> 0:reply all 1:reply only same subnet packet

-z update LAN DNS config to DNS Cache

EExxaammppllee

> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -p test % Configure Set1's Profile:test > ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -l % Idx: 1 % State: Disable % Profile: test % Domain Name: % -------- Address Mapping Table -------- % Not Set Address Mapping. >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp ddnnssffoorrwwaarrdd This command is used to set LAN DNS profile for conditional DNS forwarding.

ip dnsforward [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]






-a <IP Address> Set forwarded DNS server IP Address.

-d <DNS server mapping index number>

Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.

-e <0/1> 0: disable such function.

1: enable such function.

-i <profile setting index number>

Type the index number of the profile.

-l List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP address and message).

-n <domain name> Set domain name.

-p <profile name> Set profile name for LAN DNS.

-r Reset the settings for selected profile.

EExxaammppllee


> ip dnsforward -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com % Configure Set1's DomainName:ftp.drayTek.com > ip dnsforward -i 1 -a 172.16.1.1 % Configure Set1's IP:172.16.1.1 > ip dnsforward -i 1 -l % Idx: 1 % State: Disable % Profile: test % Domain Name: ftp.drayTek.com % DNS Server IP: 172.16.1.1 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 aaddddrr This command allows users to set the IPv6 address for your router.

ip6 addr -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]

ip6 addr -d [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]

ip6 addr -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]



-s It means to add a static ipv6 address.

-d It means to delete an ipv6 address.

-a It means to show current address(es) status.

-u It means to show only unicast addresses.

prefix It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.

prefix-length It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.

LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface# It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 addr -a LAN Unicast Address: FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/64 (Link) Multicast Address: FF02::2 FF02::1:FF00:0 FF02::1

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ddhhccpp rreeqq__oopptt This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client.

ip6 dhcp req_opt [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]



req_opt It means option-request.


LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface# It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.




-a It means to show current DHCPv6 status.

-s It means to ask the SIP.

-S It means to ask the SIP name.

-d It means to ask the DNS setting.

-D It means to ask the DNS name.

-n It means to ask NTP.

-i It means to ask NIS.

-I It means to ask NIS name.

-p It means to ask NISP.

-P It means to ask NISP name.

-b It means to ask BCMCS.

-B It means to ask BCMCS name.

-r It means to ask refresh time.

Parameter 1: the parameter related to the request will be displayed.

0: the parameter related to the request will not be displayed.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -S 1 > ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -r 1 > ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -a % Interface WAN2 is set to request following DHCPv6 options: % sip name >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ddhhccpp cclliieenntt This command allows you to use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.

ip6 dhcp client [WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]



client It means the dhcp client settings.





-p [IAID] It means to request identity association ID for Prefix Delegation.

-n [IAID] It means to request identity association ID for Non-temporary Address.

-c [parameter] It means to send rapid commit to server.

-i [parameter] It means to send information request to server.

-e[parameter] It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client.

1: Enable

0: Disable


EExxaammppllee

> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –p 2008::1 > ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings: DHCPv6 client enabled request IA_PD whose IAID equals to 2008 > ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –n 1023456 > ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings: DHCPv6 client enabled request IA_NA whose IAID equals to 2008 > system reboot

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ddhhccpp sseerrvveerr This command allows you to configure DHCPv6 server.

ip6 dhcp server [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]



server It means the dhcp server settings.





-i<pool_min_addr> It means to set the start IPv6 address of the address pool.

-x<pool_max_addr> It means to set the end IPv6 address of the address pool.

-d<addr> It means to set the first DNS IPv6 address.

-D<addr> It means to set the second DNS IPv6 address.

-c<parameter> It means to send rapid commit to server.

1: Enable

0: Disable

-e<parameter> It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server.

1: Enable

0: Disable

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 dhcp server -d FF02::1 > ip6 dhcp server -i ff02::1 > ip6 dhcp server -x ff02::3 > ip6 dhcp server -a % Interface LAN has following DHCPv6 server settings: % DHCPv6 server disabled % maximum address of the pool: FF02::3 % minimum address of the pool: FF02::1 % 1st DNS IPv6 Addr: FF02::1


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 iinntteerrnneett This command allows you to configure settings for accessing Internet.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



-W n W means to set WAN interface and n means different selections. Default is WAN1. n=1: WAN1 n=2: WAN2 n=3: WAN3 . . n=X: WANx

-M n M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means different modes (represented by 0 – 5) n= 0: Offline, n=1: PPP, n=2: TSPC, n=3: AICCU, n=4: DHCPv6, n=5: Static n=6: 6in4-Static n=7: 6rd




For 6rd

-C n Set 6rd Connection Mode.

n = 0: Auto

n = 1: Static.

-s [server] Set 6rd IPv4 Border Relay.

server= IPv4 address

-m n Set 6rd IPv4 address mask length.

n=1 to 32.

-p [prefix] Set 6rd IPv6 prefix.

prefix= IPv6 address

-l n Set 6rd IPv6 prefix length.

n=1 to 64.

For 6in4

-s [server] Set 6in4 Remote Endpoint IPv4 Address.

server= IPv4 address

-I [IPv6 Addr] Set 6in4 IPv6 Address.

IPv6 Addr= IPv6 address.

-P n Set 6in4 IPv6 WAN prefix length.

n=1 to 64. (Default number is 64)

-p [prefix] Set 6in4 LAN Routed Prefix.

prefix= IPv6 address

-l n Set 6in4 LAN Routed Prefix length.



-T n Set 6in4 Tunnel TTL.


For TSPC/AICCU

-u [username] Set Username (max. 63 characters).

-P [password] Set Password (max. 63 characters).

-s [server] Set Tunnel Server IP.

server= IPv4 Address or URL (max. 63 characters).

For AICCU -p [prefix] Set Subnet Prefix (AICCU).

prefix=IPv6 address.

-l n Subnet Prefix length (AICCU)

n=1 to 64. (Default number is 64).

-o [0/1] Set AICCU always on. On = 1, Off = 0.

-f [Tunnel ID] Set AICCU tunnel ID.

Tunnel ID= the number (e.g., T345678) offered by tunnel broker.

For Static

-w [addr] Set Default Gateway.

Addr= IPv6 address.

For others

-d <server> Set 1st DNS Server IP

server= IPv6 Address.

-D <server> Set 2nd DNS Server IP.

server= IPv6 Address.

-t <dhcp/ra/none> Set ipv6 PPP WAN test mode for DHCP or RA.

-V View IPv6 Internet Access Profile.

-k Dial the Tunnel on the WAN.

-j Drop the Tunnel on the WAN.

-r n Set Prefix State Machine RA timeout.

n=any value (default is 15), (unit: second)

-c n Set Prefix State Machine DHCPv6 Client timeout.

n=any value (default is 15), (unit: second)

-q [value] Set WAN detection mode.

0: NS Detect.

1: Ping Detect.

2: Always On.

-z [value] Set Ping Detect TTL.

value= 0 ~ 255.

-x [hostname/IPv6 address] Set Ping Detect Host (hostname or IPv6 address).

-I [interval] Set ipv6 connection interval.

Interval = 1500-60000 (unit:10ms).

-b [0/1] Enable DNSv6 based on DHCPv6.

0= off

1= on

EExxaammppllee


> ip6 internet -W 1 -M 2 -u userid -p passwd -s broker.freenet6.net This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 nneeiigghh This command allows you to display IPv6 neighbour table.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 neigh –s [inet6_addr] [eth_addr] [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]

ip6 neigh -d [inet6_addr] [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]

ip6 neigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]



-s It means to add a neighbour.

-d It means to delete a neighbour.

-a It means to show neighbour status.

inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address

eth_addr Type submask address.

LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the neighbor.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 neigh -s 2001:2222:3333::1111 00:50:7F:11:ac:22:WAN2 Neighbour 2001:2222:3333::1111 successfully added! > ip6 neigh -a I/F ADDR MAC STATE ------------------------------------------------------------------------- LAN FF02::1 33-33-00-00-00-01 CONNECTED WAN2 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED WAN2 2001:2222:3333::1111 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED WAN2 2001:2222:6666::1111 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED WAN2 :: 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED LAN :: NONE >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ppnneeiigghh This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 pneigh -s inet6_addr [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]

ip6 pneigh -d inet6_addr [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]

ip6 pneigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]



-s It means to add a proxy neighbour.

-d It means to delete a proxy neighbour.

-a It means to show proxy neighbour status.

inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address

LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2

Specify an interface for the proxy neighbor.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 neigh -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 LAN % Neighbour FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 successfully added!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 rroouuttee This command allows you to

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 route -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [gateway] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#> [-D]

ip6 route -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [gateway] [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|

USB1|USB2|VPN1|...|VPN32] [-D]

ip6 route -d [prefix] [prefix-length]

ip6 route -a LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2|VPN1|...|VPN32]



-s It means to add a route.

-d It means to delete a route.

-a It means to show the route status.

-D It means that such route will be treated as the default route.

prefix It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.


gateway It means the gateway of the router.

LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2|VPN1|...|VPN32]

It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.

EExxaammppllee


> ip6 route -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500 16 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 LAN % Route FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500/16 successfully added! > ip6 route -a LAN

PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN _EXPIRES_ _NEXT-HOP_ I/F METRIC STATE FLAGS

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

FE80::/128 LAN 0 UNICAST U

0 ::

FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/128 LAN 0 UNICAST U

0 ::

FE80::/64 LAN 256 UNICAST U

0

FE80::/16 LAN 1024 UNICAST UGA

0 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100

FF02::1/128 LAN 0 UNICAST UC

0 FF02::1

FF00::/8 LAN 256 UNICAST U

0

::/0 LAN -1 UNREACHABLE !

0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ppiinngg This command allows you to pin an IPv6 address or a host.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 ping [IPV6 address/Host] [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2][send count] [data_size(1~1452)]



IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.



EExxaammppllee

> ip6 ping 2001:4860:4860::8888 WAN2 Pinging 2001:4860:4860::8888 with 64 bytes of Data: Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <% loss> >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ttrraacceerrtt This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host.

ip6 tracert [IPV6 address/Host] [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4|WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]



IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.



EExxaammppllee

> ip6 tracert 2001:4860:4860::8888 traceroute to 2001:4860:4860::8888, 30 hops max through protocol ICMP 1 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 340 ms 2 2001:4DE0:1000:A22::1 330 ms 3 2001:4DE0:A::1 330 ms 4 2001:4DE0:1000:34::1 340 ms 5 2001:7F8:1: :A501:5169:1 330 ms 6 2001:4860::1:0:4B3 350 ms 7 2001:4860::8:0:2DAF 330 ms 8 2001:4860::2:0:66E 340 ms 9 Request timed out. * 10 2001:4860:4860::8888 350 ms Trace complete. >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 ttssppcc This command allows you to display TSPC status.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 tspc [ifno]




Ifno=1 (means WAN1)

Info=2 (means WAN2) … etc.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 tspc 2 Local Endpoint v4 Address : 111.243.177.223 Local Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b9Router DNS name : 8886666.broker.freenet6.net Remote Endpoint v4 Address :81.171.72.11 Remote Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b8Tspc Prefixlen : 56 Tunnel Broker: Amsterdam.freenet.net


Status: Connected >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 rraaddvvdd This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server.

SSyynnttaaxx

Ip6 radvd [LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]

ip6 radvd [R|u]



LAN1|LAN2|...|LAN4 It means to specify LAN interface for such address.

<command> <parameter>

-s It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the RADVD server.

1: Enable the RADVD server.

0: Disable the RADVD server.

-D <1/0> Enable/Disable the RDNSS.

-d <lifetime> Set the default lifetime for RADVD server.

-i <lifetime> Set the mininum interval time(sec) for RADVD server.

-I <lifetime> Set the maximum interval time(sec) for RADVD server.

Lifetime It means to set the lifetime.

The lifetime associated with the default router in units of seconds. It’s used to control the lifetime of the prefix. The maximum value corresponds to 18.2 hours. A lifetime of 0 indicates that the router is not a default router and should not appear on the default router list.

Type the number (unit: second) you want.

-h <hoplimit> Set hop limit for RADVD server.

-m <mtu/auto> Set MTU value for RADVD server.

Range: 1280-1500.

auto - auto select MTU from WAN.

-e <time> Set reachable time.

-a <time/infinity> Set retransmit timer /infinity.

-p <0/1/2> Set default preference Low/Medium/High for RADVD server.

-v View the RADVD server configuration.

-V It means to show the RADVD configuration.

-L <time/infinity>: Set prefix valid lifetime.

-P <time/infinity> Set prefix preferred lifetime.

-r [num] Make RADVD test for item [num].

num - 0-default, 121:logo 121, 124:logo 124.

-R Reload Config and send RA for subnets.

-u View MTU on all interfaces.

EExxaammppllee


> ip6 radvd LAN1 -v % [LAN1] setting ! % Status : Enable % RDNSS : Enable % Default Lifetime : 1800 seconds % min interval time: 200 seconds % MAX interval time: 600 seconds % Hop limit : 64 % MTU : auto % Reachable time : 0 % Retransmit time : 0 % Preference : Medium % Prefix valid lifetime : 2592000 % Prefix preferred lifetime : 604800

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 mmnnggtt This command allows you to manage the settings for access list.

ip6 mngt list

ip6 mngt list [add<index> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <index>|flush]

ip6 mngt status

ip6 mngt [http|telnet|ping|https|ssh] [on|off]



list It means to show the setting information of the access list.

status It means to show the status of IPv6 management.

add It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute management through Internet.

index It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be configured for IPv6 management.

prefix It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing Internet.


remove It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6 settings.

flush It means to clear the IPv6 access table.

http|telnet|ping|https|ssh These protocols are used for accessing Internet.

on|off It means to enable (on) or disable (off) the Internet accessing through http/telnet/ping.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 mngt list add 1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128 > ip6 mngt list add 2 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1020 128 > ip6 mngt list add 3 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:2080 128 > ip6 mngt list % IPv6 Access List : Index IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length ========================================


1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128 2 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1020 128 3 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:2080 128 > ip6 mngt status % IPv6 Remote Management : telnet : off, http : off, ping : off

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 oonnlliinnee This command allows you to check the online status of IPv6 LAN /WAN.

ip6 online [WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2]



WAN1|WAN2|USB1|USB2 It means the connection interface.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 online WAN1 % WAN1 online status : % IPv6 WAN1 Disabled % Default Gateway : :: % Interface : DOWN % UpTime : 0:00:00 % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static % Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0 % MTU Onlink: 1280 , Config MTU : 0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 aaiiccccuu This command allows you to view IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of AICCU.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 aiccu -i <ifno> -r

ip6 aiccu -i <ifno> -s



-r Reset the AICCU retry account for the specified interace.

ifno ifno=1, WAN1

ifno=2, WAN2

ifno=x, WANx

-s Show the interface status.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 aiccu -i 1 -r


reset AICCU Retry Account OK! >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 nnttpp This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for NTP (Network Time Protocols) server.

ip6 ntp –h

ip6 ntp –v

ip6 ntp –p [0/1]



–h It is used to display the usage of such command.

-v It is used to show the NTP state.

-p <0/1> It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6.

0 – Auto

1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server.

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 ntp -p 1 % Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iipp66 llaann This command allows you to configure settings for IPv6 LAN.

SSyynnttaaxx

ip6 lan -l n [-<l:w:d:D:m:o:s> <parameter> | ... ]



–h It is used to display the usage of such command.

<l:w:d:D:m:o:s ><parameter> The following lists all of the available commands with parameters.

-l n Select LAN interface to be set.

n = 1: LAN1. Default is LAN1. n = 2: LAN2 n = x: LANx

-w n Select WAN interface to be primary.

n = 0: None n = 1: WAN1 n = 2: WAN2 n = x: WANx.

-d <server> Set the first DNS Server IP.

<server>= IPv6 Addrress.

-D <server Set secondd DNS Server IP.

<server>= IPv6 Addrress.

-m n Set IPv6 LAN management. Default is SLAAC.

n = 0: OFF n = 1: SLAAC


n = 2: DHCPv6.

-o n Enable Other option(O-bit) flag. (O-bit is redundant when management is DHCPv6)

n= 0: Disable n= 1: Enable.

-e n: Add an extension WAN.

n = 1: WAN1 n = 2: WAN2 n = x: WANx.

-E n Delete an extension WAN.

n = 1: WAN1 n = 2: WAN2 n = x: WANx.

-b map Set bit map(decimal) for extension WANs.

map = bit 0: WAN1 map = bit 1: WAN2 map = bit n: WAN(n+1)

-f n Disable IPv6.

n = 1: Disable IPv6 n = 0: Enable IPv6.

-s n Show IPv6 LAN setting.

n = 0: show all. n = 1: LAN1, 2: LAN2, ... x: LANx, 5: DMZ. Default is show all

EExxaammppllee

> ip6 lan -l 2 -w 1 -d 2001:4860:4860::8888 -o 1 -f 0 -s 2 % Set LAN2! % Set primary WAN1!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iippff vviieeww IPF users to view the version of the IP filter, to view/set the log flag, to view the running IP filter rules.

ipf view [-VcdhrtzZ]



-V It means to show the version of this IP filter.

-c It means to show the running call filter rules.

-d It means to show the running data filter rules.

-h It means to show the hit-number of the filter rules.

-r It means to show the running call and data filter rules.

-t It means to display all the information at one time.

-z It means to clear a filter rule’s statistics.

-Z It means to clear IP filter’s gross statistics.

EExxaammppllee

> ipf view -V -c -d ipf: IP Filter: v3.3.1 (1824) Kernel: IP Filter: v3.3.1


Running: yes Log Flags: 0x80947278 = nonip Default: pass all, Logging: available

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iippff sseett This command is used to set general rule for firewall.

ipf set [Options]

ipf set [SET_NO] rule [RULE_NO] [Options]



Options There are several options provided here, such as -v, -c [SET_NO], -d [SET_NO],… and etc.

SET_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 12) of filter set.

RULE_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 7) of filter rule set.

-v Type “-v” to view the configuration of general set.

-c [SET_NO] It means to setup Call Filter, e.g., -c 2. The range for the index number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).

-d [SET_NO] It means to setup Data Filter, e.g., -d 3. The range for the index number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).

-l [VALUE] It means to setup Log Flag, e.g., -l 2

Type “0” to disable the log flag.

Type “1” to display the log of passed packet.

Type “2” to display the log of blocked packet.

Type “3” to display the log of non-matching packet.

- p [VALUE] It means to setup actions for packet not matching any rule, e.g., -p 1

Type “0” to let all the packets pass;

Type “1” to block all the packets.

-R [v4/v6] [Enable/Disable] Accept routing packet from WAN., e.g.,

-R v4 0 : Set Accept routing packet from WAN by IPv4 is enable

-R v4 1 : Set Accept routing packet from WAN by IPv6 is disable

-R v6 0 : Set Accept routing packet from WAN by IPv4 is enable

-R v6 1 : Set Accept routing packet from WAN by IPv6 is disable

-L [VALUE] Enable/Disable Strict Security Firewall, e.g., -L 1.

0:Disable, 1:Enable

-C [VALUE] Setup the code page, e.g., -C 12.

Type 1 ~ 12 as the code page number. If “0” is set, the code page setting is disabled.

-M [APPE_NO] It means to configure APPE for the packets not matching with any rule, e.g., -M 1



-U [URL_NO] It means to configure URL content filter for the packets not matching with any rule, e.g., -U 1



-W [WEB_NO] Setup WEB Content Filter for packet not matching any rule.

-D[ DNS_NO] Setup DNS Filter for packet not matching any rule.


-g [VALUE] Setup DNS Filter syslog.

Type “0” to disable the function.

Type “1” to enable the function.

-a [AD_SET] It means to configure the advanced settings.

-f [VALUE] It means to accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets.

-E [VALUE] It means to set the maximum count (0 ~ 60000) for session limitation.

-F [VALUE] It means to configure the load-balance policy.

-Q [VALUE] It means to set the QoS class.

EExxaammppllee

> ipf set -c 1 #set call filter start from set 1 Setting saved. > ipf set -d 2 #set data filter start from set 2 Setting saved. > ipf set -v Call Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 1) Data Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 2) Log Flag : None Actions for packet not matching any rule: Pass or Block : Pass CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I Max Sessions Limit: 60000 Current Sessions : 0 Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict QOS Class : None APP Enforcement : None URL Content Filter: None Load-Balance policy : Auto-select -------------------------------------------------------------- CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I Window size : 65535 Session timeout : 1440 DrayTek Banner : Enable --------------------------------------------------------------- Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets : Enable Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets: Enable ---------------------------------------------------------------- Strict Security Checking [ ]APP Enforcement >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iippff rruullee This command is used to set filter rule for firewall.

ipf rule s r [-<command> <parameter> | ...

ipf rule s r -v




s Such word means Filter Set, range form 1~12.

r Such word means Filter Rule, range from 1~7.

<Command><parameter> The following lists all of the available commands with parameters.

-e It means to enable or disable the rule setting.

0- disable

1- enable

-s o:g <obj> It means to specify source IP object and IP group.

o - indicates “object”.

g - indicates “group”.

obj - indicates index number of object or index number of group. Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-s g 3" means the third source IP group profile.

–s u <Address Type> <Start IP Address> <End IP Address> | <Address Mask>

It means to configure source IP address including address type, start IP address, end IP address and address mask.

u – It means “user defined”.

Address Type - Type the number (representing different address type).

0 - Subnet Address

1 - Single Address

2 - Any Address

3 - Range Address

Example:

Set Subnet Address => -s u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

Set Single Address => -s u 1 192.168.1.10

Set Any Address => -s u 2

Set Range Address => -s u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15

–d u <Address Type> <Start IP Address> <End IP Address> | <Address Mask>

It means to configure destination IP address including address type, start IP address, end IP address and address mask.

u – It means “user defined”.

Address Type - Type the number (representing different address type).

0 - Subnet Address

1 - Single Address

2 - Any Address

3 - Range Address

Example:

Set Subnet Address => -d u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

Set Single Address => -d u 1 192.168.1.10

Set Any Address => -d u 2

Set Range Address => -d u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15

-d o:g <obj> It means to specify destination IP object and IP group.

o – indicates “object”.

g – indicates “group”

<obj>– indicates index number of object or index number of group. Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-d g 1" means the first destination IP group profile.

-S o:g <obj> It means to specify Service Type object and IP group.

o – indicates “object”.

g – indicates “group”


<obj> – indicates index number of object or index number of group. Available settings range from 1-96. For example, “-S 0 1" means the first service type object profile.

-S u <protocol> <source_port__value> <destination_port_vale>

It means to configure advanced settings for Service Type, such as protocol and port range.

u – it means “user defined”.

<protocol> – It means TCP(6),UDP(17), TCP/UDP(255).

<source_port__value> –

1 – Port OP, range is 0-3. 0:= =, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<

3 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is 1-65535.

5 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.

<destination_port_value>:

2 – Port OP, range is 0-3, 0:==, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<

4 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is 1-65535.

6 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.

-F <index> <log flag> It means the Filter action you can specify.

index – Available settings contain:

0 –Pass Immediately,

1 – Block Immediately,

2 – Pass if no further match,

3 – Block if no further match.

log flag - 0 means disable to save and display in Syslog; 1 means enable to save and display in Syslog.

-q <index> <log flag> It means the classification for QoS.

index – Available settings contain:

1– Class 1,

2 – Class 2,

3 – Class 3,

4 – Other


-l <wan> <log flag> It means to set load balance policy.

wan – Available settings contain 0 (means auto-select), 1 (means WAN1), 2 (means WAN2) and 3 (means WAN3).

log flag – 0 means disable to save and display in Syslog; 1 means enable to save and display in Syslog.

-E<index> It means to enable APP Enforcement for Strict Security Checking.

<index> – Available settings for APP Enforcement are:

0 – disable APP Enforcement.

1- enable APP Enforcement.

-a <index> <Log Flag> It means to specify which APP Enforcement profile will be applied.

<index> – Available settings range for APP Enforcement is 0 ~ 32. “0” means no profile will be applied.


-u <index> <Log Flag> It means to specify which URL Content Filter profile will be applied.

<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 8. “0” means no profile will be applied.

log flag- 0 means disable to save and display in Syslog; 1 means enable to save and display in Syslog.

-w <index> <Log Flag> It means to specify which Web Content Filter profile will be applied.




-n <index> <Log Flag> It means to specify which DNS Filter profile will be applied.



-c <0-20> It means to set code page. Different number represents different code page.

0. None

1. ANSI(1250)-Central Europe

2. ANSI(1251)-Cyrillic

3. ANSI(1252)-Latin I

4. ANSI(1253)-Greek

5. ANSI(1254)-Turkish

6. ANSI(1255)-Hebrew

7. ANSI(1256)-Arabic

8. ANSI(1257)-Baltic

9. ANSI(1258)-Viet Nam

10. OEM(437)-United States

11. OEM(850)-Multilingual Latin I

12. OEM(860)-Portuguese

13. OEM(861)-Icelandic

14. OEM(863)-Canadian French

15. OEM(865)-Nordic

16. ANSI/OEM(874)-Thai

17. ANSI/OEM(932)-Japanese Shift-JIS

18. ANSI/OEM(936)-Simplified Chinese GBK

19. ANSI/OEM(949)-Korean

20. ANSI/OEM(950)-Traditional Chinese Big5

-C <Windows Size> <Session_Timeout>

It means to set Window size and Session timeout (Minute).

<Windows Size> - Available settings range from 1 ~ 65535.

<Session_Timeout> - Make the best utilization of network resources.

-M <Your Comments> Set the content of the comments for a rule.

-v It is used to show current filter/rule settings.

EExxaammppllee

> ipf rule 2 1 -e 1 -M "Your Comments" -s "o 1" -d "o 2" -S "o 1" -F "1 1" Setting saved. > ipf rule 2 1 -v Filter Set 2 Rule 1: Status : Enable Comments: Your Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: <null>, <null>, <null>, <null> Direction : LAN -> WAN Source IP : Object1,


Destination IP: Object2, Service Type : TCP/UDPObject1, Fragments : Don't Care Pass or Block : Block Immediately Branch to Other Filter Set: None Max Sessions Limit : 60000 Current Sessions : 0 Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict Qos Class : None APP Enforcement : None URL Content Filter : None WEB Content Filter : None DNS Filter : None Load-Balance policy : Auto-select Log : Enable ---------------------------------------------------------------------- CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I Window size : 65535 Session timeout : 1440 DrayTek Banner : Enable --------------------------------------------------------------------- Strict Security Checking [ ]APP Enforcement >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: iippff fflloowwttrraacckk This command is used to set and view flowtrack sessions.

ipf flowtrack set [-re]

ipf flowtrack view [-fb]

ipf flowtrack [-i][-p][-t]



-r It means to refresh the flowtrack.

-e It means to enable or disable the flowtrack.

-f It means to show the sessions state of flowtrack. If you do not specify any IP address, then all the session state of flowtrack will be displayed.

-b It means to show all of IP sessions state.

- i [IP address] It means to specify IP address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55).

-p[value] It means to type a port number (e.g., -p 1024).

Available settings are 0 ~ 65535.

-t [value] It means to specify a protocol (e.g., -t tcp).

Available settings include:

tcp

udp

icmp


EExxaammppllee

>ipf flowtrack set -r Refresh the flowstate ok > ipf flowtrack view -f Start to show the flowtrack sessions state: ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:59939 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0 REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:59939 ,ifno=3 proto=17, age=93023180(3920), flag=203 ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:15073 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0 REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:15073 ,ifno=3 proto=17, age=93025100(2000), flag=203 ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11: 7247 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0 REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11: 7247 ,ifno=3 proto=17, age=93020100(7000), flag=203 End to show the flowtrack sessions state > ipf flowtrack set -e

Current flow_enable=0

> ipf flowtrack set -e

Curretn flow_enable=1

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: LLoogg This command allows users to view log for WAN interface such as call log, IP filter log, flush log buffer, etc.

log [-cfhiptwx?] [-F a| c | f | w]



-c It means to show the latest call log.

-f It means to show the IP filter log.

-F It means to show the flush log buffer.

a: flush all logs

c: flush the call log

f: flush the IP filter log

w: flush the WAN log

-h It means to show this usage help.

-p It means to show PPP/MP log.

-t It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer.

-w It means to show WAN log.

-x It means to show packet body hex dump.

EExxaammppllee

> log -w 25:36:25.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0


Next server IP = 0.0.0.0 Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0 25:36:33.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0 Next server IP = 0.0.0.0 Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0 25:36:41.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0 Next server IP = 0.0.0.0 Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0 25:36:49.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0 Next server IP = 0.0.0.0 Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0 25:36:57.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4 Client IP = 0.0.0.0 Your IP = 0.0.0.0 --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt ffttppppoorrtt This command allows users to set FTP port for management.

mngt ftpport [FTP port]



FTP port It means to type the number for FTP port. The default setting is 21.

EExxaammppllee > mngt ftpport 21 % Set FTP server port to 21 done.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt hhttttppppoorrtt This command allows users to set HTTP port for management.

mngt httpport [Http port]



Http port It means to enter the number for HTTP port. The default setting is 80.

EExxaammppllee > mngt httpport 80

% Set web server port to 80 done.


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt hhttttppssppoorrtt This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management.

mngt httpsport [Https port]



Https port It means to type the number for HTTPS port. The default setting is 443.

EExxaammppllee > mngt httpsport 443 % Set web server port to 443 done.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt tteellnneettppoorrtt This command allows users to set telnet port for management.

mngt telnetport [Telnet port]



Telnet port It means to type the number for telnet port. The default setting is 23.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt telnetport 23 % Set Telnet server port to 23 done.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt sssshhppoorrtt This command allows users to set SSH port for management.

mngt sshport [ssh port]



ssh port It means to type the number for SSH port. The default setting is 22.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt sshport 23 % Set ssh port to 23 done.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt nnooppiinngg This command is used to pass or block Ping from LAN PC to the internet.

mngt noping [on]

mngt noping [off]

mngt noping [viewlog]

mngt noping [clearlog]




on All PING packets will be forwarded from LAN PC to Internet.

off All PING packets will be blocked from LAN PC to Internet.

viewlog It means to display a log of ping action, including source MAC and source IP.

clearlog It means to clear the log of ping action.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt noping off No Ping Packet Out is OFF!!


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt ddeeffeennsseewwoorrmm This command can block specified port for passing through the router.

mngt defenseworm [on]

mngt defenseworm [off]

mngt defenseworm [add port]

mngt defenseworm [del port]

mngt defenseworm [viewlog]

mngt defenseworm [clearlog]



on It means to activate the function of defense worm packet out.

off It means to inactivate the function of defense worm packet out.

add port It means to add a new TCP port for block.

del port It means to delete a TCP port for block.

viewlog It means to display a log of defense worm packet, including source MAC and source IP.

clearlog It means to remove the log of defense worm packet.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt defenseworm add 21 Add TCP port 21 Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445, 21 > mngt defenseworm del 21 Delete TCP port 21 Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt rrmmttccffgg This command can allow the system administrators to login from the Internet. By default, it is not allowed.

mngt rmtcfg [status]

mngt rmtcfg [enable]

mngt rmtcfg [disable]

mngt rmtcfg [http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/tr069] [on/off]



status It means to display current setting for your reference.

enable It means to allow the system administrators to login from the Internet.

disable It means to deny the system administrators to login from the Internet.

http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/tr069

It means to specify one of the servers/protocols for enabling or disabling.

on/off on – enable the function.


off – disable the function.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt rmtcfg ftp on Enable server fail Remote configure function has been disabled please enable by enter mngt rmtcfg enable > mngt rmtcfg enable %% Remote configure function has been enabled. > mngt rmtcfg ftp on %% FTP server has been enabled.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt llaannaacccceessss This command allows users to manage accessing into Vigor router through LAN port.

mngt lanaccess -e [0/1] –s [value] –i [value]

mngt lanaccess –f

mngt lanaccess –d

mngt lanaccess –v

mngt lanaccess –h



-e[0/1] It means to enable/disable the function.

0-disable the function.

1-enable the function.

-s[value] It means to specify service offered.

Available values include:

FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, SSH, None, All

-i[value] It means the interface which is allowed to access.


LAN2~LAN6, DMZ, IP Routed Subnet, None, All

Note: LAN1 is always allowed for accessing into the router.

-f It means to flush all of the settings.

-d It means to restore the factory default settings.

-v It means to view current settings.

-h It means to get the usage of such command.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt lanaccess -e 1 > mngt lanaccess -s FTP,TELNET > mngt lanaccess -i LAN3 > > mngt lanaccess -v Current LAN Access Control Setting: * Enable:Yes * Service: - FTP:Yes


- HTTP:No - HTTPS:No - TELNET:Yes - SSH:No * Subnet: - LAN 2: disabled - LAN 3: enabled - LAN 4: disabled - LAN 5: disabled - LAN 6: disabled - DMZ: disabled - IP Routed Subnet: disabled Note: the settings do NOT apply to LAN1, LAN1 is always allowed to access the router

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt eecchhooiiccmmpp This command allows users to reject or accept PING packets from the Internet.

mngt echoicmp [enable]

mngt echoicmp [disable]



enable It means to accept the echo ICMP packet.

disable It means to drop the echo ICMP packet.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt echoicmp enable %% Echo ICMP packet enabled.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt aacccceesssslliisstt This command allows you to specify that the system administrator can login from a specific host or network. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.

mngt accesslist list

mngt accesslist add [index][ip addr][mask]

mngt accesslist remove [index]

mngt accesslist flush



list It can display current setting for your reference.

add It means adding a new entry.

index It means to specify the number of the entry.

ip addr It means to specify an IP address.

mask It means to specify the subnet mask for the IP address.


remove It means to delete the selected item.

flush It means to remove all the settings in the access list.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt accesslist add 1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0 %% Set OK. > mngt accesslist list %% Access list : Index IP address Subnet mask ========================================== 1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmnnggtt ssnnmmpp This command allows you to configure SNMP for management.

mngt snmp [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]






-e <1/2> 1: Enable the SNMP function.

2: Disable the SNMP function.

-g<Community name> It means to set the name for getting community by typing a proper character. (max. 23 characters)

-s <Community name> It means to set community by typing a proper name. (max. 23 characters)

-m <IP address> It means to set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function. Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.

-t <Community name> It means to set trap community by typing a proper name. (max. 23 characters)

-n <IP address> It means to set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the trap community.

-T <seconds> It means to set the trap timeout <0~999>.

-V It means to list SNMP setting.

EExxaammppllee

> mngt snmp -e 1 -g draytek -s DK -m 192.168.1.1 -t trapcom -n 10.20.3.40 -T 88 SNMP Agent Turn on!!! Get Community set to draytek Set Community set to DK Manager Host IP set to 192.168.1.1 Trap Community set to trapcom Notification Host IP set to 10.20.3.40 Trap Timeout set to 88 seconds

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett sswwiittcchh This command is used to configure multi-subnet.


msubnet switch [2/3/4][On/Off]



2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.

2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

On/Off On means turning on the subnet for the specified LAN interface.

Off means turning off the subnet.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet switch 2 On % LAN2 Subnet On! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett aaddddrr This command is used to configure IP address for the specified LAN interface.

msubnet addr [2/3/4][IP address]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

IP address Type the private IP address for the specified LAN interface.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.1 % Set LAN2 subnet IP address done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett nnmmaasskk This command is used to configure net mask address for the specified LAN interface.

msubnet nmask [2/3/4][IP address]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3


4=LAN4

IP address Type the subnet mask address for the specified LAN interface.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet nmask 2 255.255.0.0 % Set LAN2 subnet mask done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ssttaattuuss This command is used to display current status of subnet.

msubnet status [2/3/4]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet status 2 % LAN2 Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60 % DHCP server: Off % Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.10, Pool Count: 50

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ddhhccppss This command allows you to enable or disable DHCP server for the subnet.

msubnet dhcps [2/3/4][On/Off]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

On/Off On means enabling the DHCP server for the specified LAN interface.

Off means disabling the DHCP server.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet dhcps 3 off % LAN3 Subnet DHCP Server disabled! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett nnaatt


This command is used to configure the subnet for NAT or Routing usage.

msubnet nat [2/3/4] [On/Off]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

On/Off On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage.

Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing usage.

EExxaammppllee

> > msubnet nat 2 off % LAN2 Subnet is for Routing usage! %Note: If you have multiple WAN connections, please be reminded to setup a Load-Balance policy so that packets from this subnet will be forwarded to the right WAN interface! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ggaatteewwaayy This command is used to configure an IP address as the gateway used for subnet.

msubnet gateway [2/3/4] [Gateway IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

Gateway IP Specify an IP address as the gateway IP.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet gateway 2 192.168.1.13 % Set LAN2 Dhcp Gateway IP done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett iippccnntt This command is used to defined the total number allowed for each LAN interface.

msubnet ipcnt [2/3/4] [IP counts]





2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

IP counts Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN interface.

The available range is from 0 to 220.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet ipcnt 2 15 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ttaallkk This command is used to establish a route between two LAN interfaces.

msubnet talk [1/2/3/4] [1/2/3/4] [On/Off]



1/2/3/4 It means LAN interface.

1=LAN1

2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

On/Off On – It means to establish a link for the selected LAN with others.

Off - It means to terminate the link.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet talk 1 2 on % Enable routing between LAN1 and LAN2! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > msubnet talk % msubnet talk <1/2/3/4> <1/2/3/4> <On/Off> % where 1:LAN1, 2:LAN2, 3:LAN3, 4:LAN4 % Now: % LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 % LAN1 V % LAN2 V V % LAN3 V % LAN4 V

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ssttaarrttiipp This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP.

msubnet startip [2/3/4] [Gateway IP]




2/3/4 It means LAN interface.

2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

Gateway IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.90 %Set LAN2 Dhcp Start IP done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > msubnet startip ? % msubnet startip <2/3/4> <Gateway IP> % Now: LAN2 192.168.2.90; LAN3 192.168.3.10; LAN4 192.168.4.10;

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ppppppiipp This command is used to configure a starting IP address for PPP connection.

msubnet pppip [2/3/4] [Start IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

Start IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for PPP connection.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet pppip 2 192.168.2.250 % Set LAN2 PPP(IPCP) Start IP done !!! This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router. > msubnet pppip ? % msubnet pppip <2/3/4> <Start IP> % Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250; LAN3 192.168.3.200; LAN4 192.168.4.200

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett nnooddeettyyppee This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option.

msubnet nodetype [2/3/4][count]





2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

count Choose the following number for specifying different node type.

1= B-node

2= P-node

4= M-node

8= H-node

0= Not specify any type for node.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet nodetype ? % msubnet nodetype <2/3/4> <count> % Now: LAN2 0; LAN3 0; LAN4 0 % count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node > msubnet nodetype 2 1 % Set LAN2 Dhcp Node Type done !!! > msubnet nodetype ? % msubnet nodetype <2/3/4> <count> % Now: LAN2 1; LAN3 0; LAN4 0

% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett pprriimmWWIINNSS This command is used to configure primary WINS server.

msubnet primWINS [2/3/4] [WINS IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP.

EExxaammppllee

> > msubnet primWINS ? % msubnet primWINS <2/3/4> <WINS IP> % Now: LAN2 0.0.0.0; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0 > msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5 % Set LAN2 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!! > msubnet primWINS ? % msubnet primWINS <2/3/4> <WINS IP> % Now: LAN2 192.168.3.5; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett sseeccWWIINNSS This command is used to configure secondary WINS server.

msubnet secWINS [2/3/4] [WINS IP]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP.

EExxaammppllee

> > msubnet secWINS 2 192.168.3.89 % Set LAN2 Dhcp Secondary WINS IP done !!! > msubnet secWINS ? % msubnet secWINS <2/3/4> <WINS IP> % Now: LAN2 192.168.3.89; LAN3 0.0.0.0; LAN4 0.0.0.0


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett ttffttpp This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet.

msubnet tftp [2/3/4] [TFTP server name]




2=LAN2

3=LAN3

4=LAN4

TFTP server name Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet tftp ? % msubnet tftp <2/3/4> <TFTP server name> % Now: LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 > msubnet tftp 2 publish % Set LAN2 TFTP Server Name done !!! > msubnet tftp ? % msubnet tftp <2/3/4> <TFTP server name> % Now: LAN2 publish LAN3 LAN4

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: mmssuubbnneett mmttuu This command allows you to configure MTU value for LAN/IP Routed Subnet.

msubnet mtu [interface][value]



interface Available settings include LAN1~LAN4, IP_Routed_Subnet.

value 1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)

EExxaammppllee

> msubnet mtu LAN1 1492% Set LAN1 subnet mtu as 1492 > msubnet mtu ? Usage: >msubnet mtu <interface> <value> <interface>: LAN1~LAN4,IP_Routed_Subnet, <value>: 1000 ~ 1496 (Bytes), de


fault: 1500 (Bytes) e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492 Current Settings: LAN1 MTU: 1492 (Bytes) LAN2 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN3 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) LAN4 MTU: 1500 (Bytes) IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes)

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt iipp oobbjj This command is used to create an IP object profile.

object ip obj setdefault

object ip obj INDEX -v

object ip obj INDEX -n NAME

object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT

object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]



setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.

INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile.

-v It means to view the information of the specified object profile.

Example: object ip obj 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP object.

NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.

Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce

-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP object.

INTERFACE=0, means any

INTERFACE=1, means LAN

INTERFACE=3, means WAN

Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0

-s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.

INVERT=0, means disableing the function.

INVERT=1, means enabling the function.

Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1

-a TYPE It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.

TYPE=0, means Mask

TYPE=1, means Single

TYPE=2, means Any

TYPE=3, means Rang

Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2

[START_IP] When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a


starting point and another IP address as end point.

Type an IP address.

[END/MASK_IP] Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.

EExxaammppllee

> object ip obj 1 -n marketing > object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45 > object ip obj 1 -v IP Object Profile 1 Name :[marketing] Interface:[Any] Address type:[single] Start ip address:[192.168.1.45] End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0] Invert Selection:[0]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt iipp ggrrpp This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.

object ip grp setdefault

object ip grp INDEX -v

object ip grp INDEX -n NAME

object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX




INDEX It means the index number of the specified group profile.

-v It means to view the information of the specified group profile.

Example: object ip grp 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP group.


Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce

-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP group.




Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0

-a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.

Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5 The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.

EExxaammppllee

> object ip grp 2 -n First IP Group Profile 2 Name :[First]


Interface:[Any] Included ip object index: [0:][0] [1:][0] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] > object ip grp 2 -i 1 > object ip grp 2 -a 1 2 IP Group Profile 2 Name :[First] Interface:[Lan] Included ip object index: [0:][1] [1:][2] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0]


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt iippvv66 oobbjj This comman is used to create an IP object profile.

object ip obj setdefault

object ip obj INDEX -v

object ip obj INDEX -n NAME

object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT

object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]




INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile.

-v It means to view the information of the specified object profile.

Example: object ip obj 1 -v



Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce

-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP object.




Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0

-s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.

INVERT=0, means disableing the function.

INVERT=1, means enabling the function.

Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1

-a TYPE It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.

TYPE=0, means Mask

TYPE=1, means Single

TYPE=2, means Any

TYPE=3, means Rang

Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2

[START_IP] When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a starting point and another IP address as end point.

Type an IP address.

[END/MASK_IP] Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.

EExxaammppllee

> object ip obj 1 -n marketing > object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45 > object ip obj 1 -v IP Object Profile 1 Name :[marketing] Interface:[Any] Address type:[single]


Start ip address:[192.168.1.45] End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0] Invert Selection:[0]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt iippvv66 ggrrpp This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.

object ip grp setdefault

object ip grp INDEX -v

object ip grp INDEX -n NAME

object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE

object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX






Example: object ip grp 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP group.


Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce

-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP group.




Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0

-a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.

Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5 The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.

EExxaammppllee

> object ip grp 2 -n First IP Group Profile 2 Name :[First] Interface:[Any] Included ip object index: [0:][0] [1:][0] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] > object ip grp 2 -i 1 > object ip grp 2 -a 1 2


IP Group Profile 2 Name :[First] Interface:[Lan] Included ip object index: [0:][1] [1:][2] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt sseerrvviiccee oobbjj This command is used to create service object profile.

object service obj setdefault

object service obj INDEX -v

object service obj INDEX -n NAME

object service obj INDEX -p PROTOCOL

object service obj INDEX -s CHK [START_P] [END_P]

object service obj INDEX -d CHK [START_P] [END_P]




INDEX It means the index number of the specified service object profile.

-v It means to view the information of the specified service object profile.

Example: object service obj 1 -v



Example: object service obj 9 -n bruce

-i PROTOCOL It means to define a PROTOCOL for the service object profile.

PROTOCOL =0, means any

PROTOCOL =1, means ICMP

PROTOCOL =2, means IGMP

PROTOCOL =6, means TCP PROTOCOL =17, means UDP

PROTOCOL =255, means TCP/UDP

Other values mean other protocols.

Example: object service obj 8 -i 0

CHK It means the check action for the port setting.

0=equal(=), when the starting port and ending port values are the same, it indicates one port; when the starting port and ending port values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.

1=not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending port values are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the starting port and ending port values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are


available for this service type.

2=larger(>), the port number greater than this value is available..

3=less(<), the port number less than this value is available for this profile.

-s CHK [START_P] [END_P] It means to set souce port check and configure port range (1~65565) for TCP/UDP.

END_P, type a port number to indicate source port.

Example: object service obj 3 -s 0 100 200

-d CHK [START_P] [END_P] It means to set destination port check and configure port range (1~65565) for TCP/UDP.

END_P, type a port number to indicate destination port.

Example: object service obj 3 -d 1 100 200

EExxaammppllee

> object service obj 1 -n limit > object service obj 1 -p 255 > object service obj 1 -s 1 120 240 > object service obj 1 -d 1 200 220 > object service obj 1 -v Service Object Profile 1 Name :[limit] Protocol:[255] Source port check action:[!=] Source port range:[120~240] Destination port check action:[!=] Destination port range:[200~220]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt sseerrvviiccee ggrrpp This command is used to integrate several service objects under a service group profile.

object service grp setdefault

object service grp INDEX -v

object service grp INDEX -n NAME

object service grp INDEX -a SER_OBJ_INDEX






Example: object service grp 1 -v

-n NAME It means to define a name for the service group.


Example: object service grp 8 -n bruce

-a SER_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify service object profiles for the group profile.

Example: :object service grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5 The service object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group under such profile.


EExxaammppllee

>object service grp 1 -n Grope_1 Service Group Profile 1 Name :[Grope_1] Included service object index: [0:][0] [1:][0] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0] > object service grp 1 -a 1 2 Service Group Profile 1 Name :[Grope_1] Included service object index: [0:][1] [1:][2] [2:][0] [3:][0] [4:][0] [5:][0] [6:][0] [7:][0]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt kkww This command is used to create keyword profile.

object kw obj setdefault

object kw obj show PAGE

object kw obj INDEX -v

object kw obj INDEX -n NAME

object kw obj INDEX -a CONTENTS




show PAGE It means to show the contents of the specified profile.

PAGE: type the page number.

show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.

INDEX It means the index number of the specified keyword profile.

-v It means to view the information of the specified keyword profile.

-n NAME It means to define a name for the keyword profile.


-a CONTENTS It means to set the contents for the keyword profile.

Example: object kw obj 40 -a test


EExxaammppllee

> object kw obj 1 -n children Profile 1 Name :[children] Content:[] > object kw obj 1 -a gambling Profile 1 Name :[children] Content:[gambling] > object kw obj 1 -v Profile 1 Name :[children] Content:[gambling]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: oobbjjeecctt ffee This command is used to create File Extension Object profile.

object fe show

object fe setdefault

object fe obj INDEX -v

object fe obj INDEX -n NAME

object fe obj INDEX -e CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION

object fe obj INDEX -d CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION



show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.


INDEX It means the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified file extension object profile.

-v It means to view the information of the specified file extension object profile.

-n NAME It means to define a name for the file extension object profile.


-e It means to enable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION.

-d It means to disable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION

CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION CATEGORY:

Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression, Executation

Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image

FILE_EXTENSION:

".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct",

".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi",

".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv",

".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".aac", ".aiff", ".au", ".mp3",

".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox", ".wav", ".wma",

".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm", ".js", ".jse",

".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx", ".olb", ".ole",


".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2", ".bz2", ".cab",

".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas", ".bat", ".com",

".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".scr"

Example: object fe obj 1 -e .bmp

EExxaammppllee

> object fe obj 1 -n music > object fe obj 1 -e Audio > object fe obj 1 -v Profile Index: 1 Profile Name:[music] ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Image category: [ ].bmp [ ].dib [ ].gif [ ].jpeg [ ].jpg [ ].jpg2 [ ].jp2 [ ].pct [ ].pcx [ ].pic [ ].pict [ ].png [ ].tif [ ].tiff ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Video category: [ ].asf [ ].avi [ ].mov [ ].mpe [ ].mpeg [ ].mpg [v].mp4 [ ].qt [ ].rm [v].wmv [ ].3gp [ ].3gpp [ ].3gpp2 [ ].3g2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Audio category: [v].aac [v].aiff [v].au [v].mp3 [v].m4a [v].m4p [v].ogg [v].ra [v].ram [v].vox [v].wav [v].wma ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Java category: [ ].class [ ].jad [ ].jar [ ].jav [ ].java [ ].jcm [ ].js [ ].jse [ ].jsp [ ].jtk ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ActiveX category: [ ].alx [ ].apb [ ].axs [ ].ocx [ ].olb [ ].ole [ ].tlb [ ].viv [ ].vrm ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Compression category: [ ].ace [ ].arj [ ].bzip2 [ ].bz2 [ ].cab [ ].gz [ ].gzip [ ].rar [ ].sit [ ].zip ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Executation category: [ ].bas [ ].bat [ ].com [ ].exe [ ].inf [ ].pif [ ].reg [ ].scr


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ppoorrtt This command allows users to set the speed for specific port of the router.

SSyynnttaaxx

port [1, 2, 3, 4, wan2, all] [AN, 1000F, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status]

port [enable, disable][1, 2, 3, 4, all]

port status

port sniff [on,off,port,txrx,restart,status]

port 802.1x[enable,disable,status,addport,delport]

port jumbo

port wanfc



1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, wan2, all It means the number of LAN port and WAN port.

AN… 10H It means the physical type for the specific port.

AN: auto-negotiate.

100F: 100M Full Duplex.

100H: 100M Half Duplex.

10F: 10M Full Duplex.

10H: 10M Half Duplex.

status It means to view the Ethernet port status.

sniff [on,off,port,txrx,restart,status]

Set the LAN Port Mirror function.

On: Enable the function.

Off: Disable the function.

Port: Set the mirror port.

E.g., port sniff p1

TXRX: Set the port number to be mirrored for transmitting/receiving the packets.

E.g., port sniff txrx p2 p3

Restart: After finished the setting, use such command to activate port mirror function.

Status: Display the status of LAN port mirror.

802.1x[enable,disable,status,addport,delport]

Each LAN port with Wired 802.1x configured will only forward 802.1x packets and block all other packets until the authentication has successfully completed.

enable: Enable the function.

disable: Disable the function.

Status: Display the status of 802.1x configuration.

Addport: Set the interface (LAN port 1 ~ 4) for applying 802.1x.

E.g., 802.1x addport 1

Delport: Delete the interface (LAN port 1~4) with 802.1x applied.

E.g., 802.1x delport 1

wanfc It means to set WAN flow control.

EExxaammppllee

> port 1 100F %Set Port 1 Force speed 100 Full duplex OK !!!


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ppoorrttmmaappttiimmee This command allows you to set a time of keeping the session connection for specified protocol.

portmaptime [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]






-t <sec> It means “TCP” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP session timeout.

-u <sec> It means “UDP” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the UDP session timeout.

-i <sec> It means “IGMP” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the IGMP session timeout.

-w <sec> It means “TCP WWW” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP WWW session timeout.

-s <sec> It means “TCP SYN” protocol.

<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP SYN session timeout.

-f It means to flush all portmaps (useful for diagnostics).

-l <List> List all settings.

EExxaammppllee

> portmaptime -t 86400 -u 300 -i 10 > portmaptime -l ------ Current setting ------ TCP Timeout : 86400 sec. UDP Timeout : 300 sec. IGMP Timeout : 10 sec. TCP WWW Timeout: 60 sec. TCP SYN Timeout: 60 sec.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: pprrnn This command allows you to view current status (interface and driver) of USB printer.

prn status

prn debug

EExxaammppllee

> prn status Interface: USB bus 2.0 Printer: NotReady > prn debug conn[0] :


none conn[1] : none conn[2] : none conn[3] : none LPD_data_total=0 usblp_ptr=0 UsbPrintReady=0, UsbIsPrinting=0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: qqooss sseettuupp This command allows user to set general settings for QoS.

SSyynnttaaxx

qos setup [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]






-h Type it to display the usage of this command.

-m <mode> It means to define which traffic the QoS control settings will apply to and eable QoS control.

0: disable.

1: in, apply to incoming traffic only.

2: out, apply to outgoing traffic only.

3: both, apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Default is enable (for outgoing traffic).

-i <bandwidth> It means to set inbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only) The available setting is from 1 to 100000.

-o <bandwidth> It means to set outbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only). The available setting is from 1 to 100000.

-r <index:ratio> It means to set ratio for class index, in %.

-u <mode> It means to enable bandwidth control for UDP. 0: disable

1: enable

Default is disable.

-p <ratio> It means to enable bandwidth limit ratio for UDP.

-t <mode> It means to enable/disable Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize.

0: disable

1: enable

-V Show all the settings.

-D Set all to factory default (for all WANs).

[…] It means that you can type in several commands in one line.

EExxaammppllee


> qos setup -W 2 -m 3 -i 9500 -o 8500 -r 3:20 -u 1 -p 50 -t 1 Setup WAN2 !!!! WAN2 QOS mode is both inbound bandwidth set to 9500 outbound bandwidth set to 8500 WAN2 class 3 ratio set to 20 WAN2 udp bandwidth control set to enable WAN2 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50 WAN2 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable QoS WAN2 set complete; restart QoS >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: qqooss ccllaassss This command allows user to set QoS class.

SSyynnttaaxx

qos class -c [no] –[a|e|d] [no][-<command> <parameter> | ... ]






-h Type it to display the usage of this command.

-c <no> Specify the inde number for the class.

Available value for <no> contains 1, 2 and 3. The default setting is class 1.

-n <name> It means to type a name for the class.

-a It means to add rule for specified class.

-e <no> It means to edit specified rule.

<no>: type the index number for the rule.

-d <no> It means to delete specified rule.

<no>: type the index number for the rule.

-m <mode> It means to enable or disable the specified rule.

0: disable,

1: enable

-l <addr> Set the local address.

Addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.

addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”

addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address. Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0

any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address for this command.

-r <addr> Set the remote address.

addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.

addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”

addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address. Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0

any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address for this command.

-p <DSCP id> Specify the ID.

-s <Service type> Specify the service type by typing the number. The available types are listed as below:

1:ANY 2:DNS 3:FTP 4:GRE 5:H.323 6:HTTP 7:HTTPS 8:IKE 9:IPSEC-AH 10:IPSEC-ESP 11:IRC 12:L2TP 13:NEWS 14:NFS 15:NNTP 16:PING 17:POP3 18:PPTP 19:REAL-AUDIO 20:RTSP 21:SFTP 22:SIP 23:SMTP 24:SNMP 25:SNMP-TRAPS 26:SQL-NET 27:SSH 28:SYSLOG 29:TELNET 30:TFTP


-u <Service type> Set a number to make user defined service type. Available number

is: 1 ~ 40.

-S <d/s> Show the content for specified DSCP ID/Service type.

-V <1/2/3> Show the rule in the specified class.

[…] It means that you can type in several commands in one line.

EExxaammppllee

> qos class -c 2 -n draytek -a -m 1 -l 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80 Following setting will set in the class2 class 2 name set to draytek Add a rule in class2 Class2 the 1 rule enabled Set local address type to Range, 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: qqooss ttyyppee This command allows user to configure protocol type and port number for QoS.

SSyynnttaaxx

qos type [-a <service name> | -e <no> | -d <no>].



-a <name> It means to add rule.

-e <no> It means to edit user defined service type. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40.

-d <no> It means to delete user defined service type. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40.

-n <name> It means the name of the service.

-t <type> It means protocol type.

6: tcp(default)

17: udp

0: tcp/udp

<1~254>: other

-p <port> It means service port. The typing format must be [start:end] (ex., 510:330).

-l List user defined types. “no” means the index number. Available numbers are 1~40.


EExxaammppllee

> qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330 service name set to draytek service type set to 6:TCP Port type set to Range Service Port set to 510 ~ 1330 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: qqooss vvooiipp This command allows user to enable or disable the QoS for VoIP and RTP.

SSyynnttaaxx

qos voip [on/off]



on/off On – Enable the QoS for VoIP.

Off – Disable th QoS for VoIP.

EExxaammppllee

> qos voip off QoS for VoIP: Disable; SIP Port: 5060

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: qquuiitt This command can exit the telnet command screen.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww llaann This command displays current status of LAN IP address settings.

EExxaammppllee

> show lan The LAN settings: Status IP Mask DHCP Start IP Pool Gateway -------- --------------- --------------- ---- --------------- ---- [V]LAN1 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 V 192.168.1.10 200 192.168.1.1 [X]LAN2 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 V 192.168.2.90 100 192.168.2.1 [X]LAN3 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0 V 192.168.3.10 100 192.168.3.1 [X]LAN4 192.168.4.1 255.255.255.0 V 192.168.4.10 100 192.168.4.1 [X]Route 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 V 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.1


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ddmmzz This command displays current status of DMZ host.

EExxaammppllee

> show dmz % WAN1 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------- 1 Disable 0.0.0.0 % WAN2 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN2 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------- 1 Disable 0.0.0.0 % WAN3 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN3 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------- 1 Disable 0.0.0.0 % WAN4 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN4 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------- 1 Disable 0.0.0.0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ddnnss This command displays current status of DNS setting

EExxaammppllee

> show dns %% Domain name server settings: % LAN1 Primary DNS: [Not set] % LAN1 Secondary DNS: [Not set] % LAN2 Primary DNS: [Not set] % LAN2 Secondary DNS: [Not set] % LAN3 Primary DNS: [Not set] % LAN3 Secondary DNS: [Not set] % LAN4 Primary DNS: [Not set] % LAN4 Secondary DNS: [Not set]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ooppeennppoorrtt This command displays current status of open port setting.

EExxaammppllee

> show openport


%% Openport settings: Index Status Comment Local IP Address ******************************************************** No data entry.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww nnaatt This command displays current status of NAT.

EExxaammppllee

> show nat Port Redirection Running Table: Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port 1 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ppoorrttmmaapp This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.

EExxaammppllee

> show portmap -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Private_IP:Port Pseudo_IP:Port Peer_IP:Port [Timeout/Protocol/Flag] --------------------------------------------------------------------------

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ppmmttiimmee This command displays the reuse time of NAT session.

Level0: It is the default setting.

Level1: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than 25% of the default setting.


Level2: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than the eighth of the default setting.

EExxaammppllee

> show pmtime Level0 TCP=86400001 UDP=300001 ICMP=10001 Level1 TCP=600000 UDP=90000 ICMP=7000 Level2 TCP=60000 UDP=30000 ICMP=5000

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww sseessssiioonn This command displays current status of current session.

EExxaammppllee

> show session % Maximum Session Number: 50000 % Maximum Session Usage: 0 % Current Session Usage: 0 % Current Session Used(include waiting for free): 0 % WAN1 Current Session Usage: 0 % WAN2 Current Session Usage: 0 % WAN3 Current Session Usage: 0 % WAN4 Current Session Usage: 0 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ssttaattuuss This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections.

EExxaammppllee

> show status System Uptime:1:4:49 LAN Status Primary DNS:8.8.8.8 Secondary DNS:8.8.4.4 IP Address:192.168.1.1 Tx Rate:3266 Rx Rate:2245 WAN 1 Status: Disconnected Enable:Yes Line:xDSL Name: Mode:PPPoE Up Time:0:00:00 IP:--- GW IP:--- TX Packets:0 TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate:0 WAN 2 Status: Disconnected Enable:Yes Line:Ethernet Name: Mode:--- Up Time:0:00:00 IP:--- GW IP:--- TX Packets:0 TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate:0 WAN 3 Status: Disconnected Enable:Yes Line:USB Name: Mode:--- Up Time:0:00:00 IP:--- GW IP:--- TX Packets:0 TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate:0 WAN 4 Status: Disconnected


Enable:Yes Line:USB Name: --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww aaddssll This command displays current status of ADSL.

EExxaammppllee

> show adsl

--------------------------- ATU-R Info (hw: annex A, f/w: annex A) -----------

Running Mode : State : TRAINING

DS Actual Rate : 0 bps US Actual Rate : 0 bps

DS Attainable Rate : 0 bps US Attainable Rate : 0 bps

DS Path Mode : Fast US Path Mode : Fast

DS Interleave Depth : 0 US Interleave Depth : 0

NE Current Attenuation : 0 dB Cur SNR Margin : 0 dB

DS actual PSD : 0. 0 dB US actual PSD : 0. 0 dB

NE Rcvd Cells : 0 NE Xmitted Cells : 0

NE CRC Count : 0 FE CRC Count : 0

NE ES Count : 0 FE ES Count : 0

Xdsl Reset Times : 0 Xdsl Link Times : 0

ITU Version[0] : b5004946 ITU Version[1] : 544e0000

ADSL Firmware Version : 06-06-01-07-00-01

Power Management Mode : DSL_G997_PMS_NA

Test Mode : DISABLE

-------------------------------- ATU-C Info ---------------------------------

Far Current Attenuation : 0 dB Far SNR Margin : 0 dB

CO ITU Version[0] : 00000000 CO ITU Version[1] : 00000000

DSLAM CHIPSET VENDOR : < ----- >

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sshhooww ssttaattiissttiicc This command displays statistics for WAN interface.

SSyynnttaaxx

show statistic

show statistic reset [interface]



reset It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero.

interface It means to specify WAN1 ~WAN5 interface for displaying related statistics.

EExxaammppllee

> show statistic WAN1 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes WAN2 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes WAN3 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes WAN4 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes WAN5 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes WAN6 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes WAN7 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes


> show statistic reset wan1 Reset WAN1 tx/rx Bytes to zero >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssmmbb sseettttiinngg This command is used to configure file sharing settings for SMB server.

SSyynnttaaxx

smb setting [enable/disable]

smb setting show status

smb setting set workgroup [Workgroup name]

smb setting set host [host name]

smb setting set access [LAN or LANWAN]



enable/disable Enable or disable the SMB service.

show status Display current status of SMB service.

Set workgroup [Workgroup name]

Set a name of workgroup for SMB service.

set host [host name] Set a name of the host for SMB service.

set access [LAN or LANWAN] Allow to access into SMB server by LAN or borth LA N and WAN.

EExxaammppllee

> smb setting enable SMB service is enabled. > smb setting set access LAN Allow SMB access from LAN only. >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp bbaaddiipp This command is reserved for future using.

srv dhcp badip

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp badip >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ppuubblliicc This command allows users to configure DHCP server for second subnet.

srv dhcp public start [IP address]

srv dhcp public cnt [IP counts]

srv dhcp public status

srv dhcp public add [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX]

srv dhcp public del [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX/all/ALL]




start It means the starting point of the IP address pool for the DHCP server.

IP address It means to specify an IP address as the starting point in the IP address pool.

cnt It means the IP count number.

IP counts It means to specify the number of IP addresses in the pool. The maximum is 10.

status It means the execution result of this command.

add It means creating a list of hosts to be assigned.

del It means removing the selected MAC address.

MAC Addr It means to specify MAC Address of the host.

all/ALL It means all of the MAC addresses.

EExxaammppllee

Vigor> ip route add 192.168.1.56 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.12 3 default

Vigor> srv dhcp public status

Index MAC Address

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ddnnss11 This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.

srv dhcp dns1 [?]

srv dhcp dns1 [DNS IP address]



? It means to display current IP address of DNS 1 for the DHCP server.

DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1.

Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet DNS).

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp dns1 168.95.1.1 % srv dhcp dns1 <DNS IP address> % Now: 168.95.1.1 (IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ddnnss22 This command allows users to set Secondary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.

srv dhcp dns2 [?]

srv dhcp dns2 [DNS IP address]




? It means to display current IP address of DNS 2 for the DHCP server.

DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS2.

Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet DNS).

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp dns2 10.1.1.1 % srv dhcp dns2 <DNS IP address> % Now: 10.1.1.1 (IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ffrrccddnnssmmaannll This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address.

srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [on]

srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [off]



? It means to display the current status.

on It means to use manual setting for DNS setting.

Off It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl on

% Domain name server now is using manual settings!

> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl off

% Domain name server now is using auto settings!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ggaatteewwaayy This command allows users to specify gateway address for DHCP server.

srv dhcp gateway [?]

srv dhcp gateway [Gateway IP]



? It means to display current gateway that you can use.

Gateway IP It means to specify a gateway address used for DHCP server.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp gateway 192.168.2.1 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp iippccnntt This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server.

srv dhcp ipcnt [?]

srv dhcp ipcnt [IP counts]



? It means to display current used IP count number.

IP counts It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP server.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp ipcnt ? % srv dhcp ipcnt <IP counts> % Now: 150

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ooffff This function allows users to turn off DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys reboot" command to reboot router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp oonn This function allows users to turn on DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys reboot" command to reboot router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp rreellaayy This command allows users to set DHCP relay setting.

srv dhcp relay servip [server ip]

srv dhcp relay subnet [index]



server ip It means the IP address that you want to used as DHCP server.

Index It means subnet 1 or 2. Please type 1 or 2. The router will invoke this function according to the subnet 1 or 2 specified here.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp relay servip 192.168.1.46 > srv dhcp relay subnet 2 > srv dhcp relay servip ? % srv dhcp relay servip <server ip> % Now: 192.168.1.46

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ssttaarrttiipp srv dhcp startip [?]

srv dhcp startip [IP address]




? It means to display current used start IP address.

IP address It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP server as the starting point.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53 This setting will take effect after rebooting. Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ssttaattuuss This command can display general information for the DHCP server, such as IP address, MAC address, leased time, host ID and so on.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp status DHCP server: Relay Agent Default gateway: 192.168.1.1 Index IP Address MAC Address Leased Time HOST ID 1 192.168.1.113 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE 17:20:08 A1000351


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp lleeaasseettiimmee This command can set the lease time for the DHCP server.

srv dhcp leasetime [?]

srv dhcp leasetime [Lease Time (sec)]



? It means to display current leasetime used for the DHCP server.

Lease Time (sec) It means the lease time that DHCP server can use. The unit is second.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp leasetime ? % srv dhcp leasetime <Lease Time (sec.)> % Now: 86400 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp nnooddeettyyppee This command can set the node type for the DHCP server.

srv dhcp nodetype <count>



count It means to specify a type for node.

1. B-node

2. P-node

4. M-node

8. H-node

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp nodetype 1 > srv dhcp nodetype ? %% srv dhcp nodetype <count> %% 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node % Now: 1


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp pprriimmWWIINNSS This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server.

srv dhcp primWINS [WINS IP address]

srv dhcp primWINS clear



WINS IP address It means the IP address of primary WINS server.

clear It means to remove the IP address settings of primary WINS server.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp primWINS 192.168.1.88 > srv dhcp primWINS ? %% srv dhcp primWINS <WINS IP address> %% srv dhcp primWINS clear % Now: 192.168.1.88

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp sseeccWWIINNSS This command can set the secondary IP address for the DHCP server.

srv dhcp secWINS [WINS IP address]

srv dhcp secWINS clear



WINS IP address It means the IP address of secondary WINS server.

clear It means to remove the IP address settings of second WINS server.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp secWINS 192.168.1.180 > srv dhcp secWINS ? %% srv dhcp secWINS <WINS IP address> %% srv dhcp secWINS clear % Now: 192.168.1.180


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp eexxppiirreedd__RReeccyycclleeIIPP This command can set the time to check if the IP address can be assigned again by DHCP server or not.

srv dhcp expRecycleIP <sec time>



sec time It means to set the time (5~300 seconds) for checking if the IP can be assigned again or not.

EExxaammppllee

Vigor> srv dhcp expRecycleIP 250 % DHCP expired_RecycleIP = 250

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ttffttpp This command can set the TFTP server as the DHCP server.

srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>



TFTP server name It means to type the name of TFTP server.

EExxaammppllee

> srv dhcp tftp TF123 > srv dhcp tftp ? %% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name> % Now: TF123

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv ddhhccpp ooppttiioonn This command can set the custom option for the DHCP server.

srv dhcp option -h

srv dhcp option -l

srv dhcp option -d [idx]

srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -v [option value]

srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -a [option value]

srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -x [option value]

srv dhcp option -u [idx unmber]



-h It means to display usage of this command.

-l It means to display all the user defined DHCP options.

-d[idx] It means to delete the option number by specifying its index number.

-e [1 or 0] It means to enable/disable custom option feature.


1:enable

0:disable

-c It means to set option number. Available number ranges from 0 to 255.

-v It means to set option number by typing string.

-a It means to set the option value by specifying the IP address.

-x It means to set option number with the format of Hexadecimal characters.

-u It means to update the option value of the sepecified index.

idx number It means the index number of the option value.

EExxaammppllee

>srv dhcp option -e 1 -i 2/r -c 44 -a 192.168.1.10,192.168.1.20


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt ddmmzz This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP Alias first.

Srv nat dmz n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]



n It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host.

1: wan1

2: wan2

m It means the index number of the DMZ host.

Default setting is “1” (WAN 1). It is only available for Static IP mode. If you use other mode, you can set 1 ~ 8 in this field. If WAN IP alias has been configured, then the number of DMZ host can be added more.




-e It means to enable/disable such feature.

1:enable

0:disable

-i It means to specify the private IP address of the DMZ host.

-r It means to remove DMZ host setting.

-v It means to display current status.

EExxaammppllee

> srv nat dmz 1 1 -i 192.168.1.96 > srv nat dmz -v % WAN1 DMZ mapping status: Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP ---------------------------------------------------- 1 Disable 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt iippsseeccppaassss This command allows users to enable or disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation.

Srv nat ipsecpass [options]



[options] The available commands with parameters are listed below.

on It means to enable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation.

off It means to disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port (500) preservation.

status It means to display current status for checking.

EExxaammppllee


> srv nat ipsecpass status %% Status: IPsec ESP pass-thru and IKE src_port:500 preservation is OFF.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt ooppeennppoorrtt This command allows users to set open port settings for NAT server.

srv nat openport n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]



n It means the index number for the profiles. The range is from 1 to 20.

m It means to specify the sub-item number for this profile. The range is from 1 to 10.




-a <enable> It means to enable or disable the open port rule profile.

0: disable

1:enable

-c <comment> It means to type the description (less than 23 characters) for the defined network service.

-i <local ip> It means to set the IP address for local computer.

Local ip: Type an IP address in this field.

-w <idx> It means to specify the public IP.

1: WAN1 Default,

2: WAN1 Alias 1,

…and so on.

-p <protocol> Specify the transport layer protocol.

Available values are TCP, UDP and ALL.

-s<start port> It means to specify the starting port number of the service offered by the local host. The range is from 0 to 65535.

-e<end port> It means to specify the ending port number of the service offered by the local host.

The range is from 0 to 65535.

-v It means to display current settings.

-r <remove> It means to delete the specified open port setting.

remove: Type the index number of the profile.

-f <flush> It means to return to factory settings for all the open ports profiles.

EExxaammppllee

> srv nat openport 1 1 -a 1 -c games -i 192.168.1.100 -w 1 -p TCP -s 23 -e 83 > srv nat openport -v %% Status: Enable %% Comment: games %% Private IP address: 192.168.1.100 Index Protocal Start Port End Port *****************************************************************


1. TCP 23 83 %% Status: Disable %% Comment: %% Private IP address: 0.0.0.0 Index Protocal Start Port End Port ***************************************************************** %% Status: Disable %% Comment: %% Private IP address: 0.0.0.0 Index Protocal Start Port End Port ***************************************************************** >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt ppoorrttmmaapp This command allows users to set port redirection table for NAT server.

srv nat portmap add [idx][serv name][proto][pub port][pri ip][pri port][wan1/wan2]

srv nat portmap del [idx]

srv nat portmap disable [idx]

srv nat portmap enable [idx] [proto]

srv nat portmap flush

srv nat portmap table



Add[idx] It means to add a new port redirection table with an index number. Available index number is from 1 to 10.

serv name It means to type one name as service name.

proto It means to specify TCP or UDP as the protocol.

pub port It means to specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.

pri ip It means to specify the private IP address of the internal host providing the service.

pri port It means to specify the private port number of the service offered by the internal host.

wan1/wan2 It means to specify WAN interface for the port redirection.

del [idx] It means to remove the selected port redirection setting.

disable [idx] It means to inactivate the selected port redirection setting.

enable [idx] It means to activate the selected port redirection setting.

flush It means to clear all the port mapping settings.

table It means to display Port Redirection Configuration Table.

EExxaammppllee

> srv nat portmap add 1 game tcp 80 192.168.1.11 100 wan1 > srv nat portmap table


NAT Port Redirection Configuration Table: Index Service Name Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port ifno 1 game 6 80 192.168.1.11 100 -1 2 0 0 0 -2 3 0 0 0 -2 4 0 0 0 -2 5 0 0 0 -2 6 0 0 0 -2 7 0 0 0 -2 8 0 0 0 -2 9 0 0 0 -2 10 0 0 0 -2 11 0 0 0 -2 12 0 0 0 -2 13 0 0 0 -2 14 0 0 0 -2 15 0 0 0 -2 16 0 0 0 -2 17 0 0 0 -2 18 0 0 0 -2 19 0 0 0 -2 20 0 0 0 -2 Protocol: 0 = Disable, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt ttrriiggggeerr This command allows users to configure port triggering settings for NAT.

SSyynnttaaxx

srv nat trigger setdefault

srv nat trigger view

srv nat trigger n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



setdefault Set to factory default settings.

view Dispaly all of the port triggering settings.

n <command><parameter>|…]

“n” means the rule number.



-c[XXX] Type a comment for such rule if required.

-e [0/1] Enable (1) or disable (0) a rule (specified with rule number).

-p [1/2/3] Specify the protocol for such trigger rule.


1 – TCP

2 – UDP

3 - All

-t Specify the port number (0~65535) for trigger.

-P Specify the incoming protocol for such trigger rule.

-i Specify the port number (0~65535) for incoming protocol.

-d Delete the selected trigger rule.

-v Display the port trigger settings for specified rule.

EExxaammppllee

> srv nat trigger 1 -c after_dinner > srv nat trigger 1 -e 1 > srv nat trigger 1 -p 1 > srv nat trigger 1 -t 2000 > srv nat trigger 1 -P 2 > srv nat trigger 1 -i 3000 > srv nat trigger 1 -v Port Trigger Rule Index:1 Status:Enable Comment:after_dinner2000 Triggering Protocol:TCP Triggering Port:2000 Incoming Protocol:UDP Incoming Port:3000

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt ssttaattuuss This command allows users to view NAT Port Redirection Running Table.

EExxaammppllee

> srv nat status NAT Port Redirection Running Table: Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port 1 6 80 192.168.1.11 100 2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0


14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0 --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssrrvv nnaatt sshhoowwaallll This command allows users to view a summary of NAT port redirection setting, open port and DMZ settings.

EExxaammppllee

> srv nat showall ? Index Proto WAN IP:Port Private IP:Port Act ***************************************************************************** R01 TCP 0.0.0.0:80 192.168.1.11:100 Y O01 TCP 0.0.0.0:23~83 192.168.1.100:23~83 Y D01 All 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96 Y R:Port Redirection, O:Open Ports, D:DMZ

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh --ii This command is used to obtain the TX (transmitted) or RX (received) data for each connected switch.

SSyynnttaaxx

switch -i [switch idx_no] [option]



switch idx_no It means the index number of the switch profile.

option The available commands with parameters are listed below.

cmd

acc

traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx]

cmd It means to send command to the client.

acc It means to set the client authentication account and password.

traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx]

It means to turn on/off or display the data transmission from the client.

EExxaammppllee

> switch -i 1 traffic on External Device NO. 1 traffic statistic function is enable


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh ssttaattuuss This command is used to check the status for the auto discovery of external devices.

EExxaammppllee

> switch status External Device auto discovery status : Disable No Respond to External Device : Enable

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh nnoott__rreessppoonndd This command is used to detect the external device automatically and display on this page.

SSyynnttaaxx

switch not_respond 0

switch not_respond 1



0 Disable the option of "No Respond to External Device packets".

1 Enable the option of "No Respond to External Device packets".

EExxaammppllee

> switch not_respond 1 slave not respond! >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh oonn This command is used to turn on the auto discovery for external devices.

EExxaammppllee

> switch on Enable Extrnal Device auto discovery!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh ooffff This command is used to turn off the auto discovery for external devices.

EExxaammppllee

> switch off Disable External Device auto discovery!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh lliisstt This command is used to display the connection status of the switch.

EExxaammppllee

> switch list?


No. Mac IP status Dur Time Model_Name --------------------------------------------------------------------------- [1] 00-50-7f-cd-07-48 192.168.1.3 On-Line 00:01:01 Vigor2920 Series

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh cclleeaarr This command is used to reset the switch table and reboot the router.

switch clear [idx]



idx It means the index number of each item shown on the table.


-f It means to clear all of the data.

EExxaammppllee

> switch clear 1 Switch Data clear successful > switch clear -f Switch Data clear successful

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: sswwiittcchh qquueerryy This command is used to enable or disable the switch query.

EExxaammppllee

> switch query on Extern Device status query is Enable > switch query off Extern Device status query is Disable

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss aaddmmiinn This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss aaddmmiinnuusseerr This command is used to create user account. The server will authenticate the local user who wants to access into the web user interface of Vigor router.

sys adminuser [option]

sys adminuser edit [index] username password



option Available options includes:

Local [0-1]

edit [INDEX]

delete [INDEX]

view [INDEX]


Local [0-1] 0 – Disable the local user.

1 – Enable the local user.

edit [INDEX] username password

Edit an existed user account or create a new local user account.

[INDEX] – 1 ~8. There are eight profiles to be added / edited.

Username – Type a new name for local user.

Password – Type a password for local user.

delete [INDEX] Delete a local user account.

view [INDEX] Show the user account/password detail information.

EExxaammppllee

> sys adminuser Local 1 Local User has enabled! > sys adminuser edit 1 carrie test123 Updated! > sys adminuser view 1 Index:1 User Name:carrie User Password:test123

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss bboonnjjoouurr This command is used to disable/enable and configure the Bonjour service.

sys bonjour [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



-e <enable> It is used to disable/enable bonjour service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-h <enable> It is used to disable/enable http (web) service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-t <enable> It is used to disable/enable telnet service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-f <enable> It is used to disable/enable FTP service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-s <enable> It is used to disable/enable SSH service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-p <enable> It is used to disable/enable printer service (0: disable, 1: enable).

-6 <enable> It is used to disable/enable IPv6 (0: disable, 1: enable).

EExxaammppllee

> sys bonjour -s 1 >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ccffgg This command reset the router with factory default settings. When a user types this command, all the configuration will be reset to default setting.

sys cfg default

sys cfg status



default It means to reset current settings with default values.

status It means to display current profile version and status.

EExxaammppllee

> sys cfg status Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x491e5e6c) > sys cfg default >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ccmmddlloogg This command displays the history of the commands that you have typed.

EExxaammppllee

> sys cmdlog % Commands Log: (The lowest index is the newest !!!) [1] sys cmdlog [2] sys cmdlog ? [3] sys ? [4] sys cfg status [5] sys cfg ?

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ffttppdd This command displays current status of FTP server.

sys ftpd on

sys ftpd off



on It means to turn on the FTP server of the system.

off It means to turn off the FTP server of the system.

EExxaammppllee

> sys ftpd on % sys ftpd turn on !!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ddoommaaiinnnnaammee This command can set and remove the domain name of the system when DHCP mode is selected for WAN.


sys domainname [wan1/wan2] [Domain Name Suffix]

sys domainname [wan1/wan2] clear



wan1/wan2 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.

Domain Name Suffix It means the name for the domain of the system. The maximum number of characters that you can set is 40.

clear It means to remove the domain name of the system.

EExxaammppllee

> sys domainname wan1 clever > sys domainname wan2 intellegent > sys domainname ? % sys domainname <wan1/wan2> <Domain Name Suffix (max. 40 characters)>% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> clear % Now: wan1 == clever, wan2 ==intelligent >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss iiffaaccee This command displays the current interface connection status (UP or Down) with IP address, MAC address and Netmask for the router.

EExxaammppllee

> sys iface Interface 0 Ethernet: Status: UP IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 0xFFFFFF00 (Private) IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0xFFFFFFFF MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-00 Interface 4 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-02 Interface 5 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-03 Interface 6 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-04 Interface 7 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-05 Interface 8 Ethernet: Status: DOWN


IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-06 Interface 9 Ethernet: Status: DOWN IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000 MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-07 --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] --- >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss nnaammee This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for WAN.

sys name [wan1] [ASCII string]

sys name [wan1] clear



wan1 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.

ASCII string It means the name for router. The maximum character that you can set is 20.

EExxaammppllee

> sys name wan1 drayrouter > sys name ? % sys name <wan1/wan2> <ASCII string (max. 20 characters)> % sys name <wan1/wan2> clear % Now: wan1 == drayrouter, wan2 ==

Note: Such name can be used to recognize router’s identification in SysLog dialog.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ppaasssswwdd This command allows users to set password for the administrator.

sys passwd [ASCII string]



ASCII string It means the password for administrator. The maximum character that you can set is 23.

EExxaammppllee

> sys passwd admin123 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss rreebboooott This command allows users to restart the router immediately.

EExxaammppllee

> sys reboot >


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss aauuttoorreebboooott This command allows users to restart the router automatically within a certain time.

sys autoreboot [on/off/hour(s)]



on/off On – It means to enable the function of auto-reboot.

Off – It means to disable the function of auto-reboot.

hours It means to set the time schedule for router reboot.

For example, if you type “2” in this field, the router will reboot with an interval of two hours.

EExxaammppllee

> sys autoreboot on autoreboot is ON > sys autoreboot 2 autoreboot is ON autoreboot time is 2 hour(s)

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ccoommmmiitt This command allows users to save current settings to FLASH. Usually, current settings will be saved in SRAM. Yet, this command will save the file to FLASH.

EExxaammppllee

> sys commit >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ttffttppdd This command can turn on TFTP server for upgrading the firmware.

EExxaammppllee

> sys tftpd % TFTP server enabled !!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss cccc This command can display current country code and wireless region of this device.

EExxaammppllee

> sys cc Country Code : 0x 0 [International] Wireless Region Code: 0x30 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss vveerrssiioonn This command can display current version for the system.


EExxaammppllee

> sys version Router Model: Vigor2765Vn+ Version: 3.7.4.1 English Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x49165e6c) Router IP: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Firmware Build Date/Time: Mar 20 2014 14:09:50 Router Name: drayrouter Revision: 40055 2860_374 VDSL2 Firmware Version: 05-04-08-00-00-06

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss qqrryybbuuff This command can display the system memory status and leakage list.

EExxaammppllee

> sys qrybuf System Memory Status and Leakage List Buf sk_buff ( 200B), used#: 1647, cached#: 30 Buf KMC4088 (4088B), used#: 0, cached#: 8 Buf KMC2552 (2552B), used#: 1641, cached#: 42 Buf KMC1016 (1016B), used#: 7, cached#: 1 Buf KMC504 ( 504B), used#: 8, cached#: 8 Buf KMC248 ( 248B), used#: 26, cached#: 22 Buf KMC120 ( 120B), used#: 67, cached#: 61 Buf KMC56 ( 56B), used#: 20, cached#: 44 Buf KMC24 ( 24B), used#: 58, cached#: 70 Dynamic memory: 13107200B; 4573168B used; 190480B/0B in level 1/2 cache. FLOWTRACK Memory Status # of free = 12000 # of maximum = 0 # of flowstate = 12000 # of lost by siganture = 0 # of lost by list = 0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ppoollllbbuuff This command can turn on or turn off polling buffer for the router.

sys pollbuf [on]

sys pollbuf [off]



on It means to turn on pulling buffer.

off It means to turn off pulling buffer.

EExxaammppllee


> sys pollbuf on % Buffer polling is on! > sys pollbuf off % Buffer polling is off!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss bbrriittaasskk This command can improve triple play quality.

sys britask [on]

sys britask [off]



on It means to turn on the bridge task for improving the triple play quality.

off It means to turn off the bridge task.

EExxaammppllee

> sys britask on % bridge task is ON, now

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ttrr006699 This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS.

sys tr069 get [parm] [option]

sys tr069 set [parm] [value]

sys tr069 getnoti [parm]

sys tr069 setnoti [parm] [value]

sys tr069 log

sys tr069 debug [on/off]

sys tr069 save

sys tr069 inform [event code]

sys tr069 port [port num]

sys tr069 cert_auth [on/off]



get [parm] [option] It means to get parameters for tr-069.

option=<nextlevel>: only gets nextlevel for GetParameterNames.

set [parm] [value] It means to set parameters for tr-069.

getnoti [parm] It means to get parameter notification value.

setnoti [parm] [value] It means to set parameter notification value.

log It means to display the TR-069 log.

debug [on/off] on: turn on the function of sending debug message to syslog.

off: turn off the function of sending debug message to syslog.


save It means to save the parameters to the flash memory of the router.

Inform [event code] It means to inform parameters for tr069 with different event codes.

[event code] includes:

0-"0 BOOTSTRAP",

1-"1 BOOT",

2-"2 PERIODIC",

3-"3 SCHEDULED",

4-"4 VALUE CHANGE",

5-"5 KICKED",

6-"6 CONNECTION REQUEST",

7-"7 TRANSFER COMPLETE",

8-"8 DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE",

9-"M Reboot"

port [port num] It means to change tr069 listen port number.

cert_auth [on/off] on: turn on certificate-based authentication.

off: turn off certificate-based authentication.

EExxaammppllee

> sys tr069 get Int. nextlevel Total number of parameter is 24 Total content length of parameter is 915 InternetGatewayDevice.LANDeviceNumberOfEntries InternetGatewayDevice.WANDeviceNumberOfEntries InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo. InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer. InternetGatewayDevice.Time. InternetGatewayDevice.Layer3Forwarding. InternetGatewayDevice.LANDevice. InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice. InternetGatewayDevice.Services. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_InternetAcc. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_LAN. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_NAT. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Firewall. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Bandwidth. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Applications. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VPN. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VoIP. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_WirelessLAN. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_System. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Status. InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Diagnostics. --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ssiipp__aallgg This command can turn on/off SIP ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for traversal.

sys sip_alg [1]

sys sip_alg [0]




1 It means to turn on SIP ALG.

0 It means to turn off SIP ALG.

EExxaammppllee

> sys sip_alg ? usage: sys sip_alg [value] 0 - disable SIP ALG 1 - enable SIP ALG current SIP ALG is disabled

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss lliicceennssee This command can process the system license.

SSyynnttaaxx

sys license licmsg

sys license licauth

sys license regser

sys license licera

sys license licifno

sys license lic_wiz [set/reg/qry]

sys license dev_chg

sys license dev_key



licmsg It means to display license message.

licauth It means the license authentication time setting.

regser It means the license register server setting.

licera It means to erase license setting.

licifno It means license and signature download interface setting.

lic_wiz [set/reg/qry] It means the license wizard setting.

qry: query service support status

set [idx] [trial] [service type] [sp_id] [start_date] [License Key]

reg: register service in portal

dev_chg It means to change the device key.

dev_key It means to show device key.

EExxaammppllee

> sys license licifno License and Signature download interface setting:


licifno [AUTO/WAN#] Ex: licifno wan1 Download interface is "auto-selected" now.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ddiiaagg__lloogg This command is used for RD debug.

sys diag_log [status| enable| disable| flush| lineno [w] | level [x] | feature [on|off] [y]| log]



status It means to show the status of diagnostic log.

enable It means to enable the function of diag_log.

disable It means to disenable the function of diag_log.

flush It means the flush log buffer.

lineno [w] It means the total lines for displaying message.

w - Available value ranges from 100 to 50000.

level[x] It determines the level of data displayed.

x – Available value ranges from 0 to 12. The larger the number is, the detailed the data is displayed.

feature [on/off][y] It is used to specify the function of the log. Supported features include SYS and DSL (Case-Insensitive). Default setting is “on” for “DSL”.

voip_feature [on/off][vf_name]

It means VoIP feature. Type on to enable the feature or type off to disable the feature.

vf_name: available settings include DRVTAPI, DRVVMMC, DRVMPS, DRVFXO, DRVHAL, PSMPHONE, PSMSUPP, PSM, FXO, PSMISDN, DTMFPSER, CALLERID (Case-Insensitive).

log It means the dump log buffer.

EExxaammppllee

> sys diag_log status Status: diag_log is Enabled. lineno : 10000. level : 3. Enabled feature: SYS DSL > sys diag_log log 0:00:02 [DSL] Current modem firmware: AnnexA_548006_544401 0:00:02 [DSL] Modem firmware feature: 5, ADSL_A, VDSL2 0:00:02 [DSL] xtseCfg=04 00 04 00 0c 01 00 07 0:00:02 [DSL] don't have last showtime mode!! set next mode to VDSL!!0:00:02 [DSL] Status has changed: Stopped(0) -> FwWait(3) 0:00:02 [DSL] Status has changed: FwWait(3) -> Starting(1) 0:00:02 [DSL] Status has changed: Starting(1) -> Running(2) 0:00:02 [DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5) 0:00:02 [DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Restart(10) 0:00:02 [DSL] Status was switched: Restart(10) to


FirmwareRequest(1) 0:00:02 [DSL] Line state has changed: 00000000 -> 000000FF 0:00:02 [DSL] Entering VDSL2 mode 0:00:03 [DSL] modem code: [05-04-08-00-00-06] 0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: FirmwareRequest(1) to firmwareReady(3) 0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: firmwareReady(3) to Init(5) 0:00:05 [DSL] >> nXtseA=0d, nXtseB=00, nXtseV=07, nFwFeatures=5 0:00:05 [DSL] >> nHsToneGroupMode=0, nHsToneGroup=106, nToneSet=43, nCamState =2 0:00:05 [DSL] Line state has changed: 000000FF -> 00000100 0:00:05 [DSL] Line state has changed: 00000100 -> 00000200 0:00:05 [DSL] Status was switched: Init(5) to Train(6)

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ddaayylliigghhttssaavvee This command is used to configure daylight save setting.

SSyynnttaaxx

sys daylightsave [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]



[<command><parameter>|…]



-v Display the daylight saving settings.

-r Set to factory default setting.

-e [1/0] Enable (1) / disable (0) daylight saving.

-t [0/1/2] Specify the saving type for daylight setting.

0 – Default

1 – Time range

2 - Yearly

-s <year> <month> <day> <hour>

Set the detailed settings of the starting day for time range type.

year – must be the year after 2013.

month - 1 ~ 12

day – 1 ~ 31

hour – 0 ~ 23

e.g., sys daylightsave -s 2014 3 10 12

-d <year> <month> <day> <hour>

Set the detailed settings of the ending day for time range type.

year – After 2013.

month - 1 ~ 12

day – 1 ~ 31

hour – 0 ~ 23

e.g., sys daylightsave -d 2014 9 10 12

-y <month> <th weekday> <day in week> <hour>

Set the detailed settings of the starting day for yearly type.

month - 1 ~ 12

th weekday – 1 ~ 5, 9: last week

day in week - 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed, 4:Thu, 5: Fri, 6:Sat

hour – 0 ~ 23

e.g, sys daylightsave -y 9 1 0 14


-z <month> <th weekday> <day in week> <hour>

Set the detailed settings of the ending day for yearly type.

month - 1 ~ 12

th weekday – 1 ~ 5, 9: last week

day in week - 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed, 4:Thu, 5: Fri, 6:Sat

hour – 0 ~ 23

e.g, sys daylightsave -z 3 1 6 14

EExxaammppllee

> sys daylightsave -y 9 1 0 14

% Start: Yearly on Sep 1th Sun 14:00

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ddnnssCCaacchheeTTbbll This command is used to configure TTL settings which will be displayed in DNS Cache table.

SSyynnttaaxx

sys dnsCacheTbl [<command><parameter>|…]






-l Display DNS IPv4 entry in the DNS cache table.

-s Display DNS IPv6 entry in the DNS cache table.

-v Display the TTL limit value in the DNS cache table.

-t < 0/n > Set the TTL limit value in the DNS cache table.

0- No limit

N – Greater than or equal to 5.

-c Clear the DNS cache table.

EExxaammppllee

> sys dnsCacheTbl -l %DNS Cache Table List > sys dnsCacheTbl -t 65 % Set TTL limit: 65 seconds. % When TTL larger than 65s , delete the DNS entry in the router's DNS cache tabl e. >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ssyysslloogg This command is used to configure

SSyynnttaaxx

sys syslog -a <enable> [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]







-a <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Access Setup.

-s <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Save to Syslog Server.

-i <IP address> Define the IP address of the Syslog server.

-d <port number> Define the port number (1 ~ 65535) as the destination port.

-u <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Syslog Save to USB Disk.

-m <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Mail Syslog.

-f <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Filewall Log.

-v <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) VPN Log.

-e <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) User Access Log.

-c <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Call Log.

-w <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) WAN Log.

-r <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) Router/DSL Information.

-t <1/0> Enable (1) or disable (0) AlertLog Setup.

-o <port number> Define the port number (1 ~ 65535) for AlertLog.

EExxaammppllee

> sys syslog -a 1 -s 1 -i 192.168.1.25 -d 514 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss ttiimmee This command is used to configure system time and date.

SSyynnttaaxx

sys time server [domain]

sys time inquire

sys time show

sys time zone [index]



domain Type the domain name of the time server. The maximum length is 39 characters.

index Different number means different time zone. 1 - GMT-12:00 Eniwetok, Kwajalein 2 - GMT-11:00 Midway Island, Samoa 3 - GMT-10:00 Hawaii 4 - GMT-09:00 Alaska 5 - GMT-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada) 6 - GMT-08:00 Tijuana 7 - GMT-07:00 Mountain Time (US & Canada) 8 - GMT-07:00 Arizona 9 - GMT-06:00 Central Time (US & Canada) 10 - GMT-06:00 Saskatchewan 11 - GMT-06:00 Mexico City, Tegucigalpa 12 - GMT-05:00 Eastern Time (US & Canada) 13 - GMT-05:00 Indiana (East) 14 - GMT-05:00 Bogota, Lima, Quito 15 - GMT-04:00 Atlantic Time (Canada)


16 - GMT-04:00 Caracas, La Paz 17 - GMT-04:00 Santiago 18 - GMT-03:30 Newfoundland 19 - GMT-03:00 Brasilia 20 - GMT-03:00 Buenos Aires, Georgetown 21 - GMT-02:00 Mid-Atlantic 22 - GMT-01:00 Azores, Cape Verde Is. 23 - GMT Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin 24 - GMT Edinburgh, Lisbon, London 25 - GMT Casablanca, Monrovia 26 - GMT+01:00 Belgrade, Bratislava 27 - GMT+01:00 Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague 28 - GMT+01:00 Sarajevo, Skopje, Sofija 29 - GMT+01:00 Warsaw, Zagreb 30 - GMT+01:00 Brussels, Copenhagen 31 - GMT+01:00 Madrid, Paris, Vilnius 32 - GMT+01:00 Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern 33 - GMT+01:00 Rome, Stockholm, Vienna 34 - GMT+02:00 Bucharest 35 - GMT+02:00 Cairo 36 - GMT+02:00 Helsinki, Riga, Tallinn 37 - GMT+02:00 Athens, Istanbul, Minsk 38 - GMT+02:00 Jerusalem 39 - GMT+02:00 Harare, Pretoria 40 - GMT+03:00 Volgograd 41 - GMT+03:00 Baghdad, Kuwait, Riyadh 42 - GMT+03:00 Nairobi 43 - GMT+03:00 Moscow, St. Petersburg 44 - GMT+03:30 Tehran 45 - GMT+04:00 Abu Dhabi, Muscat 46 - GMT+04:00 Baku, Tbilisi 47 - GMT+04:30 Kabul 48 - GMT+05:00 Ekaterinburg 49 - GMT+05:00 Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent 50 - GMT+05:30 Bombay, Calcutta 51 - GMT+05:30 Madras, New Delhi 52 - GMT+06:00 Astana, Almaty, Dhaka 53 - GMT+06:00 Colombo 54 - GMT+07:00 Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta 55 - GMT+08:00 Beijing, Chongqing 56 - GMT+08:00 Hong Kong, Urumqi 57 - GMT+08:00 Singapore 58 - GMT+08:00 Taipei 59 - GMT+08:00 Perth 60 - GMT+09:00 Seoul 61 - GMT+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo 62 - GMT+09:00 Yakutsk 63 - GMT+09:30 Darwin 64 - GMT+09:30 Adelaide 65 - GMT+10:00 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney 66 - GMT+10:00 Brisbane 67 - GMT+10:00 Hobart 68 - GMT+10:00 Vladivostok 69 - GMT+10:00 Guam, Port Moresby 70 - GMT+11:00 Magadan, Solomon Is. 71 - GMT+11:00 New Caledonia 72 - GMT+12:00 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is. 73 - GMT+12:00 Auckland, Wellington

EExxaammppllee

> sys time zone 8 Set Time Zone OK > sys time show *************** System Time ***************


Current System Time: [2000 Jan 01 Sat 02:09:29] Time Server: [pool.ntp.org] Time Zone Index: [8]. GMT-07:00 *********************************************

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: ssyyss eeaapp__ttllss This command is used to disable or enable EAP-TLS.

You might have to enable EAP-TLS compatibility to avoid compatibility issues with some operating systems. But, please note that enabling EAP-TLS compatibility will lower down the connection security level.

SSyynnttaaxx

sys eap_tls set [0/1]



0 Disable EAP-TLS compatibility!

1 Enable EAP-TLS compatibility!

EExxaammppllee

> sys eap_tls set 1 Enable EAP_TLS compatibility!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: tteessttmmaaiill This command is used to display current settings for sending test mail.

EExxaammppllee

> testmail Send out test mail Mail Alert:[Disable] SMTP_Server:[0.0.0.0] Mail to:[] Return-Path:[]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp ooffff This command can close UPnP function.

EExxaammppllee

>upnp off UPNP say bye-bye

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp oonn This command can enable UPnP function.

EExxaammppllee

>upnp on


UPNP start.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp nnaatt This command can display IGD NAT status.

EExxaammppllee

> upnp nat ? ****************** IGD NAT Status **************** ((0)) InternalClient >>192.168.1.10<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<< InternalPort >>21<<, ExternalPort >>21<< PortMapProtocol >>TCP<< The tmpvirtual server index >>0<< PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<< Ftp Example [MICROSOFT] ((1)) InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<< InternalPort >>0<<, ExternalPort >>0<< PortMapProtocol >><NULL><< The tmpvirtual server index >>0<< PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<< PortMapProtocol >><NULL><< The tmpvirtual server index >>0<< PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<< 0<< --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp sseerrvviiccee This command can display the information of the UPnP service. UPnP service must be enabled first.

EExxaammppllee

> upnp on UPNP start. > upnp service >>>>> SERVICE TABLE1 <<<<< serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1 serviceId urn:microsoft-com:serviceId:OSInfo1 SCPDURL /upnp/OSInfo.xml controlURL /OSInfo1 eventURL /OSInfoEvent1 UDN uuid:774e9bbe-7386-4128-b627-001daa843464 >>>>> SERVICE TABLE2 <<<<< serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1 serviceId urn:upnp-org:serviceId:WANCommonIFC1 SCPDURL /upnp/WComIFCX.xml


controlURL /upnp?control=WANCommonIFC1 eventURL /upnp?event=WANCommonIFC1 UDN uuid:2608d902-03e2-46a5-9968-4a54ca499148 . . .

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp ssuubbssccrriibbee This command can show all UPnP services subscribed.

EExxaammppllee

> upnp on UPNP start. > upnp subscribe Vigor> upnp subscribe >>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1 ----- Subscribtion1 ------- sid = 7a2bbdd0-0047-4fc8-b870-4597b34da7fb eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1 expireTime =6926 active =1 DeliveryURLs =<http://192.168.1.113:2869/upnp/eventing/twtnpnsiun> >>>> (2) serviceType urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1 ----- Subscribtion1 ------- sid = d9cd47a5-d9c9-4d3d-8043-d03a82f27983 eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1 . . .

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp ttmmppvvss This command can display current status of temp Virtual Server of your router.

EExxaammppllee

Vigor> upnp tmpvs ****************** Temp virtual server status **************** ((0)) real_addr >>192.168.1.10<<, pseudo_addr >>172.16.3.229<<


real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<< hit_portmap_index >>0<< The protocol >>TCP<< time >>0<< ((1)) real_addr >>0.0.0.0<<, pseudo_addr >>0.0.0.0<< real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<< hit_portmap_index >>0<< The protocol >>0<< time >>0<< --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uuppnnpp wwaann This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.

upnp wan [n]



n It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.

n=0, it means to auto-select WAN interface.

n=1, WAN1

n=2, WAN2 ……….

EExxaammppllee

> upnp wan 1 use wan1 now.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uussbb lliisstt This command is use to display the information about the brand name and model name of the USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.

EExxaammppllee

> usb list ? Brand Module Standard ------------------------ -------- Aiko Aiko 83D 3.5G Y BandRich Bandluxe C170 3.5G Y BandRich Bandluxe C270 3.5G Y BandRich Bandluxe C321 3.5G Y BandRich Bandluxe C330 3.5G Y BandRich Bandluxe C331 3.5G Y BandRich Bandluxe C502 3.5G Y Huawei Huawei E169u 3.5G Y Huawei Huawei E220 3.5G Y Huawei Huawei E303D 3.5G Y Huawei Huawei E392 3.5G Y Huawei Huawei E398 3.5G Y


Sony Erics Sony Ericsson MD30 3.5G Y TP-LINK TP-LINK MA180 3.5G Y TP-LINK TP-LINK MA260 3.5G Y Vodafone Vodafone K3765-Z 3.5G Y Vodafone Vodafone K4605 3.5G Y ZTE ZTE MF626 3.5G Y ZTE ZTE MF627 plus 3.5G Y ZTE ZTE MF633 3.5G Y ZTE ZTE MF636 3.5G Y SpinCom SpinCom GPRS Modem 3.5G Y - MORE - ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] -

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: uussbb uusseerr This command is used to set profiles for FTP/SMB users.


usb user add [Index] [Username] [Password] [Permission] [Home path]

usb user rm [Index]

usb user enable [Index]

usb user disable [Index]

usb user list



add Add a new user profile.

Rm Delete an existed user profile.

enable Enable a user profile.

disable Disable a user profile.

list Display all of the user profile.

index It means the index number of the user profile. There are 16 profiles allowed to be configured. So the range of such option is 1 ~ 16.

Username Type a text (maximum 11 characters) as the username for the user profile.

Password Type a text (maximum 11 characters) as the password for the user profile.

Permission Specify the action (RWDLCR) permitted. If one of the actions is not allowed, simple type “-” instead.

R – Read File.

W – Write File.

D – Delete File.

L – List directory.

C – Create directory.

R – Remove selected directory.

Home path Set the path (maximum 159 characters) for the USB user profile.

EExxaammppllee

> usb user add 1 root 1234 R-DLCR /usr


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vviiggbbrrgg sseett This command is to configure specified WAN as bridge mode.


vigbrg set -v [IP version] -w [WAN_idx] -l [LAN_idx] -e [0/1] -f [0/1]



-v [IP version] Indicate the IP version for the IP address.

4 – IPv4.

6 – IPv6.

-w [WAN_idx] WAN_idx – Indicate the WAN interface.

1 – WAN1

2 – WAN2

3 – WAN3

4 – WAN4

-l [LAN_idx] LAN_idx – Indicate the LAN interface.

1 – LAN1

2 – LAN2

3 – LAN3

4 – LAN4

e [0/1] Enable (1) or disable (0) the Vigor Bridge for WAN or/and LAN.

f [0/1] Enable (1) or disable (0) the firewall functions.

EExxaammppllee

> vigbrg set -v 4 -w 1 -l 1 -e 1

[WAN1] IPv4 bridge is enable. Set subnet[LAN1]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vviiggbbrrgg ssttaattuuss This command can show whether the Vigor Bridge Function is enabled or disabled.

EExxaammppllee

> vigbrg status %Vigor Bridge Function is enable! %Wan1 management is disable!


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vviiggbbrrgg ccffggiipp This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the router through the IP address configured here.

vigbrg cfgip [IP Address]



IP Address It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router.

EExxaammppllee

> vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15 > vigbrg cfgip ? % Vigor Bridge Config IP, % Now: 192.168.1.15

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vviiggbbrrgg wwaannssttaattuuss This command can display the existed WAN connection status for the modem (change from ADSL router into bridge modem), including index number, MAC address, Stamp Time, PVC, VLAN port for Vigor Bridge Function..

EExxaammppllee

> vigbrg wanstatus Vigor Bridge: Running WAN mac table: Index MAC Address Stamp Time PVC VLan Port

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vviiggbbrrgg wwllaannssttaattuuss This command can display the existed WLAN connection status for the modem (change from router into bridge modem), including index number, MAC address, Stamp Time, PVC, VLAN port for Vigor Bridge Function.

EExxaammppllee

> vigbrg wlanstatus Vigor Bridge: Running WAN mac table: Index MAC Address Stamp Time PVC VLan Port

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ggrroouupp

This command allows you to set VLAN group. You can set four VLAN groups. Please run vlan restart command after you change any settings.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan group id [set/set_ex] [p1/p2/p3/p4/s1/s2/s3/s4



id It means the group 0 to 7 for VLAN.


set It indicates each port can join more than one VLAN group.

set_ex It indicates each port can join one VLAN group at one time.

p1/p2/p3/p4 It indicates LAN port 1 to LAN port 4. To group LAN1, LAN2, LAN3 and/or LAN4 under one VLAN group, please type the port number(s) you want.

s1/s2/s3/s4 It is only available for WALN models.

EExxaammppllee

> vlan group 3 set p1 s3 s4 VLAN p1 p2 p3 p4 s1 s2 s3 s4 ----------------------------------------------- 3 V V V >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ooffff This command allows you to disable VLAN function.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan off

EExxaammppllee

> vlan off

VLAN is Disable!

Force subnet LAN2/3/4 to be disabled!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann oonn This command allows you to enable VLAN function.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan on

EExxaammppllee

> vlan on

VLAN is Enable!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann pprrii This command is used to define the priority for each VLAN profile setting.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan pri n pri_no



n It means VLAN ID number.

n=VLAN ID number (from 0 to 7).

pri_no It means the priority of VLAN profile.

pri_no=0 ~7 (from none to highest priority).


EExxaammppllee

> vlan pri 1 2

VLAN1: Priority=2

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann rreessttaarrtt This command can make VLAN settings restarted with newest configuration.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan restart

EExxaammppllee

> vlan restart ?

VLAN restarts!!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ssttaattuuss This command display current status for VLAN.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan status

EExxaammppllee

> vlan status VLAN is Enable : ------------------------------------------------------ VLAN Enable VID Pri p1 p2 p3 p4 s1 s2 s3 s4 subnet ------------------------------------------------------ 0 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1 1 OFF 0 2 1:LAN1 2 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1 3 OFF 0 0 V V V 1:LAN1 4 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1 5 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1 6 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1 7 OFF 0 0 1:LAN1 ------------------------------------------------------ Note: they are only untag for s1/s2/s3/s4, but they can join tag vlan with lan ports. Permit untagged device in P1 to access router: ON.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ssuubbnneett This command is used to configure the LAN interface used by the VLAN group.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan subnet group_id [1/2/3/4]




[1/2/3/4] It means interfaces, LAN1 ~ LAN4.

EExxaammppllee

> vlan subnet group_id 2

% Vlan Group-0 using LAN2 !

This setting will take effect after rebooting.

Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ssuubbmmooddee This command changes the VLAN encapsulation mechanisms in the LAN driver.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan submode [on|off|status]



on It means to enable the promiscuous mode.

off It means to enable the normal mode.

status It means to display if submode is normal mode or promiscuous mode.

EExxaammppllee

> vlan submode status % vlan subnet mode : normal mode > vlan submode on % vlan subnet mode modified to promiscuous mode. > vlan submode status % vlan subnet mode : promiscuous mode

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ttaaggggeedd This command is used to enable or disable the incoming of untagged packets.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan tagged [n] [on/off]

vlan tagged [unlimited] [on/off]

vlan tagged [p1_untag] [on/off]



n It means VLAN channel.

The ranage is from 0 to 7.

on/off It means to enable/disable the tagged VLAN.

[unlimited] [on/off] unlimited on: It allows the incoming of untagged packets even all VLAN are tagged.


unlimited off: It does not allows the incoming of untagged packets.

[p1_untag] [on/off] P1_untag on: It allows the incoming of untagged packets form LAN port 1.

P1_untag off: It does not allow the incoming of untagged packets from LAN port 1.

EExxaammppllee

> vlan tagged unlimited on unlimited mode is ON

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann vviidd This command is used to configure VID number for each VLAN channel.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan vid n vid_no



n It means VLAN channel.

The ranage is from 0 to 7.

vid_no It means the value of VLAN ID. Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is form 0 to 4095.

EExxaammppllee

> vlan vid 1 4095 VLAN1, vid=4095

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvllaann ssyyssvviidd This command is used to modify and show the scope (reserved 78) of the VLAN IDs used internally by the system.

SSyynnttaaxx

vlan sysvid [show | n]



show It means to show the scope of VLAN ID used internally.

n It means the value to be set as VLAN ID.


EExxaammppllee

> vlan sysvid 100 You have set system VLAN ID to range: 100 ~ 177, We recommend that you reboot the system now. > vlan sysvid 200 You have set system VLAN ID to range: 200 ~ 263, We recommend that you reboot the system now.


> vlan sysvid show The system VLAN ID is in range: 200 ~ 263

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ll22llsseett This command allows users to set advanced parameters for LAN to LAN function.

vpn l2lset [list index] peerid [peerid]

vpn l2lset [list index] localid [localid]

vpn l2lset [list index]main [auto/proposal index]

vpn l2lset [list index] aggressive [g1/g2]

vpn l2lset [list index]pfs [on/off]

vpn l2lset [list index] phase1[lifetime]

vpn l2lset [list index] phase2[lifetime]



list index It means the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.

peerid It means the peer identity for aggressive mode.

localid It means the local identity for aggressive mode.

main It means to choose proposal for main mode.

auto index It means to choose default proposals.

proposal index It means to choose specified proposal.

aggressive It means the chosen DH group for aggressive mode

pfs It means “perfect forward secrete”.

on/off It means to turn on or off the PFS function.

phase1 It means phase 1 of IKE.

lifetime It means the lifetime value (in second) for phase 1 and phase 2.

phase2 It means phase 2 of IKE.

EExxaammppllee

> VPN l2lset 1 peerid 10226

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ddiinnsseett This command allows users to configure setting for remote dial-in VPN profile.

vpn dinset <list index>

vpn dinset <list index> <on/off>

vpn dinset <list index> motp <on/off>

vpn dinset <list index> pin_secret <pin> <secret>



<list index> It means the index number of the profile.

<on/off> It means to enable or disable the profile.


on – Enable.

off – Disable.

motp <on/off> It means to enable or disable the authentication with mOTP function.

on – Enable.

off – Disable.

pin_secret<pin> <secret> It means to set PIN code with secret.

<pin> - Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).

<secret> - Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6)

EExxaammppllee

> vpn dinset 1 Dial-in profile index 1 Profile Name: ??? Status: Deactive Mobile OTP: Disabled Password: Idle Timeout: 300 sec > vpn dinset 1 on % set profile active > vpn dinset 1 motp on % Enable Mobile OTP mode!> > vpn dinset 1 pin_secret 1234 e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6 > vpn dinset 1 Dial-in profile index 1 Profile Name: ??? Status: Active Mobile OTP: Enabled PIN: 1234 Secret: e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6 Idle Timeout: 300 sec

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ssuubbnneett This command allows users to specify a subnet selection for the specified remote dial-in VPN profile.

vpn subnet [index] [1/2/3/4/5/6]




<index> It means the index number of the VPN profile.

<1/2/3/4/5/6> 1 – it means LAN1

2 – it means LAN2.

3 – it means LAN3


5 – it means LAN51


EExxaammppllee

> vpn subnet 1 2 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn sseettuupp This command allows users to setup VPN for different types.

Command of PPTP Dial-Out

vpn setup <index> <name> pptp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>

Command of IPSec Dial-Out

vpn setup <index> <name> ipsec_out <ip> <key> <nip> <nmask>

Command of L2Tp Dial-Out

vpn setup <index> <name> l2tp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>

Command of Dial-In

vpn setup <index> <name> dialin <ip> <usr> <pwd> <key> <nip> <nmask>



For PPTP Dial-Out

<index> It means the index number of the profile.

<name> It means the name of the profile.

<ip> It means the IP address to dial to.

<usr> <pwd> It means the user and the password required for the PPTP connection.

<nip> <nmask> It means the remote network IP and the mask.

e.g.,

vpn setup 1 name1 pptp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0

For IPsec Dial-Out




<key> It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.


e.g.,

vpn setup 1 name1 ipsec_out 1.2.3.4 1234 192.168.1.0


255.255.255.0

For L2TP Dial-Out




<usr> <pwd> It means the user and the password required for the L2TP connection.


e.g.,,

vpn setup 1 name1 l2tp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0

For Dial-In



<ip> It means the IP address allowed to dial in.

<usr> <pwd> It means the user and the password required for the PPTP/L2TP connection.

<key> It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.


e.g.,

vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0

EExxaammppllee

> vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 % Profile Change Log ... % Profile Index : 1 % Profile Name : name1 % Username : vigor % Password : 1234 % Pre-share Key : abc % Call Direction : Dial-In % Type of Server : ISDN PPTP IPSec L2TP % Dial from : 1.2.3.4 % Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.0 % Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ooppttiioonn This command allows users to configure settings for LAN to LAN profile.

vpn option <index> <cmd1>=<param1> [<cmd2>=<para2> | ... ]





Available index numbers:

1 ~ 32

For Common Settings


pname It means the name of the profile.

ena It means to enable or disable the profile.

on – Enable

off - Disable

thr It means the way that VPN connection passes through. Available settings are wlf, wlo, w2f, and w2o.

w1f – WAN1 First.

w1o – WAN1 Only.

w2f – WAN2 First.

w2o – WAN2 Only.

nnpkt It means the NetBios Naming Packet.

on – Enable the function to pass the packet.

off – Disable the function to block the packet.

dir It means the call direction. Available settings are b, o and i.

b – Both

o – Dial-Out

i – Dial-In.

idle=[value] It means Always on and Idle Time out.


-1 – it means always on for dial-out.

0 – it means always on for dial-in.

Other numbers (e.g., idle=200, idle=300, idle=500) mean the router will be idle after the interval (seconds) configured here.

palive It means to enable PING to keep alive.

-1 – disable the function.

1,2,3,4 – Enable the function and PING IP 1.2.3.4 to keep alive.

For Dial-Out Settings

ctype It means “Type of Server I am calling”.

“ctype=t” means PPTP.

“ctype=s” means IPSec.

“ctype= l” means L2TP(IPSec Policy None).

“ctype= l1” means L2TP(IPSec Policy Nice to Have).

“ctype= l2” means L2TP(IPSec Policy Must).

dialto It means Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as draytek.com or 123.45.67.89).

ltype It means Link Type.

“ltype=0” means “Disable”.

“ltype=1” means “64kbps”.

“ltype=2” means “128kbps”.

“ltype=3” means “BOD”.

oname It means Dial-Out Username.

“oname=admin” means to set Username = admin.

opwd It means Dial-Out Password

“opwd=1234” means to set Password = 1234.

pauth It means PPP Authentication.


“pauth=pc” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP&CHAP.

“pauth=p” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP Only

ovj It means VJ Compression.

“ovj=on/off” means to enable/disable VJ Compression.

okey It means IKE Pre-Shared Key.

“okey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd.

ometh It means IPSec Security Method.

“ometh=ah/” means AH.

“ometh=espd/espda/” means ESP DES without/with Authentication.

“ometh=esp3/esp3a/” means ESP 3DES without/with Authentication.

“ometh=espa/espaa” means ESP AES without/with Authentication.

sch It means Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup.

sch=1,3,5,7 Set schedule 1->3->5->7

rcallb It means Require Remote to Callback.

“rcallb=on/off” means to enable/disable Set Require Remote to Callback.

ikeid It means IKE Local ID.

“ikeid=vigor” means Set Local ID = vigor.

For Dial-In Settings

itype It means Allowed Dial-In Type. Available settings include:

“itype=t” means PPTP.

“itype=s” means IPSec.

“itype=L1”means L2TP (None).

“itype=L1” means L2TP(Nice to Have).

“itype=l2” means L2TP(Must).

peer It means specify Peer VPN Server IP for Remote VPN Gateway.

Type “203.12.23.48” means to allow VPN dial-in with IP address of 203.12.23.48.

Type “off” means any remote IP is allowed to dial in.

peerid It means the peer ID for Remote VPN Gateway.

Type “draytek” means the word is used as local ID.

iname It means Dial-in Username.

“iname=admin” means to set username as “admin”.

ipwd It means Dial-in Password.

“ipwd=1234” means to set password as “1234”.

ivj It means VJ Compression.

“ivj=on/off” means to enable /disable VJ Compression.

ikey It means IKE Pre-Shared Key.

“ikey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd.

imeth It means IPSec Security Method

“imeth=h” means “Allow AH”.

“imeth=d” means “Allow DES”.

“imeth=3” means “Allow 3DES”.

“imeth=a” means “Allow AES.

For TCP/IP Settings

mywip It means My WAN IP.


“mywip=1.2.3.4” means to set My WAN IP as “1.2.3.4”.

rgip It means Remote Gateway IP.

“rgip=1.2.3.4” means to set Remote Gateway IP as “1.2.3.4”.

rnip It means Remote Network IP.

“rnip=1.2.3.0” means to set Remote Network IP as “1.2.3.0”.

rnmask It means Remote Network Mask.

“rnmask=255.255.255.0” means to set Remote Network Mask as “255.255.255.0”.

rip It means RIP Direction.

“rip=d” means to set RIP Direction as “Disable”.

“rip=t” means to set RIP Direction as “TX”.

“rip=r” means to set RIP Direction as “RX”.

“rip=b” means to set RIP Direction as “Both”.

mode It means the option of “From first subnet to remote network, you have to do”.

“mode=r” means to set Route mode.

“mode=n” means to set NAT mode.

droute It means to Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single WAN supports this).

droute=on/off means to enable/disable the function.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn option 1 idle=250 % Change Log.. % Idle Timeout = 250

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn mmrroouuttee This command allows users to list, add or delete static routes for a certain LAN to LAN VPN profile.

vpn mroute <index> list

vpn mroute <index> add <network ip>/<mask>

vpn mroute <index> del <network ip>/<mask>



list It means to display all of the route settings.

add It means to add a new route.

del It means to delete specified route.



1 ~ 32

<network ip>/<mask> Type the IP address with the network mask address.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn mroute 1 add 192.168.5.0/24


% 192.168.5.0/24 % Add new route 192.168.5.0/24 to profile 1

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn lliisstt This command allows users to view LAN to LAN VPN profiles.

vpn list <index> all

vpn list <index>com

vpn list<index>out

vpn list <index> in

vpn list<index>net



all It means to list configuration of the specified profile.

com It means to list common settings of the specified profile.

out It means to list dial-out settings of the specified profile.

in It means to list dial-in settings of the specified profile.

net It means to list Network Settings of the specified profile.



1 ~ 32

EExxaammppllee

> vpn list 32 all % Common Settings % Profile Name : ??? % Profile Status : Disable % Netbios Naming Packet : Pass % Call Direction : Both % Idle Timeout : 300 % PING to keep alive : off % Dial-out Settings % Type of Server : PPTP % Link Type: : 64k bps % Username : ??? % Password : % PPP Authentication : PAP/CHAP % VJ Compression : on % Pre-Shared Key : % IPSec Security Method : AH % Schedule : 0,0,0,0 % Remote Callback : off % Provide ISDN Number : off % IKE phase 1 mode : Main mode % IKE Local ID :


% Dial-In Settings --- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

> vpn list 1 com % Common Settings % Profile Name : ??? % Profile Status : Disable % Netbios Naming Packet : Pass % Call Direction : Both % Idle Timeout : 300 % PING to keep alive : off >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn rreemmoottee This command allows users to enable or disable PPTP/IPSec/L2TP VPN service.

vpn remote [PPTP/IPSec/L2TP] [on/off]



PPTP/IPSec/L2TP There are four types to be selected.

on/off on – enable VPN remote setting.

off – disable VPN remote setting.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn remote PPTP on Set PPTP VPN Service : On Please restart the router!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn 22nnddssuubbnneett This command allows users to enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP.

vpn 2ndsubnet on

vpn 2ndsubnet off



on/off It means to enable or disable second subnet.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn 2ndsubnet on %Enable second subnet IP as VPN server IP!


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ttrruunnkk This command allows users to configure VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding tunnel policy.

vpn trunk show_usable

vpn trunk backup <add/del> <name> <Member#1> <Member#2>

vpn trunk backup more_syslog <ON/OFF>

vpn trunk backup ERD <name> <Normal/Recover/Resume><second>

vpn trunk lb <add/del> <name> <Member#1> <Member#2>

vpn trunk lb more_syslog <ON/OFF>

vpn trunk lb algorithm <name> <RR>

vpn trunk lb algorithm <name><W-RR><Auto> <AccordingRatio> <Member1:Member2>

vpn trunk lb algorithm <name><Fastest>

vpn trunk bind usage <BindIndex>

vpn trunk bind show <LoadBalanceName>

vpn trunk bind reset_default

vpn trunk bind more_syslog <ON/OFF>

vpn trunk bind set <BindIndex> <ACT> <TrunkName> <Member> <SrcIp:A~B> <DstI p:A~B> <DstPort:A~B> <Proto> <Frag>

vpn trunk bind insert <After_BindIndex> <ACT> <TrunkName> <Member> <SrcIp:A~B> <DstIp:A~B> <DstPort:A~B> <Proto> <Frag>

vpn trunk SetGre show <Dialout_Index>

vpn trunk SetGre <Active/In-active><Dialout_Index><GRE_MyIP><GRE_PeerIP><Logical_Traffic>

vpn trunk An_Gre GreIPsecAnalyze <ON/OFF>



show_usable Display a list of LAN to LAN dial out profiles.

backup <add/del> <name> <Member#1> <Member#2>

Set multiple VPN tunnels (LAN to LAN profiles) as backup tunnel.

add/del - Add or delete a profile for used in VPN Trunk.

name – Specify the name of the VPN trunk.

Member#1 – Indicate the first LAN to LAN profile.

Member#2 – Indicate the second LAN to LAN profile.

backup more_syslog <ON/OFF>

lb more_syslog <ON/OFF>

bind more_syslog <ON/OFF>

These commands are used for RD debug.

backup ERD <name> <Normal/Recover/Resume><second>

ERD means Environment Recovers Detection.


Normal – Indicate the Normal mode. All dial-out VPN TRUNK backup profiles will be activated alternatively.

Recover – Indicate the duration of VPN backup operation.

Resume – When VPN connection breaks down or disconnects, Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN connection.

Second – “0” means to dial each six seconds automatically. “60 ~ 2147483647” means to early handle for less than 30 seconds within


designated time.

lb <add/del> <name> <Member#1> <Member#2>

It means to create VPN trunk with load balance.

add/del - Add or delete a profile for used in VPN Trunk.


Member#1 – Indicate the first LAN to LAN profile.

Member#2 – Indicate the second LAN to LAN profile.

lb algorithm <name> <RR/W-RR/Fastest>

Set multiple VPN tunnels for using as traffic load balance tunnel.

Such command is to configure the algorithm (with round robin mode) of Load Balance.


RR – It means round robin mode. All of the dial-out profiles will be taken turns equally.

lb algorithm <name><W-RR><Auto> <AccordingRatio> <Member1:Member2>

Such command is to configure the algorithm (with round robin mode) of Load Balance.


W-RR – It means weighted round robin mod based on speed ratio.

Auto - the speed must be based on Lay2.

AccordingRatio – the speed must be based on given ratio.

Member#1 – Inidcate the first LAN to LAN profile.

Member#2 – Indicate the second LAN to LAN proifle.

lb algorithm <name><Fastest>

Such command is to configure the algorithm (with fastest mode) of Load Balance. Most of traffics will be led to the channel with the fastest connection.


bind usage <BindIndex> Display detailed information for VPN Load Balance Tunnel Bind.

BindIndex – Indicate the index number of the tunnle bind.

bind show <LoadBalanceName>

Display the bind information for VPN Load Balance profile.

LoadBalanceName – type the name of VPN Load Balance profile

bind reset_default Reset the bind tunnel for VPN load balance to factory reset settings.

bind set <BindIndex> <ACT> <TrunkName> <Member> <SrcIp:A~B> <DstI p:A~B> <DstPort:A~B> <Proto> <Frag>

Set the binding tunnel policy.

BindIndex – Indicate the index number (1 ~ 64) for the tunnel to be bound.

vpn trunk bind set 1 y vpnlb 1 192.168.10.1~192.168.10.2 192.168.99.1~192.168.99.254 1~65535 0 OFF

ACT – Specify the action. “y” means active; “n” means inactive or delete.

TrunkName - TrunkName - Specify the name of the VPN trunk created by using “vpn trunk lb” command.

Member – Specify the index number of the LAN to LAN (dial-out) profile to be bound.

SrcIp:A~B – Specify the source IP range (e.g., 192.168.10.0~192.168.10.255.

DstI p:A~B - Specify the destination IP range (e.g., 192.168.1.0~192.168.1.255.

DstPort:A~B – Specify the destination port range (1~65535).

Proto – Specify the protocol.

0 – any

1 – ICMP

2 – IGMP

6 – TCP

17 – UDP

255 – TCP/UDP


Frag – “ON” means to bind the fragmented packet; “OFF” means not to care. It is the default setting.

bind insert <After_BindIndex> <ACT> <TrunkName> <Member> <SrcIp:A~B> <DstIp:A~B> <DstPort:A~B> <Proto> <Frag>

It is used to insert additional load balance policy into an existing policy.

After_BindIndex – Specify an index number that new additional policy should be inserted before. See the following example:

vpn trunk bind insert 1 y vpnlb 2 192.168.10.3~192.168.10.200 192.168.99.200~192.168.99.200 80~80 TCP OFF

ACT – Specify the action. “y” means active; “n” means inactive or delete.

TrunkName - Specify the name of the VPN trunk.

Member – Specify the index number of the LAN to LAN (dial-out) profile to be bound.

SrcIp:A~B – Specify the source IP range (e.g., 192.168.10.0~192.168.10.255.

DstI p:A~B - Specify the destination IP range (e.g., 192.168.1.0~192.168.1.255.

DstPort:A~B – Specify the destination port range (1~65535).

Proto – Specify the protocol.

0 – any

1 – ICMP

2 – IGMP

6 – TCP

17 – UDP

255 – TCP/UDP

Frag – “ON” means to bind the fragmented packet; “OFF” means not to care. It is the default setting.

SetGre show <Dialout_Index>

Display the GRE over IPSec settings in specified LAN to LAN profile.

Dialout_Index – Index number of the LAN to LAN (dial-out) profile.

SetGre <Active/In-active><Dialout_Index><GRE_MyIP><GRE_PeerIP><Logical_Traffic>

Active/In-active - Specify the action. “y” means active; “n” means inactive.

Dialout_Index – Index number of the LAN to LAN (dial-out) profile.

GRE_MyIP –Type the virtual IP for router itself for verified by peer.

GRE_PeerIP –Type the virtual IP of peer host for verified by router.

Logical_Traffic - Specify the action for RFC2890. “y” means active; “n” means inactive.

An_Gre GreIPsecAnalyze <ON/OFF>

These commands are used for RD debug.

EExxaammppllee > vpn setup 1 name1 pptp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 % Profile Change Log ... % Profile Index : 1 % Profile Name : name1j % Username : vigor % Password : 1234 % Call Direction : Dial-Out % Type of Server : PPTP % Dial to : 1.2.3.4 % Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.0 % Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0 > vpn setup 2 market pptp_out 5.6.7.8 vigor 5678 192.168.1.31 255.255.255.0% Profile Change Log ... % Profile Index : 2 % Profile Name : market


% Username : vigor % Password : 5678 % Call Direction : Dial-Out % Type of Server : PPTP % Dial to : 5.6.7.8 % Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.31 % Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0 > vpn trunk lb add comp 1 2 %% Combination VPN Load Balance profile list : <Index> < Name > < Member1(Active)Type > < Member2(Act ive)Type > 1 comp 1(YES)PPTP 2(YES)P PTP %% Note: <Active: NO> The LAN-to-LAN Profile is disable or under Dial-In(Call Di rection) at present. ==================================================================== % Setting OK. > vpn trunk bind set 1 y comp 2 192.168.10.1~192.168.10.2 192.168.99.1~192.168.99.254 1~65535 0 OFF % VPN Load Balance Tunnel Bind Table Index[1] detail: =========================================================== Action = ACTIVE Trunk Profile(000) Name= comp Binding Dial Out Index = 2 Binding Src IP = 192.168.10.1 ~ 192.168.10.2 Binding Dest IP = 192.168.99.1 ~ 192.168.99.254 Binding Dest Port = 1 ~ 65535 Binding Fragmented = NO Binding Protocol = ANY Protocol >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn NNeettBBiiooss This command allows users to enable or disable NetBios for Remote Access User Accounts or LAN-to-LAN Profile.

vpn NetBios set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>



<H2l/L2l> H2l means Remote Access User Accounts.

L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile.

Specify which one will be applied by NetBios.

<index> The index number of the profile.

<Block/Pass> Pass – Have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.

Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, set it block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn NetBios set H2l 1 Pass % Remote Dial In Profile Index [1] : % NetBios Block/Pass: [PASS]


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn mmssss This command allows users to configure the maximum segment size (MSS) for different TCP types.

vpn mss show

vpn mss default

vpn mss set <connection type> <TCP maximum segment size range>



show It means to display current setting status.

default TCP maximum segment size for all the VPN connection will be set as 1360 bytes.

set Use it to specify the connection type and value of MSS.

<connection type> 1~4 represent various type.

1 – PPTP

2 – L2TP

3 – IPSec

4 – L2TP over IPSec

<TCP maximum segment size range>

Each type has different segment size range.

PPTP – 1 ~ 1412

L2TP – 1 ~ 1408

IPSec – 1 ~ 1381

L2TP over IPSec – 1 ~ 1361

EExxaammppllee

>vpn mss set 1 1400 % VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) : PPTP = 1400 L2TP = 1360 IPSec = 1360 L2TP over IPSec = 1360 >vpn mss show VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) : PPTP = 1400 L2TP = 1360 IPSec = 1360 L2TP over IPSec = 1360

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn iikkee This command is used to display IKE memory status and leakage list.

vpn ike -q

EExxaammppllee

> vpn ike -q IKE Memory Status and Leakage List


# of free L-Buffer=95, minimum=94, leak=1 # of free M-Buffer=529, minimum=529 leak=3 # of free S-Buffer=1199, minimum=1198, leak=1 # of free Msgid-Buffer=1024, minimum=1024

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn MMuullttiiccaasstt This command allows users to pass or block the multi-cast packet via VPN.

vpn Multicast set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>



<H2l/L2l> H2l means Host to LAN (Remote Access User Accounts).

L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile.

<index> The index number of the profile.

<Block/Pass> Set Block/Pass the Multicast Packets.

The default is Block.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn Multicast set L2l 1 Pass % Lan to Lan Profile Index [1] : % Status Block/Pass: [PASS]

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ppaassss22nndd This command allows users to determine if the packets coming from the second subnet passing through current used VPN tunnel.

vpn pass2nd[on]

vpn pass2nd [off]



on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT.

off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn pass2nd on % 2nd subnet is allowed to pass VPN tunnel!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ppaassss22nnaatt This command allows users to determine if the packets passing through by NAT or not when the VPN tunnel disconnects.

vpn pass2nat [on]

vpn pass2nat [off]




on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT.

off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn pass2nat on % Packets would go through by NAT when VPN disconnect!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: vvppnn ssaammeeSSuubbnneett This command allows users to build VPN between clients via virtual subnet.

vpn sameSubnet -i [value]

vpn sameSubnet –E [0/1]

vpn sameSubnet –e[value]

vpn sameSubnet-I [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx]

vpn sameSubnet -o [add/del]

vpn sameSubnet -v



-i [value] Specify the index number of VPN profile.

–E [0/1]] Enable or disable the IPsec with the same subnet.

1 – enable.

0 – disable.

-e [value] Translate specified LAN to virtual subnet.

1 – LAN1

2 – LAN2

3 – LAN3 …

-I [xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx] Set the virtual subnet (e.g., 172.16.3.250).

-v Display current status of virtual subnet.

EExxaammppllee

> vpn sameS -i 1 -e 1 -E 1 -e 1 -I 10.10.10.0 -o add > vpn sameS -v IPsec with the same subnet: VPN profile 1 enable, % translated LAN1 to Virtual subnet: 10.10.10.0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann pppppp__mmrruu This command allows users to adjust the size of PPP LCP MRU. It is used for specific network.

wan ppp_mru <WAN interface number> <MRU size >




<WAN interface number> Type a number to represent the physical interface. For Vigor130, the number is 1 (which means WAN1).

<MRU size > It means the number of PPP LCP MRU. The available range is from 1400 to 1600.

EExxaammppllee

>wan ppp_mru 1 ? % Now: 1492 > wan ppp_mru 1 1490 > > wan ppp_mru 1 ? % Now: 1490 > wan ppp_mru 1 1492 > wan ppp_mru 1 ? % Now: 1492

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann mmttuu//wwaann mmttuu22 This command allows users to adjust the size of MTU/MTU2 for WAN.

wan mtu [value]

wan mtu2 [value]



value It means the number of MTU for PPP. The available range is from 1000 to 1500.

For Static IP/DHCP, the maximum number will be 1500.

For PPPoE, the maximum number will be 1492.

For PPTP/L2TP, the maximum number will be 1460.

EExxaammppllee

> wan mtu 1100 > wan mtu ? Static IP/DHCP (Max MSS: 1500) PPPoE(Max MSS: 1492) PPTP/L2TP(Max MSS: 1460) % wan ppp_mss <MSS size: 1000 ~ 1500> % Now: 1100

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann DDFF__cchheecckk This command allows you to enable or disable the function of DF (Don’t fragment)

wan DF_check [on]

wan DF_check [off]



on/off It means to enable or disable DF.


EExxaammppllee

> wan DF_check on %DF bit check enable!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann ddiissaabbllee This command allows you to disable WAN connection.

EExxaammppllee

> wan disable WAN %WAN disabled.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann eennaabbllee This command allows you to disable wan connection.

EExxaammppllee

> wan enable WAN %WAN1 enabled.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann ffoorrwwaarrdd This command allows you to enable or disable the function of WAN forwarding. The packets are allowed to be transmitted between different WANs.

wan forward [on]

wan forward [off]



on/off It means to enable or disable WAN forward.

EExxaammppllee

> wan forward ? %WAN forwarding is Disable! > wan forward on %WAN forwarding is enable!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann ssttaattuuss This command allows you to display the status of WAN connection, including connection mode, TX/RX packets, DNS settings and IP address.

EExxaammppllee

> wan status WAN1: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--- TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0


PVC_WAN3: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--- TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 PVC_WAN4: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--- TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0 PVC_WAN5: Offline, stall=N Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00 IP=---, GW IP=--- TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann ddeetteecctt This command allows you to Ping a specified IP to detect the WAN connection (static IP or PPPoE mode).

wan detect [wan1][on/off/always_on]

wan detect [wan1]target [ip addr]

wan detect [wan1]ttl [1-255]

wan detect status



on It means to enable ping detection. The IP address of the target shall be set.

off It means to enable ARP detection (default).

always_on disable link detect, always connected(only support static IP)

target It means to set the ping target.

ip addr It means the IP address used for detection. Type an IP address in this field.

ttl It means to set the ping TTL value (work as trace route)

If you do not set any value for ttl here or just type 0 here, the system will use default setting (255) as the ttl value.

status It means to show the current status.

EExxaammppllee

> wan detect status WAN1: always on WAN2: off WAN3: off WAN4: off WAN5: off > wan detect wan1 target 192.168.1.78 Set OK


> wan detect wan1 on Set OK > wan detect status WAN1: on, Target=192.168.1.78, TTL=255 WAN2: off WAN3: off WAN4: off WAN5: off >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann llbb This command allows you to Enable/Disable for each WAN to join auto load balance member.

wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] on

wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] off



wan1/wan2 It means to specify which WAN will be applied with load balance.

on It means to make WAN interface as the member of load balance.

off It means to cancel WAN interface as the member of load balance.

EExxaammppllee

> wan lb status

WAN1: on

WAN2: on

WAN3: on

WAN4: on

WAN5: on

WAN6: on

WAN7: on

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann mmvvllaann This command allows you to configure multi-VLAN for WAN and LAN. It supports pure bridge mode (modem mode) between Ethernet WAN and LAN port 2~4.

wan mvlan [pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable] [on/off/clear/tag tag_no] [service type/vlan priority] [px ... ][ Keep Tag]



pvc_no It means index number of PVC. There are 10 PVC, 0(Channel-1) to 9(Channel-9) allowed to be configured.

However, only 2 to 9 are available for configuration.

status It means to display the whole Bridge status.

save It means to save the configuration into flash of Vigor router.

enable/disable It means to enable/disable the Multi-VLAN function.

on/off It means to turn on/off bridge mode for the specific channel.


clear It means to turn off/clear the port.

tag tag_no It means to tag a number for the VLAN.

-1: No need to add tag number.

1-4095: Available setting numbers used as tagged number.

service type It means to specify the service type for VLAN.

0: Normal.

1: IGMP.

vlan priority It means to specify the priority for the VALN setting.

Range is from 0 to 7.

px It means LAN port. Available setting number is from 2 to 4. Port number 1 is locked for NAT usage.

Keep Tag It means Multi-VLAN packets will keep their VLAN headers to LAN.

EExxaammppllee

PVC 7 will map to LAN port 2/3/4 in bridge mode; service type is Normal. No tag added.

> wan mvlan 7 on p2 p3 p4

PVC Bridge p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 Service Type Tag Priority Keep Tag

------------------------------------------------------------------

7 ON 0 0 1 1 0 0 Normal 0(OFF) 0 OFF

>

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann mmuullttiiffnnoo This command allows you to specify a channel (in Multi-PVC/VLAN) to make bridge connection to a specified WAN interface.

wan multifno [channel #] [WAN interface #]

wan multifno status



channel # There are 4 (?) channels including VLAN and PVC.

Available settings are:

1=Channel 1

3=Channel 3

4=Channel 4

5=Channel 5

WAN interface # Type a number to indicate the WAN interface.

1=WAN1

status It means to display current bridge status.

EExxaammppllee

> wan multifno 5 1 % Configured channel 5 uplink to WAN1 > wan multifno status % Channel 3 uplink ifno: 3 % Channel 4 uplink ifno: 3 % Channel 5 uplink ifno: 3


% Channel 6 uplink ifno: 3 % Channel 7 uplink ifno: 3 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann vvllaann This command allows you to tag packets on WAN VLAN with specified number.

SSyynnttaaxx

wan vlan wan [#] adsl tag [value]

wan vlan wan [#] adsl [enable|disable]

wan vlan wan [#] adsl pri[value]

wan vlan wan [#] vdsl tag [value]

wan vlan wan [#] vdsl [enable|disable]

wan vlan wan [#] vdsl pri[value]

wan vlan stat



# It means the number of WAN interface.

1: means WAN1

2: means WAN2.

value It means the number to be tagged on packets.

The range of the value is between 32 ~ 4095.

enable|disable It means to enable or disable the WAN interface for VLAN.

pri[value] It means to set priority of data transmission via 802.1q.

The range of the value is between 0 ~ 7.

stat It means to display the table of WAN VLAN status.

EExxaammppllee

> wan vlan stat %Interface Pri Tag Enabled %====================================== % WAN1 (ADSL) 0 0 % WAN1 (VDSL) 0 0 %WAN2 0 0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann bbuuddggeett This command allows you determine the data traffic volume for each WAN interface respectively to prevent from overcharges for data transmission by the ISP.

SSyynnttaaxx

wan budget wan [#] rdate [day] [hour]

wan budget wan [#] [enable|disable]

wan budget wan [#] thres [budget limit (MB)]

wan budget wan [#] gthres [budget limit (GB)]

wan budget wan [#] mode [monthly|periodic|none]


wan budget wan [#] psday [th day in periodic]

wan budget wan [#] action [action bitmap]

wan budget status



wan[#] Specify the WAN interface.

rdate Specify the WAN budget refresh time.

day – Available settings are from 1 to 30.

hour – Available settings are from 1 to 23.

E.g., wan budget wan 1 rdate 5 10

If monthy mode is selected: WAN budget will be refreshed on 5th day at 10:00 in each month

If periodic mode is selected: WAN budget will be refreshed every 5 days and 10 hours

enable/disable enable - Enable the function of wan budget. disable - Disable the function of wan budget.

thres [budget limit (MB)] Specify the maximum value for WAN budget limit. (Unit: MB) budget limit – Type a number.

gthres [budget limit (GB)] Specify the maximum value of wan budget limit. (Unit: GB) budget limit – Type a number.

mode [monthly|periodic|none]

Specify the calculation mode (monthly, periodically, or none) for WAN budget.

psday [th day in periodic] It is used only when mode is set with “periodic”. Specify the order of “today” in the cycle.

E.g., wan budget wan 5 psday It means “today” is the 5th day in the billing cycle.

action [action bitmap] Determine the action to be performed when it reaches the WAN budget limit. action bitmap – Type a total number of actions to be executed. Different numbers represent different actions.

1: shotdown wan 2: send mail alert 4: send sms alert

For example, if you type “5” (5=1+4), the system will send SMS alert when WAN shotdown is detected.

status Display current configuration status of WAN budget.

EExxaammppllee

> wan budget wan 1 action 5 % WAN 1 budget action set to 5 > wan budget wan 1 gthres 10 % WAN 1 budget limit set to 10 GB

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann ddeetteecctt__mmttuu This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv4 target to ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.

SSyynnttaaxx

wan detect_mtu -w [number] -i [Host/IP address] -s [base_size] -d [decrease_size] (-c [count])




-w [number] Specify the WAN interface. Value: Type the number of WAN interface. 1: WAN1; 2:WAN2….and etc.

-I [Host/IP address] Specify the IPv4 target to detect. If can be an IPv4 address or domain name. Host/IP address: Type the IP address/domain name of the target.

-s [base_size] Set the MTU size base for Discovery. base_size: Available setting is 1000 ~ 1500.

-d [decrease size] Set the MTU size to decrease between detections. decrease size: Available setting is 1 ~ 100.

-c [count] Set the maximum times of ping failure during a Discovery. count: Available settings are 1 ~ 10. Default value is 3.

EExxaammppllee

> wan detect_mtu -w 2 -i 8.8.8.8 -s 1500 -d 30 -c 10 detecting mtu size:1500!!! mtu size:1470!!!

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwaann ddeetteecctt__mmttuu66 This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv6 target to ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.

SSyynnttaaxx

wan detect_mtu6 –w [number] –i [IPv6 address] –s [base_size]



-w [number] Specify the WAN interface number: Type the number of WAN interface. 1: WAN1; 2:WAN2….and etc.

-I [IPv6 address] Specify the IPv6 target to detect. It must be an IPv6 IP address. IPv6 address: Type the IPv6 address of the target.

-s [base_size] Specify the size of MTU. base_size: Available setting is 1000 ~ 1500.

EExxaammppllee

> wan detect_mtu6 -w 1 -i 2404:6800:4008:c06::5e -s 1500 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll aaccll This command allows the user to configure wireless access control settings.

SSyynnttaaxx

wl acl enable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

wl acl disable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

wl acl add [MAC] [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [isolate]

wl acl del [MAC]

wl acl mode [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [white/black]

wl acl show

wl acl showmode


wl acl clean



enable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

It means to enable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 and SSID4.

disable [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4]

It means to disable the settings for SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 and SSID4.

add [MAC] [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [isolate]

It means to associate a MAC address to certain SSID interfaces' access control settings. The isolate setting will limit the wireless client's network capabilities to accessing the wireless LAN only.

[MAC] format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

or xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx

or xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx

del [MAC] It means to delete a MAC address entry defined in the access control list.

mode [ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4] [white/black]

It means to set white/black list for each SSID.

wl acl show It means to show access control status.

wl acl showmode It means to show the mode for each SSID.

wl acl clean It means to clean all access control setting.

EExxaammppllee

> > wl acl showmode ssid1: none ssid2: none ssid3: none ssid4: none > wl acl add 00-50-70-ff-12-70 Set Done !! > wl acl add 00-50-70-ff-12-70 ssid1 ssid2 isolate Set Done !! > wl acl show ----------Enable Mac Address Filter--------- ssid1: dis ssid2: dis ssid3: dis ssid4: dis ----------MAC Address Filter---------- Index Attribute MAC Address Associated SSIDs 0 00:50:70:ff:12:70 ssid1 ssid2 ssid3 ssid4 1 s 00:50:70:ff:12:70 ssid1 ssid2 s: Isolate the station from LAN >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll ccoonnffiigg This command allows users to configure general settings and security settings for wireless connection.

wl config mode [value]

wl config mode show

wl config channel [number]


wl config preamble [enable]

wl config txburst [enable]

wl config ssid [ssid_num enable ssid_name [hidden_ssid]]

wl config security [SSID_NUMBER] [mode]

wl config ratectl [ssid_num enable upload download ]

wl config isolate [ssid_num lan member]



mode[value] It means to select connection mode for wireless connection.

Available settings are: "11bgn", "11gn", "11n", "11bg", "11g", or "11b".

mode show It means to display what the current wireless mode is.

channel [number] It means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN.

The available settings are 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12 and 13.

number=0, means Auto

number=1, means Channel 1

….

number=13, means Channel 13.

preamble [enable] It means to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11 packet.

Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync field instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble.

0: disable to use long preamble.

1: enable to use long preamble.

txburst [enable] It means to enhance the performance in data transmission about 40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst). It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time.

0: disable the function.

1: enable the funciton.

ssid[ssid_num enable ssid_name [hidden_ssid]]

It means to set the name of the SSID, hide the SSID if required.

ssid_num: Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.

ssid_name: Give a name for the specified SSID.

hidden_ssid: Type 0 to hide the SSID or 1 to display the SSID

Security [SSID_NUMBER] [mode][key][index]

It means to configure security settings for the wirelesss connection.

SSID_NUMBER: Type 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.

mode: Available settings are:

disable: No security.

wpa1x: WPA/802.1x Only

wpa21x: WPA2/802.1x Only

wpamix1x: Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only)

wep1x: WEP/802.1x Only

wpapsk: WPA/PSK

wpa2psk: WPA2/PSK

wpamixpsk: Mixed (WPA+WPA2)/PSK

wep: WEP

key, index: Moreover, you have to add keys for wpapsk, wpa2psk, wpamixpsk and wep, and specify index number of schedule profiles


to be followed by the wireless connection.

WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII text string or 10/26 Hexadecimal digit format; WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII text string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format.

ratectl [ssid_num enable upload download]

It means to set the rate control for the specified SSID.

ssid_num: Choose 1, 2, 3 or 4 to specify SSID1, SSID2, SSID3 or SSID4.

enable: It means to enable the function of the rate control for the specified SSID. 0: disable and 1:enable.

upload: It means to configure the rate control for data upload. The unit is kbps.

download: It means to configure the rate control for data download. The unit is kbps.

isolate [ssid_num lan member]

It means to isolate the wireless connection for LAN and/or Member.

lan – It can make the wireless clients (stations) with remote-dial and LAN to LAN users not accessing for each other.

member – It can make the wireless clients (stations) with the same SSID not accessing for each other.

EExxaammppllee

> wl config mode 11bgn Current mode is 11bgn % <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the channel > wl config channel 13 Current channel is 13 % <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the channel. > wl config preamble 1 Long preamble is enabled % <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters. > wl config ssid 1 enable dray SSID Enable Hide_SSID Name 1 1 0 dray % <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters. > wl config security 1 wpa1x %% Configured Wlan Security Setting: % SSID1 %% Mode: wpa1x %% Wireless card must be reset for configurations to take effect %% (Telnet Command: wl restart)

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll sseett This command allows users to configure basic wireless settings.

wl set [SSID] [CHAN[En]]

wl set txburst [enable]



SSID It means to type the SSID for the router. The maximum character that you can use is 32.

CHAN[En] It means to specify required channel for the router.

CHAN: The range for the number is between 1 ~ 13.

En: type on to enable the function; type off to disable the function.


txburst [enable] It means to enhance the performance in data transmission about 40%* more (by enabling Tx Burst). It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time.

0: disable the function.

1: enable the function.

EExxaammppllee

> wl set MKT 2 on % New Wlan Setting is: % SSID=MKT % Chan=2 % Wl is Enable

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll aacctt This command allows users to activate wireless settings.

wl act [En]



En It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation.

0: diable

1: enable

EExxaammppllee

> wl act on % Set Wlan to Enable.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll iissoo__vvppnn This command allows users to activate the function of VPN isolation.

wl iso_vpn [ssid] [En]



ssid It means the number of SSID.

1: SSID1

2: SSID2

3: SSID3

4: SSID4

En It means to enable or disable the function of VPN isolation.

0: disable

1: enable

EExxaammppllee

> wl iso_vpn 1 on % ssid: 1 isolate vpn on :1

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll wwppaa


This command allows you to configure WPA wireless settings.

wl wpa 1/2/3



wl wpa Type 1/2/3 to represent different WPA modes.

1 – means WPA+WPA2

2 – means WPA2 Only

3 – means WPA Only

EExxaammppllee

> wl wpa 1 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll wwmmmm This command allows users to set WMM for wireless connection. It defines the priority levels for four access categories derived from 802.1d (prioritization tabs).

wl wmm ap QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin Cwmax Txop ACM

wl wmm bss QueIdx Aifsn Cwmin Cwmax Txop ACM

wl wmm ack Que0_Ack Que1_Ack Que2_Ack Que3_Ack

wl wmm enable SSID0 SSID1 SSID2 SSID3

wl wmm apsd value

wl wmm show



ap It means to set WMM for access point.

bss It means to set WMM for wireless clients.

ack It means to map to the Ack policy settings of AP WMM.

enable It means to enable the WMM for each SSID.

0: disable

1: enable

Apsd [value] It means to enable / disable the ASPD(automatic power-save delivery) function.

0: disable

1: enable

show It displays current status of WMM.

QueIdx It means the number of the queue which the WMM settings will be applied to. There are four queues, best effort, background, voice, and video.

Aifsn It controls how long the client waits for each data transmission.

Cwmin/ Cwmax CWMin means contention Window-Min and CWMax means contention Window-Max. Specify the value ranging from 1 to 15.

Txop It means transmission opportunity. Specify the value ranging from 0 to 65535.

ACM It can restrict stations from using specific category class if it is enabled.


0: disable

1: enable

EExxaammppllee

> wl wmm ap 0 3 4 6 0 0 QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0 > wl wmm enable 1 0 1 0 WMM_SSID0 =1, WMM_SSID1 =0,WMM_SSID2 =1,WMM_SSID3 =0 > wl wmm show Enable WMM: SSID0 =1, SSID1 =0,SSID2 =1,SSID3 =0 APSD=0 QueIdx=0: APAifsn=3,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=6, APTxop=0,APACM=0 QueIdx=1: APAifsn=7,APCwmin=4,APCwmax=10, APTxop=0,APACM=0 QueIdx=2: APAifsn=1,APCwmin=3,APCwmax=4, APTxop=94,APACM=0 QueIdx=3: APAifsn=1,APCwmin=2,APCwmax=3, APTxop=47,APACM=0 QueIdx=0: BSSAifsn=3,BSSCwmin=4,BSSCwmax=10, BSSTxop=0,BSSACM=0 QueIdx=1: BSSAifsn=7,BSSCwmin=4,BSSCwmax=10, BSSTxop=0,BSSACM=0 QueIdx=2: BSSAifsn=2,BSSCwmin=3,BSSCwmax=4, BSSTxop=94,BSSACM=0 QueIdx=3: BSSAifsn=2,BSSCwmin=2,BSSCwmax=3, BSSTxop=47,BSSACM=0 AckPolicy[0]=0: AckPolicy[1]=0,AckPolicy[2]=0,AckPolicy[3]=0

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll hhtt This command allows you to configure wireless settings.

wl ht bw value

wl ht gi value

wl ht badecline value

wl ht autoba value

wl ht rdg value

wl ht msdu value

wl ht txpower value

wl ht antenna value

wl ht greenfield value



wl ht bw value The value you can type is 0 (for BW_20) and 1 (for BW_40).

wl ht gi value The value you can type is 0 (for GI_800) and 1 (for GI_4001)

wl ht badecline value The value you can type is 0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).

wl ht autoba value The value you can type is 0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).

wl ht rdg value The value you can type is 0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).

wl ht msdu value The value you can type is 0 (for disabling) and 1 (for enabling).

wl ht txpower value The value you can type ranges from 1 – 6 (level).

wl ht antenna value The value you can type ranges from 0-3.

0: 2T3R


1: 2T2R

2: 1T2R

3: 1T1R

wl ht greenfield value The value you can type is 0 (for mixed mode) and 1 (for green field).

EExxaammppllee

> wl ht bw value 1 BW=0 <Note> Please restart wireless after you set new parameters. > wl restart Wireless restart................

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll rreessttaarrtt This command allows you to restart wireless setting.

EExxaammppllee

> wl restart Wireless restart................

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll wwddss This command allows you to configure WDS settings.

SSyynnttaaxx

wl wds mode [value]

wl wds security [value]

wl wds ap [value]

wl wds hello [value]

wl wds status

wl wds show

wl wds mac [value]

wl wds flush



mode [value] It means to specify connection mode for WDS.

[value]: Available settings are :

d: Disable

b: Bridge

r: Repeapter

security [value] It means to configure security mode with encrypted keys for WDS.

mode: Available settings are:

disable: No security.

wep: WEP

wpapsk [key]: WPA/PSK

wpa2psk [key]: WPA2/PSK

key: Moreover, you have to add keys for wpapsk, wpa2psk, and wep, and specify index number of schedule profiles to be followed by the wireless connection.


WEP keys must be in 5/13 ASCII text string or 10/26 Hexadecimal digit format; WPA keys must be in 8~63 ASCII text string or 64 Hexadecimal digit format.

e.g.,

wl dual wds security disable

wl dual wds security wep 12345

wl dual wds security wpa2psk 12345678

ap [value] It means to enable or disable the AP function.

Value: 1 – enable the function.

0 – disable the function.

hello [value] It means to send hello message to remote end (peer).

Value: 1 – enable the function.

0 – disable the function.

status It means to display WDS link status for 2.4GHz connection.

show It means to display current WDS settings.

mac add [index addr] add [index addr] – Add the peer MAC entry in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table.

mac clear/disable/enable [index/all]

clear/disable/enable [index/all]- Clear, disable, enable the specifed or all MAC entries in Repeater/Bridge WDS MAC table. e.g,

wl dual wds mac enable 1

flush It means to reset all WDS setting.

EExxaammppllee

> wl wds status Please enable WDS hello function first. > wl wds hello 1 % <Note> Please restart router after you set the parameters. > wl wds status

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll bbttnnccttll This command allows you to enable or disable wireless button control.

wl btnctl [value]



value 0: disable

1: enable

EExxaammppllee

> wl btnctl 1 Enable wireless botton control Current wireless botton control is on >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll iiwwpprriivv This command is reserved for RD debug. Do not use them.


TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwll sseett88002211xx This command allows you to configure the external or internal server used by Vigor router for wireless authentication.

SSyynnttaaxx

wl set8021x –t [0/1]

wl set8021x –v



-t Specify the type (external or internal) of wireless authentication server.

0 – Indicate the external RADIUS server.

1- Indicate the local 802.1x server.

-v View the settings of 802.1x.

EExxaammppllee

> wl set8021x -t 1 % <Note> Please restart wireless after you set the parameters. > wl set8021x -v 802.1X type is : Local 802.1X >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: wwooll This command allows you to set the white list of WAN IP addresses/Subnets, that the magic packet from these IP addresses/Subnets will be eligible to pass through NAT and wake up the LAN client. You also need to set NAT rule for LAN client.

SSyynnttaaxx

wol up [MAC Address]/[IP Address]

wol fromWan [on/off/any]

wol fromWan_Setting [idx][ip address][mask]



MAC Address It means the MAC address of the host.

IP address It means the LAN IP address of the host. If you want to wake up LAN host by using IP address, be sure that that IP address has been bound with the MAC address (IP BindMAC).

on/off/any It means to enable or disable the function of WOL from WAN.

on: enable

off: disable

any: It means any source IP address can pass through NAT and wake up the LAN client.

This command will allow the user to choose whether WoL packets can be passed from the Internet to the LAN network from a specific WAN interface.

[idx][ip address] [mask] It means the index number (from 1 to 4).

These commands will allow the user to configure the LAN clients


that the user may wake up from the Internet through the use of the WoL packet.

ip address - It means the WAN IP address.

mask - It means the mask of the IP address.

EExxaammppllee

> wol fromWan on > wol fromWan_Setting 1 192.168.1.45 255.255.255.0 >

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: aappppqqooss The command is used to configure QoS for APP..

SSyynnttaaxx

appqos view

appqos enable[0/1]

appqos traceable [-v | -e AP_INDEX CLASS | -d AP_INDEX]

appqos untraceable



view It means to display current status of APP QoS.

enable[0/1] It means to enable or disable the function of APP QoS.

traceable/ untraceable The APPs are divided into traceable and untraceable based on their properties.

-v It means to view the content of all traceable APs.

Use “appqos traceable –v” to display all of the traceable APS with speficed index number.

Use “appqos untraceable –v” to display all of the untraceable APS with speficed index number.

-e It menas to enable QoS for application(s) and assign QoS class.

AP_INDEX Each index number represents one application.

Index number: 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 58, 60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 68 are used for 13 traceabel APPs.

Index number: 0~49, 55~59, 61, 67, 69, and 70~123 are used for 125 untraceable AP.

CLASS Specifies the QoS class of the application, from 1 to 4

1:Class 1, 2:Class 2, 3:Class 3, 4:Other Class

-d It means to disable QoS for application(s).

EExxaammppllee

> appqos enable 1 APP QoS set to Enable. > appqos traceable -e 68 2 TELNET: ENABLED, QoS Class 2.

TTeellnneett CCoommmmaanndd:: nnaanndd bbaadd //nnaanndd uussaaggee


“NAND usage” is used to display NAND Flash usage; “nand bad” is used to display NAND Flash bad blocks.

nand bad

nand usage

EExxaammppllee

>nand usage Show NAND Flash Usage: Partition Total Used Available Use% cfg 4194304 7920 4186384 0% bin_web 33554432 11869493 21684939 35% cfg-bak 4194304 7920 4186384 0% bin_web-bak 33554432 11869493 21684939 35% > nand bad Show NAND Flash Bad Blocks: Block Address Partition 1020 0x07f80000 unused 1021 0x07fa0000 unused 1022 0x07fc0000 unused 1023 0x07fe0000 unused

Vigor2765 Series 35b Security Router User's Guide - Geizhals ...

Documents

Transcript of Vigor2765 Series 35b Security Router User's Guide - Geizhals ...